05.03.2013 Views

SXSW 2013 Sampler

SXSW 2013 Sampler

SXSW 2013 Sampler

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<strong>SXSW</strong> ® <strong>2013</strong> <strong>Sampler</strong><br />

Foreword by Jeff Dachis<br />

Founder & CEO, Dachis Group<br />

SOCIAL<br />

BUSINESS<br />

BY DESIGN<br />

transformative<br />

social media<br />

strategies for<br />

the connected<br />

company<br />

THE<br />

OF<br />

MARKETING<br />

when to tweet, what to post,<br />

how to blog, and other<br />

proven strategies<br />

NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLER<br />

Foreword by MEG WHITMAN<br />

Rebooting<br />

W RK<br />

Transform How You Work in the<br />

AGE OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP<br />

Maynard Webb<br />

AND CARLYE ADLER<br />

BETH KANTER<br />

KATIE DELAHAYE PAINE<br />

FOREWORD BY LAURA ARRILLAGA-ANDREESSEN<br />

MEASURING<br />

THE<br />

NETWORKED<br />

NONPROFIT<br />

DION HINCHCLIFFE<br />

PETER KIM<br />

USING DATA<br />

TO CHANGE<br />

THE WORLD<br />

Edited by<br />

WILLIAM T.<br />

PAARLBERG<br />

*This sampler is not sponsored by <strong>SXSW</strong> ®<br />

Efficiency<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

JASON LANKOW JOSH RITCHIE ROSS CROOKS<br />

Currency $<br />

Founders of Column Five<br />

¥<br />

y<br />

£<br />

€<br />

x<br />

12<br />

ATTRACT<br />

The design and visual<br />

representation of information,<br />

6<br />

including the visualization<br />

INFORM<br />

of data, processes, hierarchy,<br />

3<br />

anatomy, chronology, and other<br />

facts. The use of such graphics<br />

INSPIRE<br />

Response<br />

can aid in the detection of trends<br />

fig. 01<br />

and patterns, expediting<br />

comprehension and improving<br />

INFOGRAPHICS CS C<br />

Response<br />

Market<br />

AUDIENCE<br />

How Engaging Your Customers<br />

and Employees Can Make<br />

Your Business Thrive<br />

The Book of<br />

Business Awesome<br />

Scott Stratten<br />

Author of UnMarketing<br />

The Book of<br />

Business UnAwesome<br />

THE<br />

The CCost<br />

of Not Listening,<br />

Engaging, or Being<br />

Gr Great at What You Do<br />

ULTIMATE<br />

ONLINE<br />

CUSTOMER<br />

SERVICE<br />

GUIDE<br />

How to Connect With Your Customers to<br />

MARSHA COLLIER<br />

Bestselling Author of Starting an eBay Business for Dummies<br />

foreword by David Meerman Scott<br />

————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————<br />

THE NEW RULES OF SOCIAL MEDIA SERIES


THE<br />

OF<br />

MARKETING<br />

when to tweet, what to post,<br />

how to blog, and other<br />

proven strategies


Contents<br />

Acknowledgements ix<br />

Introduction 1<br />

Part I Content 7<br />

Chapter 1 E-Books 9<br />

Chapter 2 Webinars 25<br />

Part II Channels 35<br />

Chapter 3 SEO 37<br />

Chapter 4 Twitter 53<br />

Chapter 5 Facebook 75<br />

Chapter 6 Pinterest 101<br />

Chapter 7 Blogging 109<br />

vii


viii Contents<br />

Part III Middle of the Funnel (MOFU) 127<br />

Chapter 8 E-Mail Marketing 129<br />

Chapter 9 Lead Generation 153<br />

Part IV Analytics 171<br />

Chapter 10 Analytics 173<br />

Index 185


4<br />

Twitter<br />

53


Twitter is my favorite social site. I love the simplicity, the fl exibility,<br />

and the vast audience. I remember a time before the word<br />

retweet existed, when it took only 30 or so tweets from about as<br />

many people for a phrase to become a trending topic worldwide.<br />

It is the perfect platform for the distribution of marketing content.<br />

Describe a link, paste it in the box, and hit Tweet. Your followers<br />

can then click and read, and if they ’re so motivated, they can share<br />

that link with their followers. It ’s the most elegant viral mechanism<br />

yet invented.<br />

I hold some controversial points of view about Twitter, but<br />

none without data backing them up. And that ’s what this chapter<br />

is—my most important Twitter data (and the best collection of it<br />

anywhere).<br />

I ’ve long been interested in the idea that “engaging in the conversation”<br />

is the single most important function of social media<br />

marketing, so I ’ve applied my analysis to test that statement in a<br />

variety of places. One of those places has been Twitter.<br />

I looked at millions of Twitter accounts and separated them into<br />

two groups: those with more than 1,000 followers (the fi rst orange<br />

bar in Figure 4.1 ) and those with fewer than 1,000 followers (the<br />

fi rst black bar in Figure 4.1 ). I then compared those two groups by<br />

the percentage of their tweets that started with an “@” sign to arrive<br />

at a reply percentage. I repeated this analysis with accounts having<br />

more than 1 million followers (the second orange bar in Figure 4.1 )<br />

and accounts with fewer than 1 million followers (the second black<br />

bar in Figure 4.1 ) and found similar results.<br />

55


56 Channels<br />

Percentage of Tweets That Start with “ @ ”<br />

18%<br />

16%<br />

14%<br />

12%<br />

10%<br />

8%<br />

6%<br />

4%<br />

2%<br />

0%<br />

>1,000 1 million 1,000<br />


Twitter 57<br />

I found that highly followed accounts tweet more links<br />

than their lesser followed counterparts. These accounts did not<br />

build their reach by being in conversations; they built it by sharing<br />

interesting content in a broadcast fashion. In fact, there are not<br />

many examples of well-known Twitter accounts that are built on<br />

lots of replies, whereas there are countless accounts with more than<br />

1 million followers that do nothing more than share interesting<br />

facts, quotes, links, and news.<br />

Do not think of “engaging in the conversation” on Twitter as a<br />

way of building your reach. Instead, focus on gathering and sharing<br />

as much interesting, relevant content as you can.<br />

If you should tweet lots of links to get followers, how many links<br />

is too much? Is it possible to overtweet?<br />

Using data from HubSpot ’s free Twitter Grader tool, I analyzed<br />

just over 5 million Twitter accounts and compared the number of<br />

times per day they tweeted on average and their number of followers<br />

(Figure 4.3 ). I found that followers peaked with accounts that<br />

1,200 1,000,000<br />

1,000<br />

800<br />

600<br />

400<br />

200<br />

0<br />

1<br />

7<br />

13<br />

19<br />

25<br />

31<br />

37<br />

43<br />

49<br />

55<br />

61<br />

67<br />

73<br />

79<br />

85<br />

91<br />

97<br />

Tweets per Day<br />

103<br />

Figure 4.3 Tweets-per-Day versus Followers<br />

R 2 =0.6627<br />

109<br />

115<br />

121<br />

127<br />

133<br />

139<br />

145<br />

100,000<br />

10,000<br />

1,000<br />

100<br />

www.Hubspot.com


58 Channels<br />

tweeted around 22 times per day and there was no steep drop off<br />

beyond that.<br />

Twenty-two tweets per day, on average, is a pretty breakneck<br />

pace for most accounts to keep up, especially if they ’re tweeting<br />

interesting content and not just anything they fi nd. The takeaway<br />

of this graph is not that 22 times a day is a magical number, just that<br />

it ’s pretty hard to overtweet. And if you ’re wondering how often you<br />

should tweet, the answer is generally “more than you currently are.”<br />

During my research into Twitter, I translated two linguistic analysis<br />

systems to the microblogging platform: Linguistic Inquiry and<br />

Word Count (LIWC) and Regressive Imagery Dictionary (RID). I<br />

did not invent these two systems; they were created by academics at<br />

universities. I simply applied them to social media.<br />

One of the traits that these systems allowed me to analyze was<br />

self-referential language—how often accounts refer to themselves,<br />

either as individuals or as an organization. This includes use of<br />

words such as I, me, us, and we.<br />

When I compared the percentage of tweets that used selfreferential<br />

language to the number of followers those accounts<br />

had—looking at millions of accounts—I found a striking pattern<br />

(Figure 4.4 ). As self-reference increases, follower count decreases.<br />

Self-Reference<br />

1.3%<br />

1.2%<br />

1.1%<br />

1.0%<br />

0.9%<br />

0.8%<br />

0.7%<br />

0<br />

1,000<br />

2,000<br />

3,000<br />

4,000<br />

Followers<br />

Figure 4.4 Effect of Self-Reference on Followers<br />

5,000<br />

6,000<br />

7,000


Twitter 59<br />

For most noncelebrity individuals and brands, Twitter users do not<br />

follow them to hear them talk about themselves constantly.<br />

Those same linguistic analysis systems also allowed me to look<br />

into the relationship between negative sentiment and followers.<br />

Here also, I found a similar, striking pattern. As negative remarks<br />

increase, follower counts decrease (Figure 4.5 ).<br />

People don ’t go to social media to get bummed out about the<br />

world around them; they can just turn on the TV news if that ’s<br />

what they want. They go to social media to talk to their friends and<br />

generally feel good.<br />

This sounds like unicorns-and-rainbows superstition, but in this<br />

case, the data support it. Negativity doesn ’t sell on social media as<br />

well as positivity does.<br />

When you sign up to Twitter, you ’re given the ability to provide<br />

three bits of personal information: a profi le picture, a 160-character<br />

bio, and a link to your home page. Over the years I ’ve tracked the<br />

number of accounts that fail to fi ll these fi elds out, and although<br />

the numbers have gotten better with time, I ’m still surprised by how<br />

many accounts don ’t take the few moments required to do this.<br />

When I analyze the relationship between providing this information<br />

and follower counts, the results are unsurprising. In all<br />

three cases, accounts that provide a picture, bio, and home page<br />

Negative Remarks<br />

1.0%<br />

0.9%<br />

0.8%<br />

0.7%<br />

0.6%<br />

0<br />

1,000<br />

2,000<br />

3,000<br />

4,000<br />

Followers<br />

Figure 4.5 Effect of Negative Remarks on Followers<br />

5,000<br />

6,000<br />

7,000


60 Channels<br />

Average # of Followers<br />

300<br />

200<br />

100<br />

0<br />

Picture<br />

Figure 4.6 Effect of Profi le Picture on Followers<br />

No picture<br />

link all have more followers than accounts that do not. Figure<br />

4.6 shows the number of followers versus having or not having a<br />

profi le picture, but the effect is the same with the other two fi elds<br />

as well.<br />

Take the time to fi ll out your Twitter bio. Users want to know<br />

who you are before they ’ll follow you.<br />

Going a step further, I dug into actual language used by Twitter<br />

account holders in their bios. One common unicorns-and-rainbows<br />

myth is that you should not call yourself a guru or use any other<br />

word to label yourself an expert.<br />

But the data contradict this superstition. I found that Twitter<br />

accounts that used the word guru in their bios had about 100 more<br />

followers than the average account (Figure 4.7 ). These data do not<br />

mean that if you go over onto Twitter right now and add that word<br />

to your profi le that you ’ll instantly get more followers. But if you<br />

look at the rest of the graph, it does indicate that you should not<br />

be afraid to identify yourself authoritatively. Tell potential followers<br />

why they should listen to you. If you ’ve written a book, founded a<br />

company, or are an expert on something, tell us.<br />

But remember the data about self-reference in tweets. The bio is<br />

the only place you should be talking about yourself.


Followers above Average<br />

200<br />

150<br />

100<br />

50<br />

0<br />

Official<br />

Founder<br />

Speaker<br />

Twitter 61<br />

So far, I ’ve presented data only about follower counts, but<br />

I ’ve also spent a great deal of time analyzing retweets as well. In<br />

Figure 4.8 , I compared the percentage of accounts’ tweets that contain<br />

a link and their average number of retweets per tweet.<br />

I found that here is a sweet spot of linking for maximum retweets.<br />

Accounts that posted 60 to 80 percent links tended to get the most<br />

retweets. Ninety percent or more links can look spammy, so retweet<br />

performance tends to drop off there.<br />

Expert<br />

Figure 4.7 Effect of Bio Words on Followers<br />

Percentage of Tweets Retweeted<br />

16%<br />

14%<br />

12%<br />

10%<br />

8%<br />

6%<br />

4%<br />

2%<br />

0%<br />

0%<br />

10%<br />

20%<br />

30%<br />

40%<br />

Sweet spot<br />

Guru<br />

Percentage of Tweets Containing a Link<br />

50%<br />

Figure 4.8 Sweet Spot for Retweets: Links<br />

60%<br />

70%<br />

80%<br />

Author<br />

90%<br />

100%


62 Channels<br />

Percentage of Tweets Retweeted<br />

16%<br />

14%<br />

12%<br />

10%<br />

8%<br />

6%<br />

4%<br />

2%<br />

0%<br />

0%<br />

10%<br />

Sweet Spot<br />

Percentage of Tweets Beginning with @<br />

20%<br />

30%<br />

40%<br />

Then I looked at a similar comparison of reply percentage<br />

and retweets and found a much different sweet spot (Figure 4.9 ).<br />

Basically, the more replying done by the Twitter accounts in my<br />

data set, the lower their average retweets per tweet.<br />

As these data and the data about follower counts show, constantly<br />

replying and being chatty on Twitter does not benefi t a marketer<br />

in terms of reach or content spread. If you ’re using Twitter<br />

as a marketing channel, with the goal of building a large audience<br />

of engaged followers who often share your content, you ’ll be best<br />

served by focusing on sharing a lot of interesting content, rather<br />

than replying to every message you get.<br />

When I fi rst began my retweet research, the easiest way I found<br />

to get more retweets was to simply ask for them (Figure 4.10 ). In<br />

fact I conducted an experiment before the word retweet had been<br />

invented where I simply asked people to tweet a certain link, and<br />

the title of the experiment ended up trending worldwide.<br />

Over the years since then, I ’ve had many discussions and debates<br />

about the power of asking for retweets. More recently, I decided to<br />

update and solidify my data about it to put an end to the doubt.<br />

I looked at 20,000 randomly selected tweets and broke them<br />

into three groups: those that contained the phrase please retweet,<br />

those that contained please RT, and those that contained neither<br />

call to action. I found that whereas only 12 percent of the “neither”<br />

50%<br />

60%<br />

Figure 4.9 Sweet Spot for Retweets: Replies<br />

70%<br />

80%<br />

90%<br />

100%


Please Retweet 51% RT’ed<br />

Please RT 39% RT’ed<br />

Neither 12% RT’ed<br />

0% 10%<br />

20% 30% 40% 50%<br />

± 0.67%<br />

Confidence interval: 90%<br />

± 1.43%<br />

± 1.69%<br />

Twitter 63<br />

Figure 4.10 Phrase Please Retweet Gets Four Times More Retweets<br />

group ’s tweets were retweeted, more than 50 percent of the “please<br />

retweet” group ’s tweets were.<br />

Calls to action work in all forms of marketing, and social media<br />

is no different. If you want more retweets, ask for them.<br />

Thanks to the great people over at Buffer (an awesome app you<br />

should check out), I was able to study millions of tweets and their<br />

retweet performance. First, I looked at the relationship between the<br />

time of day the tweets were sent and how many retweets they got<br />

(Figure 4.11 ). The data confi rmed my earlier analysis on a different<br />

data set and showed that retweets were highest for tweets posted<br />

between 3 pm and 5 pm Eastern time.<br />

I know from personal experience that as the business day wears<br />

on, I often lose the motivation and wit to come up with worthwhile<br />

original tweets. It ’s around 4 pm that my retweeting activity<br />

increases because of this.<br />

Experiment with tweeting those updates you want to spread<br />

during this time period and see if it works for you.<br />

The fi rst large-scale retweet data set I compiled was more than<br />

100 million retweets gathered over the course of more than a year.<br />

It was this database that formed the basis of much of my earliest<br />

work on Twitter.<br />

Using this data set, I was able to analyze the volume of retweeting<br />

activity that occurred on the different days of the week. I found<br />

that although overall Twitter activity tends to be highest early in<br />

the business week, retweeting peaks on Fridays (Figure 4.12 ).


64 Channels<br />

6<br />

5<br />

4<br />

3<br />

2<br />

1<br />

0<br />

12:00 am<br />

1:00 am<br />

2:00 am<br />

3:00 am<br />

4:00 am<br />

5:00 am<br />

6:00 am<br />

7:00 am<br />

8:00 am<br />

9:00 am<br />

10:00 am<br />

11:00 am<br />

12:00 pm<br />

1:00 pm<br />

2:00 pm<br />

3:00 pm<br />

4:00 pm<br />

5:00 pm<br />

6:00 pm<br />

7:00 pm<br />

8:00 pm<br />

9:00 pm<br />

10:00 pm<br />

11:00 pm<br />

Figure 4.11 Time of Day versus Retweets<br />

I think the reasons for this might be similar to the reasons that<br />

the end of the business day is the best for getting retweets. And<br />

the tactical takeaway is much the same as well. On Friday afternoons,<br />

look over the content you ’ve posted during the week and<br />

share the best stuff again. After a few weeks, you ’ll learn if Friday<br />

afternoon as a highly retweetable time works for your business and<br />

your audience.<br />

Earlier in this chapter, I included data that showed that selfreference<br />

was correlated with lowered follower counts. I also analyzed<br />

the relationship between self-reference and retweets and<br />

found a similar pattern (Figure 4.13 ).<br />

Looking at millions of retweets and millions of non-retweeted<br />

“normal” tweets, I found that non-retweets tended to contain more<br />

self-referential language than retweets. Not only does self-reference<br />

not lead to more followers, it also doesn ’t lead to more retweets.<br />

When I share one of your tweets with my audience through a<br />

retweet, I need to believe that it will be relevant and interesting to<br />

my followers. The minutia of your life—what you had for lunch and<br />

how many times your cat farted—is very unlikely to make that cut.<br />

If you ’re on Twitter to communicate with friends you know in real


Retweet Volume<br />

19%<br />

17%<br />

15%<br />

13%<br />

11%<br />

Sun<br />

Figure 4.12 Retweet Activity by Day<br />

3%<br />

2%<br />

1%<br />

0%<br />

Mon Tues Wed Thu Fri Sat<br />

Retweets<br />

Non-retweets<br />

Figure 4.13 Amount of Self-Reference in Tweets and Retweets<br />

Word Occurrence<br />

100<br />

80<br />

60<br />

40<br />

20<br />

0<br />

Retweets<br />

Figure 4.14 Word Novelty in Retweets<br />

Random tweets<br />

Twitter 65


66 Channels<br />

life, feel free to talk about yourself all day long, but if you ’re there<br />

for marketing and business reasons, stop talking about yourself.<br />

Whenever I ’ve asked people, in surveys or focus groups, why<br />

they retweet some tweets but not others, the idea of novelty comes<br />

up frequently. People tell me that they want to retweet new information.<br />

They want to be the fi rst, not the last, to inform their<br />

followers of some breaking news. Scarce and new information is<br />

valuable information. Things that everyone else knows aren ’t particularly<br />

worthwhile.<br />

In an effort to quantify this idea, I looked at word occurrence in<br />

retweets and non-retweeted normal tweets. I measured how common<br />

the words in each tweet were ( the is a very common word and<br />

thus had a high word occurrence score, whereas sesquipedalian is<br />

much less common and has a very low word occurrence score).<br />

I found that retweets tended to contain rarer words than nonretweeted<br />

tweets. Nobody wants to retweet you if you ’re simply saying<br />

the same things everyone else is saying. If you want me to share<br />

your content, you need to say something new, something I (and my<br />

followers) haven ’t heard—or read—before.<br />

Perhaps the simplest bit of retweet analysis I ’ve conducted is<br />

about the occurrence of links in tweets and the likelihood that<br />

those tweets are retweeted. In my data set, I found that only 18.96<br />

percent of tweets contained a link, but 56.69 percent of retweeted<br />

tweets contained a link. People are more likely to retweet a link<br />

rather than just a simple tweet (Figure 4.15 ).<br />

These data should serve to reinforce the importance of sharing<br />

as many interesting, relevant links on Twitter as you can. Share<br />

your content—and don ’t be afraid to share it a few times—and fi nd<br />

content from other sources that will also interest your audience and<br />

share those links. Establishing yourself as a source of useful, novel<br />

content is the most data-supported strategy to more followers and<br />

retweets.<br />

I then analyzed the most common words and phrases that<br />

occurred in retweets more than they ’re expected to, based on how<br />

often they occur in non-retweeted normal tweets (Figure 4.16 ). I<br />

found a number of interesting things, but we should remember to


Non-retweets<br />

Links<br />

Figure 4.15 Effect of Links on Retweets<br />

1. you<br />

2. twitter<br />

3. please<br />

4. retweet<br />

5. post<br />

6. blog<br />

7. social<br />

8. free<br />

9. media<br />

10. help<br />

Retweets<br />

Links<br />

11. please retweet<br />

12. great<br />

13. social media<br />

14. 10<br />

15. follow<br />

16. how to<br />

17. top<br />

18. blog post<br />

19. check out<br />

20. new blog post<br />

Figure 4.16 Most Retweetable Words and Phrases<br />

Twitter 67<br />

think about the reasons why these words are on this list, rather than<br />

blindly using them and expecting more retweets.<br />

The most retweetable word in my data set was the word you.<br />

Twitter users want to hear you talk about them, not yourself. The<br />

words twitter and social indicate that talking about social media in<br />

general and Twitter in specifi c works on Twitter. Also on the list<br />

are please retweet and new blog post, which corroborate earlier points<br />

about asking for retweets and the importance of novelty. Free is<br />

always a powerful word in marketing, and on Twitter it is no different.<br />

And we fi nd how to, top, and 10 on this list, showing that utility<br />

content and chunked, list-based content performs well on Twitter,<br />

as it does on other forms of social media.<br />

On the fl ip side of the coin, we fi nd the least retweetable words,<br />

those words that occur far less in retweets than their commonality


68 Channels<br />

1. game<br />

2. going<br />

3. haha<br />

4. lol<br />

5. but<br />

6. watching<br />

7. work<br />

8. home<br />

9. night<br />

10. bed<br />

Figure 4.17 Least Retweetable Words<br />

11. well<br />

12. sleep<br />

13. gonna<br />

14. hey<br />

15. tomorrow<br />

16. tired<br />

17. some<br />

18. back<br />

19. bored<br />

20. listening<br />

in normal tweets would seem to predict (Figure 4.17 ). This list of<br />

words is far less interesting than the list of most retweetable words,<br />

and that ’s the point: they ’re boring.<br />

Most of these words indicate that the person using them is talking<br />

about himself or herself and personal activities, such as watching<br />

the game, listening to something, or going to bed. Even worse is the<br />

occurrence of the word bored here. If you ’re tweeting that you ’re bored,<br />

don ’t expect it to get retweets, as you ’re being quite boring yourself.<br />

An analysis I did of 2.7 million link-containing tweets revealed<br />

an interesting pattern that has implications for all kinds of communications<br />

professionals working with Twitter. I looked at each tweet<br />

in my data set and identifi ed those that were clicked on 0 times but<br />

were retweeted at least once. I also identifi ed those tweets that were<br />

clicked on but were retweeted more times than they were clicked.<br />

I found that 14.64 percent of the tweets in my study were never<br />

clicked on but were retweeted and 16.12 percent of the tweets in<br />

my database had more retweets than clicks (Figure 4.18 ). This tells<br />

me that many people who will retweet an article will do so without<br />

reading it fi rst.<br />

Although the sociological implications of these data could certainly<br />

be quite interesting, I ’m mostly interested in what this means<br />

for marketers. And what it means for marketers is that your headline<br />

is the most important piece of your content when it comes to


Figure 4.18 Retweets versus Clicks<br />

14.64% of the retweeted<br />

tweets had 0 clicks.<br />

16.12% had more<br />

retweets than clicks.<br />

Twitter 69<br />

Twitter success. If your headline doesn ’t entice and motivate the<br />

retweet, the body of your content might not ever get the chance<br />

to succeed.<br />

Even if much retweeting happens in the absence of clicks,<br />

I ’m still interested in getting people to click on the links I post to<br />

Twitter. When it comes time to leverage the huge reach and retweet<br />

counts we ’ve built on Twitter into actual dollars-and-cents return<br />

on investment, it ’s all about how much traffi c we can send to our<br />

website and then convert into leads or customers.<br />

When analyzing clicks on Twitter, I use a metric called clickthrough<br />

rate (CTR). Marketers will be familiar with this from e-mail<br />

marketing or pay per click (PPC), but it functions a little differently<br />

on Twitter. I divide the number of clicks on a link by the number of<br />

followers the user had when they sent the tweet in question.<br />

The fi rst thing I looked at when I began to study Twitter CTRs<br />

was the length of the tweet, in characters. I found that longer tweets<br />

(up to about 130 characters) tend to get more clicks than shorter<br />

tweets (Figure 4.19 ).<br />

Then I looked at the actual position within the tweets occupied<br />

by links and its relationship to CTR. Most Twitter users, myself<br />

included, typically put the link at the end of the tweet. The format<br />

is generally: “Title of the content: http://linktothecontent.com .”


70 Channels<br />

CTR<br />

18%<br />

16%<br />

14%<br />

12%<br />

10%<br />

8%<br />

6%<br />

4%<br />

2%<br />

0%<br />

20<br />

25<br />

30<br />

35<br />

40<br />

45<br />

50<br />

55<br />

60<br />

65<br />

70<br />

75<br />

80<br />

85<br />

90<br />

95<br />

100<br />

105<br />

Tweet Length<br />

Figure 4.19 Longer Tweets Get More Clicks<br />

To visualize this data, I created the heat map you see in<br />

Figure 4.20 . Each vertical bar represents a position of a link inside<br />

of a tweet. Bars to the left represent links placed at the beginning of<br />

the tweet; bars to the right indicate links placed at the end. The<br />

darkness of the bar represents the average CTR of the links at each<br />

position: the darker the bar, the higher the CTR.<br />

My fi ndings were surprising. Although there is a single dark bar<br />

at the end of the heat map, there is a much larger sweet spot of clicks<br />

about a quarter of the way into the tweet. After I fi rst published<br />

110<br />

200,000 Link-Containing Tweets Analyzed<br />

115<br />

120<br />

125<br />

130<br />

135<br />

140<br />

Beginning Middle End<br />

Figure 4.20 Twitter CTR Heat Map


Twitter 71<br />

these data, several people have told me that they ’ve experimented<br />

with a format like “new post: http://linktopost.com title of the post”<br />

and it ’s worked for them.<br />

I ’m not sure why this format works so well; perhaps it ’s because<br />

most Twitter accounts are still putting links at the end of tweets,<br />

so tweets like this stand out. Experiment with it and see if it works<br />

with your audience.<br />

I also analyzed the CTRs of 20 highly followed Twitter<br />

accounts, including mainstream news sources, such as the<br />

Washington Post and the New York Times; geekier sources, such<br />

as Mashable and Gizmodo; and celebrity accounts, such as the<br />

Kardashians and Alyssa Milano. I found that there is no standard<br />

CTR, as they vary widely across these accounts. The New York<br />

Times has a very low CTR, whereas Alyssa Milano has a very<br />

high CTR.<br />

However, I did fi nd one pattern that held true across all of<br />

the accounts I looked at. When one of them tweet a link and<br />

didn ’t tweet another link for an hour, they had a certain CTR<br />

(Figure 4.21 ). When they tweeted two links in an hour, the<br />

CTR dropped. When it was three links in an hour, the CTR was<br />

even lower. As the pace of link-tweeting increased, the CTR for<br />

each link decreased.<br />

CTR<br />

300%<br />

200%<br />

100%<br />

0%<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

Links Tweeted per Hour<br />

Figure 4.21 CTR by Links Tweeted per Hour


72 Channels<br />

If you ’re sharing content you ’ve found from other sources across<br />

the Web, tweet it as fast as you want. But when you ’re tweeting your<br />

own content to send traffi c to your site, slow down and tweet it at a<br />

more deliberate pace.<br />

Another CTR analysis I did was on parts of speech. I analyzed<br />

the four major parts of speech (adverbs, adjectives, nouns, and<br />

verbs) and their relationship to the CTR of the tweets they were<br />

found in. I compared the CTR of the individual tweets to the<br />

average for the Twitter user to account for the wild differences<br />

in CTRs.<br />

I found that tweets heavy with adverbs and verbs performed<br />

better than tweets with more nouns and adjectives (Figure 4.22 ).<br />

Action-based words got more clicks than entity-based words. Actionbased<br />

words include calls to action, which is likely the cause of some<br />

of this effect.<br />

Don ’t forget to experiment with action-based calls to action on<br />

Twitter. If you want more clicks, ask for them. But be creative; don ’t<br />

just try “Click here,” but instead try “Check this out” or “Tell me<br />

what you think.”<br />

Effect on CTR<br />

Use action words:<br />

more verbs, fewer nouns.<br />

After analyzing 200,000 link containing tweets, I found taht<br />

tweets that contained more adverbs and verbs had<br />

higher CTRs than noun- and adjective-heavy tweets.<br />

3%<br />

2%<br />

1%<br />

0%<br />

–1%<br />

–2%<br />

–3%<br />

–4%<br />

–5%<br />

Adverbs<br />

Verbs<br />

Figure 4.22 Relationship between Various Parts of Speech and CTR<br />

Nouns<br />

Adjectives


Effect on CTR<br />

Tweet later in the day.<br />

I found that tweets posted in the afternoon hours<br />

had higher CTRs than twees posted in the morning.<br />

1.5%<br />

1.0%<br />

0.5%<br />

0%<br />

–0.5%<br />

–1.0%<br />

–1.5%<br />

–2.0%<br />

–2.5%<br />

Twitter 73<br />

12 am<br />

1 am<br />

2 am<br />

3 am<br />

4 am<br />

5 am<br />

6 am<br />

7 am<br />

8 am<br />

9 am<br />

10 am<br />

11 am<br />

12 pm<br />

1 pm<br />

2 pm<br />

3 pm<br />

4 pm<br />

5 pm<br />

6 pm<br />

7 pm<br />

8 pm<br />

9 pm<br />

10 pm<br />

11 pm<br />

Figure 4.23 Relationship between Time of Tweet and CTR<br />

I also looked at the hour of data and its relationship to CTRs and<br />

found a pattern familiar if you think back to my data on retweeting<br />

and time of day.<br />

Tweets posted later in the day—afternoon Eastern time—<br />

tended to have higher CTRs than tweets posted early in the morning<br />

(Figure 4.23 ). As with all timing data, be careful to test and<br />

experiment with these fi ndings, as your audience may behave differently<br />

than the average of a very large data set.<br />

And when I looked at day of the week and its relationship to<br />

CTR, I found something surprising. Tweets that were posted toward<br />

the end of the week got more clicks than those posted on Monday<br />

through Wednesday (Figure 4.24 ). But it wasn ’t just Thursday and<br />

Friday that performed well; Saturday and Sunday also both have<br />

high CTRs.<br />

I follow thousands of accounts on Twitter. My Twitter stream<br />

is very active during the business day Monday through Friday. On<br />

the weekends, it moves much slower, and what content does come


74 Channels<br />

0.2%<br />

0%<br />

–0.2%<br />

–0.4%<br />

–0.6%<br />

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun<br />

Figure 4.24 Effect of Day of the Week on CTR<br />

through is often about sports and other non-work-related topics.<br />

The few times something interesting about marketing does show up<br />

on a Saturday or Sunday, it gets more of my attention because there<br />

are fewer other things fi ghting for it. I call this contra-competitive<br />

timing, and we ’ll see examples of it throughout this book.<br />

Don ’t take these data to mean that you should tweet links only<br />

on the weekends. Instead, take it as an invitation to experiment<br />

with the weekends if you hadn ’t already been using them.


Contents<br />

Introduction: The Athena Doctrine 1<br />

1 Great Britain 27<br />

2 Iceland 55<br />

3 Israel 77<br />

4 Japan 103<br />

5 Colombia and Peru 127<br />

6 Kenya 149<br />

7 India 169<br />

8 China 189<br />

9 Sweden, Germany, and Belgium 213<br />

10 Bhutan 237<br />

Conclusion: The Age of Athena 255<br />

More Information 269<br />

Notes 273<br />

Acknowledgments 283<br />

About the Authors 287<br />

Index 291<br />

vii


Chapter 1<br />

Great Britain<br />

‘‘In a world with less money, close personal<br />

relationships are more important’’<br />

(82.1% agree)<br />

Fixed to trees and streetlights, the handmade posters were<br />

decorated with arrows and the words ‘‘Sea of Rage This Way.’’<br />

They pointed toward the student union building at the University<br />

of London. There, on the morning of November 9, 2011, a crowd<br />

grew larger by the minute beneath a sky of unbroken clouds. At<br />

noon, the scene resembled a street fair. An elderly man in an orange<br />

kilt danced a jig to music from a boom box that he had placed on<br />

the street. A few yards away, hip-hop beats poured out of a portable<br />

loudspeaker strapped to the back of a bicycle. These sounds echoed<br />

off the brick and stone walls of city buildings, mingling with chants<br />

of ‘‘No education cuts!’’<br />

At about 12:40 pm,more than two thousand men and women,<br />

a number equal to three brigades of the British Army, stepped off<br />

toward Trafalgar Square. They walked behind a banner—Occupy<br />

Everything, Take London—that stretched from sidewalk to sidewalk.<br />

They were accompanied by hundreds of London police<br />

officers dressed in florescent yellow jackets and helmets with clear<br />

27


28 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

plastic face shields. Drummers pounded on instruments strapped<br />

around their necks. Overhead, a police helicopter pounded the air<br />

with its whirling blades and provided observers the best possible<br />

view of unfolding events.<br />

Motivated by a sense that the economic system no longer<br />

works for them, the protesters vented their frustration with chants<br />

and by jeering at the helmeted riot police. Some covered their<br />

faces to avoid being identified by surveillance cameras. The scene<br />

illustrated the loss of trust between the younger generation and<br />

society’s leaders, and it echoed similar protests occurring around<br />

the world. It seemed as if people everywhere were struggling to<br />

find hope and a sense of agency. In the personal realm, they<br />

sought new definitions of happiness and new ways to achieve it. As<br />

political actors, they voiced their dissatisfaction with gridlocked<br />

politics and stale policies. In 2011, no social development was<br />

more significant than the rise of this ‘‘Occupy’’ protest movement,<br />

which was a loosely organized effort that allowed people to express<br />

their thoughts and feelings in a time of great uncertainty.<br />

Beginning with the ‘‘indignados’’ who marched in Spain, people<br />

in dozens of countries took to the streets to show their anger over<br />

banking scandals, unemployment, political stalemate, and the<br />

growing disparity between rich and poor. In America, the anger<br />

became focused on the wealthy and powerful—referred to as the<br />

‘‘1 percent’’—and on the plight of the ‘‘99 percent’’ who feared<br />

the decline of the middle class. Parks and city squares became<br />

encampments as thousands of people tried to show their distress<br />

by literally occupying public spaces. These demonstrations were<br />

the largest and most widespread since the antinuclear protests of<br />

the 1980s, but they targeted problems so complex that no simple<br />

No Nukes–type of slogan quite hit the target. Solving the global<br />

economic crisis couldn’t be as simple as banning the bomb.<br />

In London, the Occupy activists built tent cities in the districts<br />

of Islington and Hackney and at St. Paul’s Cathedral. They<br />

intended to focus public attention on their opposition to bailouts<br />

for banks and cuts to government spending on education and social


Great Britain 29<br />

programs. This austerity agenda, adopted by Britain and the Eurozone<br />

countries, differed from the American response to the Great<br />

Recession, which had included a large federal spending program<br />

to stimulate economic activity. In the United States, the mixed<br />

approach had been followed by improvements in employment and<br />

growth that were painfully slow but nevertheless real. In the United<br />

Kingdom and Europe, the pain of austerity had not brought consistent<br />

gain. Instead, unemployment bounced back up, and growth<br />

sputtered and then stalled.<br />

With politicians failing to deliver progress, and austerity making<br />

daily life tougher, ordinary citizens became impatient and then<br />

angry. But while they forcefully declared the current system ‘‘unsustainable,’’<br />

the London protesters did not offer a considered second<br />

step toward reform or improvements in ‘‘the system.’’ With no<br />

further outlet for the energy of the movement, it became mainly<br />

a matter of outcry, rather than action. Everyone in London knew<br />

what was upsetting the young occupiers—but structural solutions<br />

were no closer at hand.<br />

However, at scattered location around the city, inspired individuals<br />

and groups were quietly working on their own alternatives.<br />

Although we happened to arrive just in time for the noisy protest,<br />

we had come to London to meet a number of revolutionaries who<br />

were both quieter and more deliberate. Here we would find women<br />

and men who were practicing business, community activism, and<br />

crafts with a true Athena spirit. In every case, they stressed the<br />

power of connection—to individual customers, colleagues, and<br />

communities—to multiply the effect of their efforts and produce<br />

innovative solutions to common problems.<br />

•••<br />

A quarter mile from the route of the November 9 march, Vinay<br />

Gupta and Tom Wright sat in a small office and tapped away<br />

at computer keyboards. When they paused, the two young men<br />

heard the thwacking helicopter, but they felt no urge to go watch


30 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

the scene on the street, let alone join it. Not that they weren’t<br />

sympathetic. Young enough to fit right in with the protesters, they<br />

understood that millions of their countrymen felt aggrieved by the<br />

Great Recession and the austerity program their government had<br />

adopted in response. Traditional pathways to work and security<br />

were disappearing, and it was easy to feel unsteady. Unless you<br />

were blazing a new path.<br />

As they worked their computers, Tom and Vinay were in fact<br />

acting as pioneers of the new economy, turning an idea into an<br />

asset. Their small company, WhipCar, allowed anyone with a safe<br />

and reliable automobile to rent it by the hour, day, or week to a<br />

neighbor who needed one. In a flash, their service could turn a ton<br />

of metal at rest by the curb into handy transport for the renter and<br />

a clutch of cash for the owner. The car, and the transaction, would<br />

be secured by WhipCar and its insurers. The service would take a<br />

small slice of the transaction, but charge no membership fees.<br />

When we caught up with the founders of WhipCar, they were<br />

adding more than a hundred vehicles to their listings every day,<br />

and each week saw an uptick in the number of rentals they had<br />

facilitated. Soon to exceed fifteen thousand vehicles, the fleet of<br />

cars available through WhipCar was worth in excess of $20 million<br />

and would rank the service among the largest rental outfits in the<br />

market. This resource was marshaled not with a bank loan or stock<br />

offering but on the basis of a simple but courageous idea: people are<br />

essentially honest.<br />

‘‘The basic service we provide is building trust between the<br />

owners and the drivers,’’ explained Vinay as he sipped tea in a<br />

quiet corner of the Hospital Club on Endell Street in Covent<br />

Garden. 1 (Occupying an old hospital building, the club caters to<br />

young entrepreneurs who use it as a social and business hub.) ‘‘We<br />

provide both the insurance for the car and the assurance that a<br />

driver has been vetted and the car is in good condition,’’ said<br />

Vinay. ‘‘After that, the parties are in control of their own destiny.’’<br />

A slimly built thirty-four year-old from New York, Vinay flashes<br />

a smile when he hears a question about the breakthrough thoughts


Great Britain 31<br />

that made WhipCar work. Perhaps the most important, he recalls,<br />

wastherealizationthatmostprivatecarsspendfarmoretimeresting<br />

at curbside than they do working at transporting people. All this<br />

idle time—roughly twenty-three hours every day—represents lost<br />

value for owners who spend, on average, $10,000 per year per car<br />

on insurance, repairs, and lease or loan payments. ‘‘It’s the second<br />

most expensive thing most people ever buy, after a home, and<br />

it just sits there, losing value. We thought that if we could help<br />

people turn that value into cash, they would take the chance.’’<br />

Previous efforts at car-sharing projects had foundered because<br />

owners were wary of how renters might abuse their vehicles, and<br />

the services lacked the technology to quickly pair owners with<br />

renters. The spread of broadband Internet services and a wellengineered<br />

website solved the technology problems. WhipCar’s<br />

site is so powerful that it can track thousands of vehicles and<br />

provide renters with instant maps showing the locations of many<br />

cars that fit their needs. (Most will be within a ten-minute walk<br />

of the renter’s location.) The rules allow for drivers to bid for the<br />

car of their choice and require owners to accept or reject an offer<br />

within one hour.<br />

With effective technology and rules in place, Vinay and Tom<br />

turned to the question of trust. According to one study, more<br />

than half the owners in the United Kingdom give names to their<br />

four-wheeled babies. How would they relate to perfect strangers<br />

arriving at their doorsteps and asking for the keys? More important,<br />

how would renters treat the vehicles they pick up on the street?<br />

As it turned out, drivers who actually met the individuals who<br />

owned the cars they rented drove more carefully than Vinay or<br />

Tom expected. ‘‘We think that the human element actually reduced<br />

risk,’’ noted Tom. With WhipCar, ‘‘you are in someone’s car. It’s<br />

not a faceless car owned by some corporation. Everyone is acutely<br />

aware that they have to bring the car back to someone who owns<br />

it. It’s not like you say, ‘I’m renting a car and driving to Scotland,<br />

and I don’t care how I drive.’ This is a human marketplace, and<br />

that human aspect brings out the best in people.’’ 2


32 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

Among car owners, the human aspect leads them to accept<br />

lower bids from frequent renters, who become like friends. Among<br />

renters, it leads to a sense of duty and even attachment. In almost<br />

two years of operation, WhipCar’s founders had yet to see a<br />

serious dispute over the condition of a car that had been hired,<br />

and disputes over gasoline—drivers are expected to replace what<br />

they burn—could be counted on one hand. In the meantime,<br />

the service’s most devoted car owners earned as much as $800<br />

per month letting other people use their vehicles. Some actually<br />

consulted Vinay and Tom for advice before replacing their cars<br />

because they wanted to get one that renters preferred.<br />

Beyond the benefits to WhipCar members, the founders count<br />

the financial and ecological payoffs that come with the more<br />

efficient use of thousands of cars. By various estimates, the manufacture<br />

of a single, medium-size car results in the production of<br />

more carbon dioxide that it will emit in a lifetime of operation. A<br />

WhipCar regular who chooses not to buy a car actually saves the<br />

planet the burden of roughly fifteen tons of manufacturing emissions.<br />

Driver payments to owners also convert the wealth frozen<br />

inside parked cars into cash that circulates in the economy. This<br />

resource is especially valuable, noted Tom, to ‘‘retirees who are<br />

on a fixed budget and hardly drive their cars at all[. They] really<br />

benefit from the extra income.’’<br />

By keeping costs low, Vinay and Tom managed to steer Whip-<br />

Car toward profitability at a faster pace than their business plan<br />

predicted. They are being helped by a change in the way people<br />

relate to cars as status symbols. In the United States, ‘‘the percentage<br />

of sixteen-year-olds with a license declined from 44 percent in<br />

1988 to 30 percent in 2008,’’ explained Vinay. ‘‘A similar thing is<br />

happening all over Europe. And owning a car just doesn’t represent<br />

the same status that it once had.’’ In fact, in recent years the<br />

United States has seen a decline in car ownership for the first time<br />

ever. This trend, and a drop in the number of miles logged by


Great Britain 33<br />

younger drivers, suggests that cars are losing their magic as a status<br />

symbol.<br />

In a time of economic stress, owning a car when it’s obviously<br />

cheaper to rent might be seen as a sign of bad judgment, if not a<br />

character flaw. Considering their peers—adults in their twenties<br />

and thirties—Tom and Vinay argue that flexibility, creativity, and<br />

independence are the new markers of a kind of success that is<br />

less ostentatious and more sustainable. ‘‘If you look at technology<br />

and the economy, you can see that we are going through a great<br />

disruption,’’ added Vinay, who worked in telecommunications<br />

before becoming an entrepreneur. ‘‘I didn’t own a mobile phone<br />

until I was twenty-two. Now five-year-olds carry them, and twoyear-olds<br />

know how to use an iPad. It’s completely understandable<br />

that people are upset by all the changes.’’<br />

The shifts in employment and the popping of the real estate<br />

bubble have left many people with a sense of dislocation and<br />

anxiety, added Vinay. The antidote, he argues, can be found<br />

in new definitions of what makes a good life and in a creative<br />

response to the economy. He believes that the world holds endless<br />

possibilities for those who can improve a business or a service to<br />

give more people access to something of value.<br />

‘‘Houses are a good example,’’ he said. ‘‘Home ownership used<br />

to be the definition of success. It doesn’t mean the same thing<br />

anymore. Now we know that the housing boom was artificial and<br />

it’s far more economical not to own a property. I don’t own a house.<br />

I don’t have a car. And I’m not sure I ever will. But I can buy access<br />

to a place to live and a car to use, and I have loads of experiences<br />

that make life richer.’’<br />

A good example of this ‘‘access’’ approach to living is the<br />

Hospital Club, where we met. Set in a beautiful and expensive<br />

neighborhood, the club provides graceful spaces that many members<br />

could not otherwise afford to enjoy. Like WhipCar, the club allows<br />

those who need something expensive, but only on a short-term<br />

basis, to add it to their life. ‘‘Today, the thing people need is access to


34 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

an experience, not necessarily ownership,’’ observed Vinay. ‘‘And<br />

we can arrange that by relating to each other more personally.’’<br />

•••<br />

The personal quality of the WhipCar formula prompts many<br />

people to add a little handwritten promise—‘‘I’ll be careful’’—to<br />

themoreformalcommitmenttheymakeastheysignarental<br />

agreement. The words are stronger than ink on paper because<br />

they help bind the buyer and seller in a relationship. In this, the<br />

WhipCar model stands out against the global trend toward an<br />

impersonal marketplace. Commerce conducted online and at scanit-yourself<br />

checkout counters may be efficient, but it comes without<br />

the sense of security and connection we get when we can see, hear,<br />

and come to know the person on the other side of the transaction.<br />

Much studied and much lamented, the alienation of modern life<br />

flows, at least in part, from the feeling that we don’t know enough<br />

about how our world works. As technologies become more dazzling<br />

and our jobs become more specialized, we know less and less about<br />

how objects are imagined, designed, produced, and delivered. The<br />

feeling that we are isolated from the origins of things is relieved<br />

when we see a cook toss dough into the air at our local pizzeria or<br />

meet the owner of an orchard at the farmers market.<br />

The basic human desire for connection inspired Katie Mowat<br />

to found a service that pairs consumers with knitters who make<br />

bespoke hats, scarves, and other winter woolens that they can<br />

design themselves online. The twist is that the knitters are actual<br />

grandmothers—and you get to pick your own granny! More than<br />

a dozen ‘‘grans’’ are featured on Katie’s website, and customers are<br />

encouraged to communicate directly with the knitter they pick,<br />

working through preferences on shape, colors, and stitching. The<br />

finished goods are shipped with labels, stitched inside, that are<br />

addressed to the buyer and signed by the granny.


Great Britain 35<br />

On the night we met her for dinner on the South Bank of<br />

the Thames, twenty-eight-year-old Katie arrived wearing a long<br />

fuchsia scarf, happy to report that a cold front was finally bringing a<br />

chill to the season. Autumn was arriving late to London, not good<br />

for a business that depends on people shivering when the wind cuts<br />

through their clothes. Grannies Inc. might be a playfully creative<br />

enterprise, Katie noted, but it is also a real business that provides<br />

income for knitters and needs revenues to keep humming.<br />

‘‘In my first year I made a mistake by pricing everything too<br />

low,’’ recalls Katie. ‘‘I had to learn that for premium products you<br />

charge a premium price. Our knitters are really extraordinary, and<br />

the quality of what they make is so high you could wear it for years<br />

and years.’’ 3<br />

The emotional premium in a Grannies Inc. purchase is delivered<br />

first as a buyer reads biographies of the grannies. ‘‘I didn’t have<br />

grandparents on either side of my family when I was a child,’’<br />

recalled Katie. ‘‘The grannies we have are surrogates for me, and I<br />

think it works that way for a lot of people who use the site. But then<br />

you get invested in the design of the item and the collaboration.<br />

Finally, when you get that package with something in it that has<br />

been handmade specifically for you, it’s a wonderful experience. A<br />

lot of people have never received a package like that in their lives.’’<br />

Of course the thrill of receiving a granny-made hat, vest, or<br />

scarf would fade quickly if it were poorly made. Here, Katie’s own<br />

experience as an avid knitter comes into play. As a college student<br />

studying in America during a knitting craze that began in 2001,<br />

Katie took up the craft and became extremely proficient. Knitting<br />

and the community of women who did it gave Katie both a creative<br />

outlet and a deep appreciation for social networks. Knitters, it turns<br />

out, are happy to share their secrets and encourage each other with<br />

great enthusiasm.<br />

With Grannies Inc., Katie recreated her college knitting circle<br />

on a scale so grand that it reaches across the English countryside to<br />

include hundreds of highly skilled older women. The day after we


36 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

met Katie, we hopped a Chiltern Railways train to the Oxfordshire<br />

town of Banbury. There, Holly , a tall, straight-backed woman with<br />

gray hair piled on her head, met us at the end of a long gravel<br />

driveway and walked us to the door of her house. Inside, she kicked<br />

off her shoes and led us to a cozy room warmed by a potbellied<br />

stove. A basket filled with wool and knitting needles rested beside<br />

the chair she sank into. The view from her window included a few<br />

dozen sheep grazing on a grassy hillside. In the distance, the sun<br />

met the horizon.<br />

‘‘I had a very, very good marriage, but when my husband died in<br />

2006, I learned that the world isn’t going to come up your drive and<br />

say, ‘Please, can Holly come out to play,’’’ said Holly. ‘‘I realized<br />

that I had to make life work for myself.’’ 4<br />

As she made her life, Holly pursued sailing and wound up in<br />

the Mediterranean, the Caribbean, and the choppy waters off the<br />

Orkney Islands. She became a devoted volunteer at the hospice<br />

center that helped her husband. This work reinforced her Buddhist<br />

sensibilities. ‘‘I appreciate how transient and fragile life is,’’ she<br />

explained. In the quiet hours, needlework and knitting aid her in<br />

meditation and reflection.<br />

‘‘I learned to knit a long, long time ago,’’ recalled Holly. With<br />

the rationing of World War II, skill with a needle made it possible<br />

for sweaters and hats to be repaired and remain in service. Knitting<br />

and sewing circles brought women together when their husbands<br />

were at war. The craft also made a young girl proud that she could<br />

do her part.<br />

When Holly read a newspaper article about Grannies Inc., she<br />

emailed Katie to wish her well. Katie answered with a question:<br />

‘‘Would you like to knit a sample beanie?’’ After Holly said yes, she<br />

received a package containing the yarn, needles, and pattern she<br />

was to use. The beanie was almost perfect, and Holly became an<br />

official Grannies Inc. knitter. A faster and more ambitious knitter<br />

than most, Holly has accepted big jobs, including an order for dozens<br />

of beanies placed by a European TV network. ‘‘I was really chuffed,’’


Great Britain 37<br />

she recalled, ‘‘when my children were watching TV and they called<br />

me because the commentators were wearing beanies I had knitted.’’<br />

In a busy month, Holly might receive a check that will pay<br />

for an outing or two with her actual grandchildren or for some<br />

luxuries she might otherwise forgo. For other women who live<br />

on much more modest budgets, the payments make it possible<br />

for them to pay their monthly bills without the worry they once<br />

felt. The money and sense of accomplishment all flow from Katie<br />

Mowat’s desire to make a small business and do something positive<br />

for others out of the craft she loves. A practical woman, Holly<br />

recognized the financial benefit she received by joining Grannies<br />

Inc., but harbored some skepticism about any social rewards that<br />

might come from Katie’s idea.<br />

In her lifetime, Holly had seen the coming together of the war<br />

years and then the loosening of social ties that occurred as women<br />

left the home to work, family size shrank, and the population<br />

shifted toward big cities. She appreciated the way Grannies Inc.<br />

established small connections between knitters and buyers, whose<br />

hearts were warmed by the notes she tucked into each item she<br />

completed and shipped. But she had trouble imagining how this<br />

little enterprise might do more for her—until she hit upon the<br />

notion of mixing the old and the new.<br />

‘‘Women have always done handicrafts in groups as a way of<br />

coming together and sharing,’’ she told us. These gatherings allowed<br />

participants not only to share what they knew about technique<br />

but also, more important, to exchange information and ideas about<br />

anything and everything that mattered to them, from child rearing<br />

to the great public issues of the day. With Grannies Inc. providing<br />

projects to complete and a small profit motive, Holly began to<br />

recruit participants for a knitting circle that would engage village<br />

women for a few hours per week.<br />

Reviving a tradition that pays dividends in so many ways clearly<br />

delighted the woman who was challenged to remake her life after<br />

her husband died. ‘‘We grannies are full of wisdom,’’ she remarked.


38 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

Her wisdom is evident in her plan to expand on Katie’s concept<br />

and make it pay more dividends to more people, echoing the<br />

community spirit of the England she knew as a girl.<br />

•••<br />

The energy behind Grannies Inc. came from two basic human<br />

drives: creativity and the need for connection. In times of financial<br />

crisis, the value people attach to these pursuits seems to increase<br />

as people who are troubled by financial insecurity seek ways to feel<br />

happy and successful. Creative outlets, such as the production of<br />

handmade crafts, can be seen as opportunities for sharing oneself<br />

with the wider world. But what about people who lack a specific,<br />

in-demand skill or talent like the ability to turn a skein of wool<br />

into a cap? They can still connect by sharing their time through<br />

volunteer work.<br />

It is a fact that volunteering increases with unemployment<br />

and recessions. Although some research suggests that people turn<br />

to help others because they have idle time on their hands, the<br />

volunteering impulse also arises in the hearts of busy people who<br />

simply want to pitch in. The trouble, for most of these folks, is to<br />

find a workable outlet for their volunteering desires.<br />

Enter Anna Pearson and Spots of Time.<br />

In her years of working as an advocate for charities in Britain<br />

and abroad, Pearson recognized a pattern: many people want to<br />

volunteer, but cannot find ways to do it. In some cases, organizations<br />

that claimed to need help attached onerous conditions<br />

to service, requiring people to make long-term commitments,<br />

undergo extensive training, or perform work that didn’t suit<br />

them. In other cases, volunteers were thrown into big projects<br />

with mighty ambitions—feeding the hungry, ending violence in a<br />

neighborhood—that could never be achieved. Frustration would<br />

lead to disillusionment, and projects would be abandoned.<br />

To bridge the gap between what volunteers can give and what<br />

people need, Anna reimagined volunteering—on a very small<br />

scale. As she explained to us over tea, ‘‘I thought, ‘People need


Great Britain 39<br />

things as basic as a little happiness or joy in their day,’ and I realized<br />

that with a humble idea, we could make that happen.’’ 5<br />

The humble idea was a service—Spots of Time—that<br />

connects people with organizations that can use volunteers who<br />

can commit an hour or more to do something for someone else,<br />

and often at a moment’s notice. Nursing homes (known as care<br />

homes in the United Kingdom) were among the first to sign up<br />

for the network, and soon Spots of Time was sending volunteers<br />

to spend time with the elderly and disabled residents of facilities<br />

in London and Essex. As Anna discovered, an hour or two was<br />

usually more than enough time for a volunteer to do some good,<br />

and his or her service could be something as small as reading aloud<br />

or accompanying someone on a walk.<br />

The notion that someone might volunteer sporadically fits with<br />

what thirty-one-year-old Anna called the ‘‘freelance culture’’ of<br />

her generation. Accustomed to projects that last for a limited time,<br />

many young adults look for service opportunities ‘‘that are more like<br />

a gig than a job.’’ In some cases, the volunteers are actual performers<br />

who are happy to find an audience, even if they offer a show for free.<br />

Early feedback on her program, just months old when we met<br />

her, showed that volunteers are so sincere about doing something<br />

positive that they worry that a spot of time is not enough. ‘‘We have<br />

to convince people to just trust in the fact that doing something<br />

good, even though it’s really small, is worth it.’’ She counsels<br />

volunteers to stop worrying and just go and sit for tea with someone<br />

who would appreciate the company. Anna offers similar counsel<br />

to leaders of organizations who are accustomed to old ways of<br />

accepting help, which too often meant they received no help at all.<br />

‘‘I understand if people are worried that we are all fur coat and<br />

no knickers,’’ said Anna, using a British expression for someone<br />

who is all flash and no substance. ‘‘I’m keenly aware of what we<br />

haven’t done yet, but I also know there’s a big resource here and<br />

a big need, and I think it should be possible to break down the<br />

barriers that keep them apart.’’<br />

•••


40 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

The obstacles that separate the financial center called the<br />

City of London and the nearby neighborhood of Hackney are<br />

scaled, every day, by the honeybees that occupy a hive atop the<br />

Nomura Bank building. The bees produce honey for a small outfit<br />

called Golden Company, which partners with the young people of<br />

Hackney to teach bankers and other high-flying Londoners about<br />

the environment, sustainability, and the delicate balance of nature.<br />

Vital to food supplies, the work that bees accomplish as pollinators<br />

of British crops is estimated to be worth more than $700 million<br />

per year, according to the United Kingdom’s National Ecosystem<br />

Assessment. 6 Bees help produce one out of three mouthfuls of food<br />

in the British diet. 7 However, in the United Kingdom, as elsewhere,<br />

bee populations began to decline in the 1990s. 8 As the bee problem<br />

became evident, the British government funded several investigations<br />

into solutions. In the meantime, bee enthusiasts across the<br />

country went about the practical business of starting new hives.<br />

In 2007, a pair of entrepreneurs started Golden Company to raise<br />

bees, produce honey, employ local youth, and bring attention to<br />

the crisis in the garden. They located it in the poor neighborhood<br />

of Hackney, where staff at a community center called Hackney<br />

City Farm help manage the work.<br />

Golden Company is a distinctly British type of organization—called<br />

a social enterprise—that blends business with a<br />

social agenda to accomplish several goals. The bees that live in<br />

the many hives it maintains pollinate plants and produce honey<br />

that sells briskly at public markets. At the Nomura building,<br />

Golden’s young employees outfit their elders in bee-proof gear and<br />

then teach them to work with the hives unafraid. In this role,<br />

the youth discover confidence and competence. The professionals<br />

at Nomura Bank learn about bees and the capabilities of young<br />

people they would otherwise never encounter.<br />

The connection between bankers and Hackney youth is the<br />

most important product of Golden Company. ‘‘The young people<br />

we work with are most at risk of being excluded from the economic


Great Britain 41<br />

system and from society,’’ explains Zoe Palmer , one of the founders<br />

of the honey company. 9 Born and raised in Hackney, Zoe attended<br />

University College London with the idea that she would return<br />

to her community to do something to make it better. ‘‘I studied<br />

human ecology, and it teaches you to balance the head, the heart,<br />

and the hands,’’ she recalled for us. ‘‘I started thinking about a<br />

business that would use all three in a self-sustaining way.’’<br />

Zoe obtained seed money for the business, acquired bees from<br />

Shropshire, and found sites for the hives with corporate partners at<br />

places like Nomura Bank, the London Stock Exchange, and at the<br />

big Chancery Lane law firm Lewis Silkin, LLP, where a queen bee<br />

named Lucy arrived in September 2011. Young beekeepers (called<br />

guardians by Golden) assumed responsibility at each hive and<br />

became mentors for employees of their host corporations. Other<br />

hives were installed in various parks and at Hackney City Farm.<br />

There, enterprise manager Gustavo Montes de Oca saw Golden as a<br />

perfect way to establish ties with the professionals in the city’s banking<br />

sector and get local youth involved. ‘‘Beekeeping has everything<br />

that might attract kids,’’ he said. ‘‘Honey, danger, funny outfits.’’ 10<br />

Moreover, as Gustavo explained to us when we visited him at<br />

Hackney Farms, London’s powerful financial district ‘‘has always<br />

been on our doorstep, but we never had a way to connect with<br />

the people there—it was like there were two different worlds that<br />

never connected, and both were losing out because of it.’’<br />

Indeed, as the income gap between the wealthy of the City and<br />

places like Hackney grew, people in both communities began to<br />

worry about the effects of their mutual isolation. Gustavo imagined<br />

that Hackney City Farm could be a place where that isolation<br />

might be broken and mutual empathy might be encouraged.<br />

Golden Company’s values, posted on its website, include<br />

discipline, self-reliance, and a commitment to learning—and all of<br />

its activities revolve around building respect for nature and humanity’s<br />

role in the environment. As founder Zoe Palmer envisioned,<br />

the bees teach their keepers something about the ‘‘wildness of


42 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

nature.’’ In a radio documentary about the program, a bee guardian<br />

named Devente said, ‘‘Once you understand the bee, once you<br />

know what it’s doing, your perspective changes from swatting<br />

to staying still.’’ 11 Another beekeeper named King marveled at<br />

the industry of the insects. With a kind of awe in his voice, he<br />

explained, ‘‘They love work.’’ 12<br />

Experience with bees helped King and Devente develop<br />

patience and recognize the parts of an extremely complex system.<br />

In the bee colonies, they saw finely tuned teams without leaders<br />

survive and thrive on the basis of communication, cooperation,<br />

responsibility, and selflessness. These talents and traits, which<br />

people in our global surveys consider traditionally feminine, can be<br />

applied directly to school, work, and family life. They also match<br />

many of the values promoted at Hackney City Farm. Set on a<br />

former industrial property where manufacturers have made everything<br />

from beer to buttons, the farm was established by Hackney<br />

residents who used public and private funds to renovate buildings<br />

and clear land. The property now supports a demonstration farm,<br />

small businesses, social programs, and hybrids like Golden.<br />

On the morning when we visited Hackney City Farm, half a<br />

dozen people lingered over breakfast in the farm’s Frizzante (Italian<br />

for ‘‘fizzy’’) Café while workers at an outbuilding devoted to a shop<br />

called Bike Yard East took wrenches to a lineup of bicycles left<br />

for repair. At about ten, women began arriving for a yoga class<br />

taught inside a building made of straw bales where the floor had<br />

been cleared to make space available for mats. Referred by the Red<br />

Cross and other agencies, the women were all refugees and asylum<br />

seekers. Besides the practice of yoga, participants share a meal and<br />

receive English language instruction.<br />

All the activity we saw at Hackney City Farm was sustained by<br />

a combination of grants and earned income designed to generate<br />

enough cash flow to meet its social service goals. Golden’s workers<br />

are educated in business management as well as beekeeping, and<br />

they have been responsible for managing payroll and inventory as<br />

well as for developing new products. Required to present detailed


Great Britain 43<br />

proposals to support their ideas, the young workers are often<br />

surprised to discover that questions raised by their colleagues force<br />

them to improve their concepts. The most successful ancillary<br />

product to come out of this process, a honey-based lip balm, was so<br />

well formulated and marketed that it sells out whenever it is offered.<br />

The creativity and persistence of the people who participate<br />

in Hackney programs match the kind of effort that might be seen<br />

at an exciting business start-up. When the farm opened a public<br />

garden in a nearby park, Gustavo was startled to discover that the<br />

only people who violated the rules of the garden were the ones<br />

who sought to install extra trees and plants.<br />

One evening, Gustavo was startled to see a man using a<br />

screwdriver to loosen hard-packed earth and create a hole for a<br />

seedling of an apricot tree that his daughter had sprouted on a<br />

windowsill. The man returned to tend the tree and also pitched in<br />

to care for trees that others had planted.<br />

‘‘We had no expert horticulturalist, and as far as I know, this<br />

fellow, who was an immigrant, taught himself everything he tried,’’<br />

Gustavo told us. The trees grew to bear fruit, which is shared by<br />

the entire community.<br />

For Gustavo, the fruit tree experience revealed that much<br />

expertise and wisdom lie hidden in the community. He has learned<br />

a great deal from talking with locals who lived through the hard<br />

times of World War II and its aftermath, when rationing and<br />

a tough employment market forced great numbers of people to<br />

economize. ‘‘People would find many uses for something as basic<br />

as a jam jar, which became a sugar bowl or a container for pence.<br />

They remembered selling rags to be recycled and growing their<br />

own vegetables and herbs for cooking.’’<br />

The example set by the older generation inspired Hackney<br />

managers to open resale markets for children’s clothing and toys<br />

and to maximize use of the space at the farm by renting it to<br />

groups and corporations that are planning events. Farm officials are<br />

also working on a large-scale program to collect, separate, and sell<br />

waste and cast-off items that retain significant value. Each week,


44 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

area homes and businesses produce tons of recyclables, from used<br />

cooking oils to paper, which could yield more than $600,000 per<br />

year in revenues. Gustavo describes this activity as ‘‘harvesting<br />

the city’’ and imagines it growing to employ dozens of locals in<br />

an activity that is profitable, self-sustaining, and good for the<br />

environment.<br />

In harvesting the city, Gustavo intends to advance a complex<br />

mix of ideals: masculine and feminine, profit driven and socially<br />

aware, generous and conservationist. He explores the issues his<br />

generation faces in a new and changing world on a blog titled<br />

‘‘GoldenGus,’’ where he admonishes his fellow ‘‘greens’’ with a<br />

warning—‘‘thou shalt not moralise’’—but also considers Britain’s<br />

chief rabbi’s call for ‘‘remoralising’’ the world with new organizations<br />

to push for happier communities and a healthier planet. He<br />

quotes Rabbi Jonathan Sacks recalling how people in the United<br />

States and the United Kingdom organized themselves to confront<br />

the disruption of the Industrial Revolution of the nineteenth century:<br />

‘‘People did not leave it to government or the market. They<br />

did it themselves in communities, congregations, groups of every<br />

shape and size. They understood the connection between morality<br />

and morale.’’ 13<br />

In the midst of the current technological and economic revolution,<br />

when workers are displaced and insecurity seems rampant,<br />

solutions may come from modern formulations of nineteenthcentury<br />

associations like the YMCA, temperance unions, orphans<br />

societies, guilds, and community trusts. The new versions will<br />

undoubtedly be based, at least in part, in the online world. But<br />

in localities, they may also look much like Hackney City Farm<br />

and Golden Company, where hard work and imagination support<br />

innovation on a human-to-human (or human-to-bee) scale.<br />

•••<br />

The local efforts made by Gustavo, Zoe, and others yield results<br />

that Londoners can see and even taste, but their efforts also


Great Britain 45<br />

motivate others to pursue solutions that can be seen nationally<br />

and even internationally. Because it deals in products that are<br />

readily transferred over the Internet, finance is an attractive corner<br />

of the economy for those seeking modern versions of mutual aid.<br />

Operating out of a second-floor suite of offices in a Victorian<br />

commercial building on Newman Street, Giles Andrews offers this<br />

of kind of help to borrowers and lenders with a start-up finance<br />

company called Zopa, named for the concept known as Zone of<br />

Possible Agreement.<br />

Zopa pulls together information on large numbers of individuals<br />

who want personal loans on better terms than they would get from<br />

a traditional lender. Together, these borrowers present less risk<br />

than a single applicant; protected by the strength in the collective<br />

credit history of the borrowers, investors provide the cash that<br />

Zopa lends. For all its trouble, the firm takes fees from lenders and<br />

borrowers that amount to less than 2.5 percent of a loan.<br />

The modest fees are explained in plain English on the Zopa<br />

website, where both sides of the lending business can also learn<br />

the basics of its peer-to-peer process. As the site explains, Zopa<br />

evaluates borrowers and assigns them to groups labeled A*, A,<br />

B, C, or ‘‘Young Market.’’ The best borrowing rates are available<br />

to the A* borrowers. The highest return for lenders comes when<br />

they offer money to the lower-grade pools, such as C and Young<br />

Market. They are protected from big losses by a system that restricts<br />

the amount any one investor can commit to any one borrower to<br />

roughly $15. A default by someone who has taken $15 from a<br />

hundred lenders causes much less pain than a default by a borrower<br />

who fails to repay $1,500 put up by a single person.<br />

‘‘The idea is to treat everyone fairly—lenders and<br />

borrowers—and be very open about how we do business,’’<br />

Andrews told us on the day we arrived at Zopa’s offices just off<br />

the Goodge Street tube. 14 The big, open, white-walled space was<br />

quiet, save for the clicking of people working at computers and<br />

muffled phone conversations taking place on the other side of the<br />

room. Before Zopa, Giles was a consultant for big companies like


46 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

the Tesco supermarkets and Internet start-ups. He and a partner<br />

named Richard Duvall began Zopa in 2005 with about $10 million<br />

from venture capitalists who agreed that banks served consumers<br />

poorly, leaving a huge opening for a start-up alternative.<br />

Richard, who had founded one of the first and most successful<br />

online banks— —hosted the brainstorming for Zopa at the barn<br />

on his country estate, where some of the best ideas emerged at the<br />

Ping-Pong table. Regarded by Microsoft founder Bill Gates as ‘‘one<br />

of the most dynamic people I have ever met,’’ 15 Duvall preached<br />

the value of businesses based on trusting relationships with a<br />

growing population of consumers who feel comfortable with online<br />

transactions. He dubbed these potential customers ‘‘freeformers’’<br />

and estimated that more than six million British citizens fit into<br />

the category. Sadly, Duvall was diagnosed with pancreatic cancer<br />

and died the year after Zopa’s launch. He wasn’t around for the<br />

start of the global bank crisis in 2007. Zopa, however, was poised<br />

to profit.<br />

Because nations support banks with guarantees, the collapse<br />

of banks around the world, including Britain’s Northern Rock<br />

Bank, saddled taxpayers with the responsibility to make depositors<br />

whole. But even as they rescued these huge financial institutions,<br />

everyday citizens found that banks would no longer lend to them,<br />

and interest rates paid for savings dropped well below the rate of<br />

inflation. ‘‘The public got this feeling that whenever they were<br />

dealing with these big institutions, the bankers were telling them,<br />

‘We’re going to get you in the end,’’’ recalled Giles. Zopa presented<br />

an alternative ‘‘that says, ‘We’re going to talk to you respectfully,<br />

and you are going to know exactly how we do business. There will<br />

be no surprises in the end.’’’<br />

With other lenders turning off the flow of loans, Zopa’s portfolio<br />

exploded. The raw numbers—from $10 million to more than $250<br />

million—are small when compared with banks that carry billions<br />

of dollars in outstanding loans. However, by the end of 2011, more<br />

than half a million people had signed up as investors or borrowers.


Great Britain 47<br />

The average return paid to investors was just over 7 percent, and<br />

defaults across Zopa’s range of loans were less than 2 percent.<br />

Meanwhile, the rates charged to borrowers averaged 20 percent<br />

below the average for banks.<br />

Playing off the Zopa model, peer-to-peer lenders have cropped<br />

up around the world. All operate as information managers, using<br />

the data about their pool of borrowers to estimate risk and assign<br />

rates. The numbers are made public, which reduces the mystery<br />

around lending and gives peer-to-peer finance a trustworthy image.<br />

Members, who know that traditional banks are regulated and<br />

backstopped by the government, prefer the higher returns they<br />

earn to the security of state-issued guarantees. Similar to oldfashioned<br />

credit unions, Zopa and its imitators ‘‘are a way for<br />

people participate in building their own institutions,’’ said Giles.<br />

Zopa itself is a new kind of financial center where an extremely<br />

lean staff of twenty-three manage an ever-growing army of lenders<br />

and borrowers. The pace is hectic, but employees work with the<br />

intensity of people on a mission. Determined that the company<br />

serve its employees as well as it serves its customers, Giles experiments<br />

with ways to track how his team is faring. On the day we<br />

visited, he had set out a bin full of colored balls and two wastebaskets<br />

labeled Good and Bad. Staffers were advised to toss a ball into<br />

the basket that indicated how they felt about things in the office.<br />

In a testament to the spirit of trust that is the hallmark of Zopa’s<br />

business model, the bins were almost at the same level.<br />

•••<br />

By aggregating borrowers and lenders, Zopa creates efficiencies<br />

in the Zone of Possible Agreement. The operators of exploit a<br />

similar process, using the power of community to disrupt the<br />

furniture business.<br />

Two entrepreneurs in their thirties, Ning Li and Julien Callede,<br />

targeted the furniture business after studying the cost of retail space


48 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

and warehousing built into the price of every sofa or ottoman sold<br />

the old-fashioned way. Even giant companies like IKEA, which<br />

revolutionized the business with build-it-yourself kits, spend enormous<br />

amounts of money constructing, maintaining, and running<br />

facilities that are mainly way stations between the manufacturer<br />

and your living room. The real value in the product rests in great<br />

design and solid construction, Ning and Julien reasoned. Why not<br />

find a way to deliver that value without all the markups required<br />

to pay for all that storage?<br />

Breaking the business down to its essence, Julien and Ning<br />

looked for ways to connect consumers who needed furnishings to<br />

the source. They settled on a system that allows people to ‘‘vote’’<br />

with orders for a small number of designs that are offered on’s website<br />

every Thursday. When the number of orders reaches a point<br />

where an item can be manufactured efficiently and shipped at a<br />

reasonable cost, the design ‘‘wins,’’ and a factory swings into production.<br />

‘‘It’s the opposite of the very masculine way, which is to buy a<br />

lot of stuff, put it on display, and say take it or leave it,’’ explained<br />

Julien when we met him. ‘‘We take the relationship with customers<br />

seriously, ask them what they want, and respond in real time.’’ 16<br />

On the day that debuted, the site offered one table and two<br />

chairs. The company’s first big hit was a playful desk by Stuart<br />

Padwick, one of London’s most successful designers. At roughly<br />

$500, the sleek desk was sold by at roughly one-third the price it<br />

would fetch in a shop window. As visitors voted for more items, the<br />

offerings swelled to include plush chairs, sofa beds, and leather club<br />

chairs for the same price. A dozen more designers were gradually<br />

added to the team, and the site was upgraded to give customers<br />

daily reports on the path their purchases followed from door to<br />

delivery, including maps that chart the progress of ships loaded<br />

with ’s wares.<br />

Ning, who travels to China to scout suppliers, delights in the<br />

shared interests of every participant in the equation. ‘‘The factories<br />

are looking for new export markets and to use their excess capacity.


Great Britain 49<br />

The consumers are happy because they get a $1,500 item from<br />

High Street for $500, and the designers are happy because instead<br />

of selling one item per month, they may sell hundreds.’’ 17 They<br />

also get the reward of knowing that their work is finding its way<br />

into the lives of thousands of people.<br />

At the office in Notting Hill Gate, a few dozen people can<br />

manage thousands of relationships that produce millions of dollars’<br />

worth of sales each quarter. Remarkably, none of the workers are<br />

employed as salespeople. Instead they work as listeners who try<br />

to tune in to the desires of their community of customers. ‘‘How<br />

do you sell?’’ asked Julien, rhetorically. ‘‘You sell by listening to<br />

people. If you listen, they will tell you exactly what they want. If<br />

you listen, you can change the system and do it better.’’<br />

•••<br />

Most of the innovators we met in Britain had established new<br />

business models that engaged consumers and citizens directly and<br />

made things better, one person at a time. Borrowers who turned<br />

to Zopa were able to buy cars or renovate kitchens (the two most<br />

common reasons for people to apply), and Golden Company bee<br />

guardians earned paychecks as they acquired skills. But these kinds<br />

of direct efforts were not the only signs of innovation we discovered.<br />

Though no longer the seat of an empire, London remains a place<br />

where people with a broad vision for changing the world cultivate<br />

new ideas.<br />

A few blocks from Regent’s Park, in the center of London, we<br />

met two of the directors of Social Finance, an organization that<br />

has found a way to tap private wealth to solve public problems.<br />

Turning an old paradigm on its head, the firm is working on deals<br />

with different levels of government, promising social programs that<br />

produce measurably better results than existing agencies . Investors<br />

are being courted to supply the up-front cash, while government is


50 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

being asked to repay them, with interest, and give them a return if<br />

the projects are deemed a success after a certain period of years.<br />

Called social impact bonds, the experimental funding scheme<br />

is being used in the small city of Peterborough, which is east of<br />

Birmingham, to pay for services to help inmates make the transition<br />

from prison to life in society. Investors who front the money for<br />

mentoring, housing support, mental health interventions, and more<br />

stand to make a profit of as much as 13 percent. Their net will<br />

be determined by the rate at which former inmates reoffend and<br />

return to the criminal justice system. The risk for those who put up<br />

the money is that the project might fall short of the goal of a 7.5<br />

percent reduction in recidivism. For the government, it’s a no-lose<br />

proposition because the premium it might pay will come from the<br />

savings realized as fewer men return to lockup.<br />

‘‘The idea is to use money as an incentive for creativity and<br />

improved outcomes,’’ explained Emily Bolton , a director at Social<br />

Finance. ‘‘Money tends to make people focus.’’ 18<br />

By adding investors to the process of delivering social services<br />

to prisoners, Emily and her colleagues are establishing a new layer<br />

of accountability. The outcome of the efforts made by advisers,<br />

community members, counselors, and others who work with clients<br />

will be monitored by people who want the program to succeed<br />

because they want their money back, plus interest.<br />

In the United Kingdom, where transition services were all but<br />

nonexistent, 60 percent of those released are convicted of an offense<br />

within a year. The new program, which includes counselors who<br />

literally greet prisoners at the gate when they are released, will be<br />

offered to three thousand men over six years. These counselors serve<br />

as a point of contact for every kind of help a released prisoner might<br />

need. This early intervention and streamlined access to services are<br />

expected to produce the reduction in recidivism that would meet<br />

the 7.5 percent threshold. Early reports from Peterborough police<br />

suggested that they had seen a positive change in the behavior of


Great Britain 51<br />

well-known local offenders, but as of 2011, the project was still too<br />

new to assess.<br />

The social impact bond scheme has been supported by all the<br />

major political parties in Britain and has received wide publicity,<br />

which does put a bit of pressure on the directors at Social Finance.<br />

‘‘We are hoping for a good outcome and that the investors will<br />

get their return,’’ said Emily. The first wave of funders came from<br />

the ranks of people who see their investment as both a play for<br />

profit and a way to do some good in the world. But if the idea<br />

works, said Emily, mainstream investors could conceivably make<br />

social impact bonds just another component of their portfolios.<br />

‘‘The concept isn’t a silver bullet for solving social problems,’’ she<br />

concluded, ‘‘but it can be one answer among many.’’ Next on<br />

the investment agenda, if the prison project works, will be bonds<br />

to fund services for the homeless, the unemployed, and drug and<br />

alcohol rehabilitation centers.<br />

•••<br />

Emily Bolton was optimistic about the future of what she called<br />

‘‘impact investment’’ and sees it as a way for people of all political<br />

stripes to work together for the common good. She also regarded<br />

the nascent field of social finance as the ultimate expression of the<br />

Athena Doctrine. In her work, she can use all her masculine and<br />

feminine values as well as the skills that she acquired working at<br />

both KPMG (one of the world’s ‘‘big four’’ auditing companies) and<br />

a settlement camp for Tibetan refugees. ‘‘We’re at the early stages,’’<br />

she says of the effort to combine hardheaded business practices<br />

with compassion, ‘‘but I can see a world where these things all<br />

connect.’’<br />

Cherie Blair can imagine a future like the one Emily Bolton<br />

pursues, but in her effort to promote women entrepreneurs in the<br />

less-developed world, she has learned to beware the persistence<br />

of prejudice and the obstacles women still face. We met her at


52 THE ATHENA DOCTRINE<br />

the Cherie Blair Foundation, which is less than a block from the<br />

famous Marble Arch of Hyde Park. Outside, the street bustled<br />

with tourists and shoppers. Inside, a small team of staffers quietly<br />

tended to the work of overseeing roughly $1.5 million in annual<br />

investments in small businesses led by women around the world.<br />

The foundation had just issued its annual report for 2011, which<br />

highlighted enterprise development projects in India, Lebanon,<br />

Israel, the Palestinian territories, and several African nations.<br />

‘‘To survive and thrive, everyone needs the wherewithal to be<br />

productive,’’ says Cherie, a barrister and part-time judge who is also<br />

married to former prime minister Tony Blair. ‘‘You need the feeling<br />

of belonging and of being entitled to support.’’ 19 Cherie began<br />

the foundation to provide women in developing and emerging<br />

markets support and a sense of belonging by training them in<br />

business practices and financing start-ups. In Kenya and Malawi,<br />

for example, the foundation helps entrepreneurs sell solar lighting<br />

products. In India, it teaches craftswomen how to turn their goods<br />

into profits.<br />

In visiting projects around the world, Cherie has seen that<br />

‘‘both the economic and social spheres have been dislocated’’ by<br />

the financial crisis. ‘‘People are struggling to find the work and<br />

family balance in their lives.’’ She has felt personally challenged<br />

in this regard, first when she was a younger working mother and<br />

later, after she left 10 Downing Street for private life. ‘‘I was in<br />

the position many women find themselves in at key moments of<br />

their lives,’’ she recalled. ‘‘I had to find my way again, find the right<br />

balance. It isn’t a women’s issue; it’s a human issue, but women are<br />

in the lead.’’<br />

Cherie said that she has found, in women entrepreneurs, affirmation<br />

of the strength and values she saw in her own mother<br />

and grandmother, reflective of a traditionally feminine style of<br />

leadership. ‘‘Mothers think long term,’’ she noted to us. ‘‘That<br />

kind of thinking is a very good balance for the risk-taking and<br />

assertiveness’’ that is required to make a new enterprise succeed.


Great Britain 53<br />

Remarkably, Cherie noted, some corners of the developing<br />

world are friendlier to strong women than certain precincts of the<br />

West. ‘‘Look at boards of directors at major corporations,’’ she<br />

explained. ‘‘It’s disheartening that there’s been so little progress<br />

in bringing women on to them.’’ The presence of more women,<br />

she speculated, ‘‘might have led to more cautious risk assessments’’<br />

at the big banks that faltered in the past decade. ‘‘Look at those<br />

boards that are all male and ask yourself, ‘Who’s providing the<br />

countervailing views to keep things balanced?’’’


CONTENTS<br />

IV<br />

[ CONTENTS ]<br />

BUSINESS . . . MEET DESIGN vi<br />

0 TOTAL RECALL 2<br />

The Voice of the Empowered Customer 6<br />

Are You Experienced? 8<br />

1 SORRY, WE’RE CLOSED: HOW TO SURVIVE<br />

DIGITAL DARWINISM 10<br />

Disruptive Technology Is a Catalyst for<br />

Change, Not the Reason 15<br />

2 THE JOURNEY OF BUSINESS TRANSFORMATION 18<br />

There’s a Hero in Every One of Us 23<br />

The Great Myth of Technology 24<br />

3 MEET THE NEW GENERATION OF CUSTOMERS . . .<br />

GENERATION C 26<br />

Widening the View from Generation Y to<br />

Generation C 31<br />

Different Times Call for Different Measures 33<br />

4 THE NEW CUSTOMER HIERARCHY 36<br />

A New Era of Social Service: Promoting the<br />

Experiences of Customers 40<br />

The Broken Link of Social Media Customer<br />

Service 44<br />

Connecting the Dots in Social Media<br />

to Improve Experiences 47<br />

5 THE DIM LIGHT AT THE END OF THE FUNNEL 50<br />

Funnel Vision: Without Awareness<br />

There Can Be No Consideration 54<br />

The Cluster Funnel 55<br />

6 THE ZERO MOMENT OF TRUTH 58<br />

7 THE ULTIMATE MOMENT OF TRUTH 66<br />

The Ultimate Moment of Truth 74<br />

8 OPENING A WINDOW INTO NEW<br />

CONSUMERISM 78<br />

Discovery Disrupted<br />

Opening the Door to a New Generation of<br />

82<br />

Connected Consumerism 83<br />

Opening the Windows to Digital Infl uence 85<br />

9 THE DYNAMIC CUSTOMER JOURNEY 89<br />

10 INSIDE THE ELLIPSE: EMBARKING ON THE<br />

DYNAMIC CUSTOMER JOURNEY 98<br />

Formulation (Stimulus) 104<br />

Precommerce (Zero Moment of Truth) 106<br />

Commerce (First Moment of Truth) 109<br />

Postcommerce (Ultimate Moment of Truth) 112


11 IMPROVING THE UMOT TO<br />

OPTIMIZE THE ZMOT 118<br />

12 THE SIX PILLARS OF SOCIAL COMMERCE:<br />

UNDERSTANDING THE PSYCHOLOGY OF<br />

ENGAGEMENT 124<br />

Hear No Evil. See No Evil. Speak No Evil. 128<br />

The A.R.T. of Engagement 129<br />

The Psychology of Social Commerce<br />

Heuristic Number 1: Social Proof—<br />

130<br />

Follow the Crowd<br />

Heuristic Number 2: Authority—<br />

131<br />

The Guiding Light 132<br />

Heuristic Number 3: Scarcity—Less Is More<br />

Heuristic Number 4: Liking—Builds<br />

133<br />

Bonds and Trust 134<br />

Heuristic Number 5: Consistency<br />

Heuristic Number 6: Reciprocity—Pay<br />

135<br />

It Forward 136<br />

13 THE IMPORTANCE OF BRAND IN AN ERA OF<br />

DIGITAL DARWINISM 138<br />

Branding Is More Important<br />

Than Ever Before 144<br />

Brand Empathy: Always Improve<br />

Experiences 146<br />

14 WHY USER EXPERIENCE IS CRITICAL TO<br />

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS 148<br />

The CrUX of Engagement Is Intention and<br />

Purpose 153<br />

The Experience RedUX<br />

User Experience Becomes the Customer<br />

156<br />

Experience: Principles and Pillars of UX 158<br />

Medium-alism Equals FaUX Engagement 159<br />

The JUXtaposition of Empathy<br />

and Experience 161<br />

15 INNOVATE OR DIE 162<br />

CMOs Are at the Crossroads of Customer<br />

Transactions and Engagement 167<br />

Through a Telescope, We Bring the World<br />

Closer—Through a Microscope, We See What<br />

Was Previously Invisible to the Naked Eye 168<br />

Customer Engagement Is Not the Same as<br />

Conversations 172<br />

Ten Priorities for Meaningful Business<br />

Transformation 176<br />

Disruptive Technology and How to<br />

Compete for the Future 180<br />

16 THE DILEMMA’S INNOVATOR 184<br />

Innovation Is Blindness: Why Innovation Is<br />

Fundamental to the Survival of Tomorrow’s<br />

Business . . . Today 188<br />

In the Battle against Relevance versus<br />

Irrelevance: It’s Survival of the Fitting 191<br />

17 THE HERO’S JOURNEY 196<br />

The Task Force, AKA Steering Committee 202<br />

The Stages of Change 208<br />

The Hero’s Journey 209<br />

Stage 1: Inception 210<br />

Stage 2: Tribulation 211<br />

Stage 3: Transformation 212<br />

Stage 4: Realization 213<br />

Thank You 214<br />

NOTES 215<br />

CONTENTS<br />

V


TOTAL RECALL<br />

SORRY, WE’RE CLOSED<br />

THE JOURNEY OF BUSINESS TRANSFORMATION<br />

MEET THE NEW GENERATION OF<br />

CUSTOMERS . . . GENERATION C<br />

THE NEW CUSTOMER HIERARCHY<br />

THE DIM LIGHT AT THE END OF THE FUNNEL<br />

THE ZERO MOMENT OF TRUTH<br />

THE ULTIMATE MOMENT OF TRUTH<br />

OPENING A WINDOW INTO NEW<br />

CONSUMERISM<br />

THE DYNAMIC CUSTOMER JOURNEY<br />

INSIDE THE ELLIPSE: EMBARKING ON THE DCJ<br />

IMPROVING THE UMOT TO OPTIMIZE THE ZMOT<br />

THE SIX PILLARS OF SOCIAL COMMERCE<br />

THE IMPORTANCE OF BRAND IN AN ERA OF<br />

DIGITAL DARWINISM<br />

WHY USER EXPERIENCE IS CRITICAL TO<br />

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS<br />

INNOVATE OR DIE<br />

THE DILEMMA’S INNOVATOR<br />

THE HERO’S JOURNEY<br />

CHAPTER


TOTAL RECALL


Happiness is not<br />

something you<br />

experience, it’s<br />

something you<br />

remember.<br />

—Oscar Levant


How do we ensure that our customers have an amazing customer experience? An intriguing<br />

question.<br />

In the 1990 movie Total Recall, Douglas Quaid’s character visits “Rekall,” a company that helps<br />

people have experiences they wish they could have by implanting memories. For his vacation<br />

Quaid selects his dream experience, a trip to Mars with an added espionage package.<br />

During his experience, Quaid is jolted awake carrying the experience back into the real world.<br />

It is later discovered that he really is the character he was hoping to become temporarily. Like<br />

Quaid, every customer desires a remarkable experience.<br />

Why make customers cope with the ordinary?<br />

Total Recall echoes the focus of this book and my day-to-day work. While implanting desirable<br />

experiences is not necessarily a metaphor for this book, creating real-world “customer<br />

experiences” is a critical role businesses must create in a new era of consumerism.<br />

The Total Recall moment is waking consumers up to expect more from the businesses they<br />

support and the products they purchase. They not only expect better experiences, they<br />

believe they are entitled to them. This is an opportunity for your business to create positive<br />

experiences. For it is the experience that will become that measure of satisfaction and success.<br />

TOTAL RECALL<br />

5


CHAPTER 0<br />

6<br />

[ THE VOICE OF THE ]<br />

EMPOWERED CUSTOMER<br />

Through technology, consumers are experiencing a validating and infl uential form of<br />

empowerment.<br />

Businesses must recognize that the voice of the customer is now more powerful than ever<br />

before. Whether Facebook, Twitter, YouTube, Yelp, review sites, product forums, blogs, or<br />

Pinterest, your customers are sharing their experiences on platforms where audiences can fi nd<br />

what others are saying about you.<br />

So what?<br />

Your customers and prospects will inevitably fi nd the negative experiences others have had.<br />

Customers will uncover the one horrendous review rather than the incredible experiences that<br />

others have had.<br />

As customers tweet negative experiences, businesses try to respond or address the complaint.<br />

The more a company engages, and the more people gain access to social and mobile platforms,<br />

interactions accelerate and amplify. Knowing this, companies are spending more money and<br />

resources managing their online reputations. Increasingly, businesses are shifting resources until<br />

the traditional call center is replicated at social scale. Although that’s inherently a good thing,<br />

the downside is that the call center becomes a notable cost center.<br />

Perhaps this is just the new cost of doing business. In an era of connected consumerism, to earn<br />

customer attention, trust, and loyalty is a cost and an investment in relevance and relationships.


Yet even with the pervasiveness of technology, and increased customer expectations, businesses<br />

are making the same mistakes. We are not designing and implementing incredible experiences;<br />

rather, we’re marketing, selling, and serving customers.<br />

What are customers to align with if we<br />

don’t fi rst defi ne it? What do we want them<br />

to be a part of?<br />

Now’s the time for an investment in something more than price, performance, or value. The<br />

future of business is about creating experiences, products, programs, and processes that evoke<br />

splendor and rekindle meaningful and sincere interaction and growth.<br />

At the center of this evolution—or (r)evolution—is the experience. And, the experience is<br />

everything now.<br />

TOTAL RECALL<br />

7


CHAPTER 0<br />

8<br />

[ ]<br />

ARE YOU EXPERIENCED?<br />

Yes, it’s time to invest in proactive experiences. If we do not, we will be forever tethered to the<br />

unproductive dance that is reacting, responding to, and solving negative experiences in real<br />

time, over time.<br />

What if I told you that the cost of reacting to experiences is far greater than the cost of<br />

proactively defi ning experiences from the onset? Indeed, companies are investing in reactive<br />

engagement. And, for the most part, they can succeed in shifting negative experiences toward<br />

positive territory. However, any favorable outcome is weighed against the cost of the initial<br />

negative experience—or more importantly, the cost of how that negative experience was shared<br />

and how it ultimately impacted others. What’s most startling is that businesses do not measure<br />

these numbers today. But that’s about to change.<br />

Businesses must invest in defi ning not only a positive experience, but also a wonderfully<br />

shareable experience. Doing so infl uences others to join the fray while offsetting negative<br />

inquiries and the damaging viral effects of shared negative experiences.<br />

This is the time to reframe those negative experiences. Pushing a change from responding to<br />

negative experiences to proactively creating positive ones is everything. Why? The cost of<br />

reacting to negative experiences is completely eclipsed by the upside of creating and nurturing<br />

positive experiences at the inception.<br />

To better understand the importance of experience requires that you fi rst acknowledge that you<br />

are the very consumer you’re trying to reach. You’re not looking for just any experience, you’re


looking for the experience. Businesses that recognize and adapt to you and people like you will<br />

quickly learn how to entice you through shared values and meaningful affi nity hooks . . . while<br />

never stopping to compete for relevance.<br />

Experience is everything. And, businesses must create experiences that mean something. If<br />

necessity is the mother of invention, then vision is the father of innovation.<br />

#InnovateorDie<br />

TOTAL RECALL<br />

9


TOTAL RECALL<br />

SORRY, WE’RE CLOSED<br />

THE JOURNEY OF BUSINESS TRANSFORMATION<br />

MEET THE NEW GENERATION OF<br />

CUSTOMERS . . . GENERATION C<br />

THE NEW CUSTOMER HIERARCHY<br />

THE DIM LIGHT AT THE END OF THE FUNNEL<br />

THE ZERO MOMENT OF TRUTH<br />

THE ULTIMATE MOMENT OF TRUTH<br />

OPENING A WINDOW INTO NEW<br />

CONSUMERISM<br />

THE DYNAMIC CUSTOMER JOURNEY<br />

INSIDE THE ELLIPSE: EMBARKING ON THE DCJ<br />

IMPROVING THE UMOT TO OPTIMIZE THE ZMOT<br />

THE SIX PILLARS OF SOCIAL COMMERCE<br />

THE IMPORTANCE OF BRAND IN AN ERA OF<br />

DIGITAL DARWINISM<br />

WHY USER EXPERIENCE IS CRITICAL TO<br />

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS<br />

INNOVATE OR DIE<br />

THE DILEMMA’S INNOVATOR<br />

THE HERO’S JOURNEY<br />

CHAPTER


SORRY, WE’RE CLOSED<br />

How to Survive Digital Darwinism


People never learn<br />

anything by being<br />

told, they have to<br />

fi nd out for<br />

themselves.<br />

—Paulo Coelho,<br />

Veronika Decides to Die


The customer journey is still evolving. How businesses react and ultimately lead the<br />

enhancement of relationships is not solely determined by technology. 1 To truly get closer to<br />

customers takes a culture of customer-centricity, empowerment, and innovation.<br />

Saying that we need to get closer to the customer is hardly enough to convince business<br />

leaders that the customer revolution they hear about is literally steps away from their offi ce<br />

door. I know I’m not saying anything here you don’t already know. The difference is, however,<br />

that what started as a groundswell for business transformation from the bottom up has hit a<br />

ceiling. To break through it requires that someone (read: you) has to make the case to bring<br />

change from the top down.<br />

Most executives don’t use social networks or smart phones. Many don’t even read their own<br />

email. Many won’t ever read this book. So, trying to convince decision makers that this is a war<br />

fought on the battleground of technology is in and of itself fi ghting a losing battle.<br />

SORRY, WE’RE CLOSED 13


CHAPTER 1<br />

14<br />

The future of business isn’t tied to the permeation of Facebook, Twitter, iPhones, and Droids,<br />

pins on Pinterest, tablets, or real-time geolocation check-ins. The future of business comes<br />

down to relevance and the ability to understand how technology affects decision making and<br />

behavior to the point where the recognition of new opportunities and the ability to strategically<br />

adapt to them becomes a competitive advantage.<br />

But make no mistake: This is as much a technology revolution as it is a series of real-world<br />

revolutions that will eventually seize organizations, governments, and businesses.<br />

Change boils down to three things:<br />

1. Listening<br />

2. Learning<br />

3. Adapting


[ ]<br />

DISRUPTIVE TECHNOLOGY IS A<br />

CATALYST FOR CHANGE, NOT<br />

THE REASON<br />

Look, I get it. Change is all anyone talks about today and we all know that talk is cheap.<br />

We also know that change is inevitable and that it is rarely easy. Among the greatest diffi culties<br />

associated with change is the ability to recognize that change is needed at a time when we<br />

can actually do something about it. All too often, by the time we realize that change is needed<br />

and that we must shift to a new way of thinking, it is already too late. Or worse, competitors<br />

recognize the need for change before us, and we are by default pushed into a position where<br />

our next steps are impulsive or reactive rather than strategic.<br />

The volume of emerging technology is both awe-inspiring and overwhelming. As new<br />

technology makes its way into everyday life and work fl ow, devices, applications, and networks,<br />

it disrupts the norm and begins to impact behavior. It is this disruptive technology that over<br />

time infl uences how people work, communicate, share, and make decisions.<br />

The question is at what point does<br />

emerging technology or new behavior<br />

become disruptive?<br />

And, more importantly, what systems, processes, and protocols are in place that recognize<br />

disruption, assess opportunity, and facilitate the testing of new ideas?<br />

The time to answer these questions is now.<br />

SORRY, WE’RE CLOSED 15


CHAPTER 1<br />

16<br />

In my last book, The End of Business as Usual, 2 I introduced the notion of Digital Darwinism, the<br />

evolution of consumer behavior when society and technology evolve faster than our ability to<br />

adapt. And the reality is that because of the role technology now plays in our lives, we forever<br />

compete for survival to effectively fi ght off Digital Darwinism.<br />

Humility is a gift and it’s needed in business now more than ever. Disruption not only faces every<br />

business, its effects are already spreading through customer markets and the channels that<br />

infl uence decisions and behavior.<br />

A recent advertisement produced by Babson College cited a rather humbling statistic:<br />

“ ”<br />

Over 40 percent of the companies that were at the top of the Fortune 500 in 2000 were<br />

no longer there in 2010.<br />

As we’re often painfully reminded, history has a way of repeating itself. Forbes published an<br />

article in early 2011 that served as a harbinger for the turbulent and transformative times that lie<br />

ahead. 3 The opening line read,<br />

The End is Near: Why 70% of the Fortune 1000 Will Be Replaced in a Few Years.<br />

“ ”<br />

The author cited a study published in the book Built to Change by Edward E. Lawler and<br />

Christopher G. Worley. The study found that between 1973 and 1983, 35 percent of the<br />

top companies in the Fortune 1000 companies were new to the list. Over the next decade<br />

from 1983 to 1993, churn jumped to 45 percent, and then soared again to an astounding<br />

60 percent between 1993 and 2003. If the current trend continues, more than 70 percent of<br />

Fortune 1000 companies will turn over from 2003 to <strong>2013</strong>. As the author observes, “In other<br />

words, over three-fourths of the existing captains of industry will fall from their throne.”


They include:<br />

Blockbuster<br />

Borders<br />

Compaq<br />

CompUSA<br />

E.F. Hutton<br />

Hostess<br />

KB Toys<br />

Kodak<br />

LIFE<br />

Merry-Go-Round<br />

Mervyns<br />

Pontiac<br />

Tower Records<br />

Woolworths<br />

This is about the survival of both the fi ttest and the fi tting. It takes more than a presence in<br />

new channels to improve customer experiences and relationships. It takes courage. It takes<br />

persistence to break through resistance. But, in the end, it’s how you work with your leaders, or<br />

how you lead, to move toward an empowered and customer-centric culture that sets in motion<br />

real transformation.<br />

You have a special path you must follow to set in motion the c hange that opens the door to<br />

improve experiences inside and outside the organization.<br />

SORRY, WE’RE CLOSED<br />

17


Contents<br />

Special Thanks ix<br />

Foreword xv<br />

Introduction xvii<br />

Chapter 1: Startup Revolution 1<br />

The Myth of the Visionary (Take 1) 1<br />

The Myth of the Visionary (Take 2) 4<br />

Case Study: Disrupting Venture Capital 6<br />

Which Is to Say, Disruption Hurts 12<br />

Case Study: Customized Value Creation 21<br />

And Cue the Lean Startup 23<br />

Lean Startup, Please Meet the Lean Entrepreneur 25<br />

Chapter 2: Vision, Values, and Culture 31<br />

Vision and Values 31<br />

Case Study: Is the Problem Really Solvable? 36<br />

Lean into It: The Lean Startup Culture 38<br />

Case Study: Experience-Driven Jumpstart 41<br />

Case Study: KISSmetrics 45<br />

Case Study: Root-Cause Analysis on Sales 50<br />

Over the Horizon: A Framework 56<br />

Case Study: Lean Startup Horizons 57<br />

Chapter 3: All the Fish in the Sea 61<br />

Case Study: The Ethology of the Fish<br />

Know Your Audience: Why<br />

64<br />

Segmentation Matters 66<br />

Market Segment 70<br />

Personas: Create a Fake Customer 71<br />

Case Study: Salim’s Fish Inventory 72<br />

Choosing a Market Segment 74<br />

Case Study: Carla’s Dream Jobs 75<br />

Case Study: It’s in the Name 78<br />

Chapter 4: Wading in the Value Stream 83<br />

Articulating the Value Stream 83<br />

Case Study: Seeing from Customer’s View 85<br />

Value-Stream Discovery 91<br />

Case Study: AppFog’s High Hurdle 102<br />

Chapter 5: Diving In 109<br />

Listen to Your Customers—or Not 110<br />

Customer Interaction<br />

Case Study: Don’t Just Get Out of the<br />

113<br />

Building, Get Out of the Country 115<br />

vii


Case Study: What’s the Worst That Can Happen? 121<br />

Case Study: A Nonprofi t Lean Startup 123<br />

Chapter 6: Viability Experiments 131<br />

The Infamous Landing Page 132<br />

Concierge Test 134<br />

Case Study: Curating User Experience 135<br />

Wizard of Oz Test 139<br />

Case Study: Idea to Wizard of Oz in under 90 Days 140<br />

Crowd-Funding Test 141<br />

Case Study: Two-Sided Market Lean Startup 143<br />

Prototyping 146<br />

Case Study: MVP: Motor Vehicle Prototype 148<br />

Chapter 7: Data’s Double-Edged Sword 151<br />

Case Study: Disrupting the Undisruptable 155<br />

New Products 158<br />

Existing Products 163<br />

Case Study: Instrumenting Growth 165<br />

Chapter 8: The Valley of Death 169<br />

Minimum Viable Product 171<br />

Case Study: The Minimum Viable Audience 176<br />

viii CONTENTS<br />

Case Study: Social Impact Lean Startup 180<br />

Case Study: But My Marinara Is to Die For!<br />

Case Study: O2, Telecom at the<br />

183<br />

Speed of the Internet 189<br />

Chapter 9: Real Visionaries Have<br />

Funnel Vision 193<br />

Innovate the Funnel 195<br />

Growth Waves<br />

Case Study: Ten Lean Startup Buzzword<br />

209<br />

Questions with Rob Fan 215<br />

Chapter 10: The Final Word 225<br />

Case Study: Drinking Kool-Aid and<br />

Eating Dog Food 229<br />

Notes 237<br />

Acknowledgments 241<br />

About the Authors 244<br />

Index 249


Foreword<br />

When I fi rst started blogging in August<br />

of 2008, I had no idea what to expect. Startup<br />

blogging was hardly “cool” back then.<br />

Plenty of venture capitalists advised me<br />

against it.<br />

My personal background was as an<br />

engineer and my companies had been<br />

web-based startups, so that is what I wrote<br />

about. Struggling to explain the successes<br />

and failures of those companies, I discussed<br />

principles like continuous deployment, customer<br />

development, and a hyper-accelerated<br />

form of agile. When I delved into lean manufacturing,<br />

I discovered the concepts and<br />

terminology dovetailed. Th e result: a new<br />

idea I called Th e Lean Startup.<br />

I started with some basic theory: that a<br />

startup is an institution designed to thrive<br />

in the soil of extreme uncertainty; that<br />

traditional management techniques rooted<br />

in forecasting and planning would not work<br />

well in the face of that uncertainty. Th erefore,<br />

we needed a new management toolkit<br />

designed explicitly for iteration, scientifi c<br />

learning, and rapid experimentation.<br />

At the time, I viewed it as incidental that<br />

the theory might be tied to a particular<br />

industry, such as high-tech startups or<br />

web-based environments. Lean, after all,<br />

emerged from Toyota, a huge automobile<br />

manufacturing company. I simply stated my<br />

belief that Lean Startup principles would<br />

work in other types of startups and in<br />

other areas of business where uncertainty<br />

reigned.<br />

Boy, was I unprepared for what happened<br />

next. I was hopeful that we would change<br />

the way startups are built—but I didn’t know.<br />

Fast-forward more than four years and<br />

I’m astounded by what has emerged.<br />

A nascent community has blossomed into<br />

a full-fl edged movement. Entrepreneurs,<br />

both new and experienced, proudly share<br />

their Lean Startup learning in case studies,<br />

conferences, and many, many blogs. Books,<br />

workshops, and courses authored by passionate<br />

practitioners relate experience, share<br />

insight, and create tools to teach students<br />

ways to make Lean Startup principles their<br />

own. Many investors, advisors, mentors, and<br />

even celebrity entrepreneur icons speak the<br />

Lean Startup language.<br />

It’s a big tent. We stand on the shoulders<br />

of giants: customer development, the theory<br />

of disruptive innovation, the technology<br />

life-cycle adoption theory, and agile development.<br />

Complementary lines of thinking,<br />

such as that of user experience professionals,<br />

design thinking practitioners, and the functional<br />

disciplines of sales, marketing, operations,<br />

and even accounting, come together<br />

to share practices that lift us all.<br />

Lean Startup has gone mainstream.<br />

I wish I could say that this was all part of<br />

some master plan, that I knew all along<br />

that companies of all sizes—even those far<br />

outside the high-technology world—would<br />

embrace Lean Startup. I wish I had foreseen<br />

that within a year of publishing Th e Lean<br />

Startup: How Today’s Entrepreneurs Use<br />

Continuous Innovation to Achieve Radically<br />

Successful Businesses, many large organizations,<br />

including such monsters as the<br />

United States Federal government (!) would<br />

have recognized that to cope with today’s<br />

xv


world—faster, more competitive, and inundated<br />

with data—new methods are needed<br />

to keep up. Th e truth is that all of this change<br />

has happened faster and more thoroughly<br />

than any of us imagined. And—as you’re<br />

about to see—we’re just getting started.<br />

Th at’s why I am so excited by this book<br />

you hold in your hands. Th e Lean Entrepreneur<br />

is about these new methods. Brant<br />

Cooper and Patrick Vlaskovits are among<br />

the earliest adopters of new ideas such as<br />

Lean Startup and customer development.<br />

Th eir new work turns their lens on three primary<br />

focal points: how to interact with customers,<br />

run experiments, and use actionable<br />

data to move the needle of any uncertain<br />

business endeavor.<br />

As with all of their work, theirs is not just<br />

a book of theory. Brant and Patrick provide<br />

great tactical depth in each of these areas.<br />

Th ey endeavor to answer the question:<br />

No matter where you are as an organization,<br />

how do you know where to focus<br />

your Lean Startup activities? Th e Lean<br />

Entrepreneur off ers new thinking, tools, and<br />

activities that help organizations identify<br />

and act upon business model challenges in<br />

xvi FOREWORD<br />

a waste-eliminating manner. Following the<br />

precepts of traditional lean thinking, Brant<br />

and Patrick introduce the value stream discovery<br />

process, which helps organizations<br />

hypothesize what they must do, including<br />

product development, marketing, and sales<br />

in order to create value. Th ese business<br />

model assumptions are then ripe for testing,<br />

measuring, and iterating upon.<br />

Further, the value you create is meaningless<br />

without a customer who needs, wants,<br />

desires, and, ultimately, determines the fi nal<br />

value of your creation. Brant and Patrick<br />

spend considerable time helping you think<br />

through your customer segments. Cleverly,<br />

and in the spirit of the scientifi c method,<br />

they even help you discover where your<br />

customer theory is wrong.<br />

Everyone likes a good story; Brant and<br />

Patrick interviewed dozens of entrepreneurs<br />

and documented numerous case studies<br />

both inside and outside of high-tech, in both<br />

startups and large enterprises. Th ere’s even<br />

a classic Wizard of Oz minimum viable product<br />

that dates back to 1998!<br />

Make no mistake: Brant and Patrick<br />

have been here since the beginning. Th ey<br />

self-published Th e Entrepreneur’s Guide to<br />

Customer Development in April of 2010.<br />

From the outset, they were both practitioners<br />

and mentors, urging entrepreneurs<br />

not to follow a paint-by-numbers approach,<br />

but rather to think lean: fast, agile, and continuously<br />

learning. Over the last two years<br />

they’ve traveled around the world speaking,<br />

advising, and teaching Lean Startup.<br />

Th e Lean Entrepreneur is an important<br />

addition to the growing library of principles<br />

and practices designed to improve how we<br />

tackle innovation and uncertainty, be it in<br />

high-tech startups, Fortune 100 companies,<br />

non-profi ts, or government offi ces.<br />

I consider myself lucky to count Brant<br />

and Patrick as friends and colleagues. It is<br />

my hope that from this book you will gain<br />

valuable insights, make Lean Startup your<br />

own, and—much more importantly—that<br />

you are successful in changing the world for<br />

the better.<br />

Eric Ries<br />

San Francisco<br />

January <strong>2013</strong>


Introduction<br />

What Is The Lean Entrepreneur?<br />

It’s hard to know where you live on the<br />

curve. As far as we can tell, the arrow of time<br />

moves in one direction. You can never step<br />

in the same river twice (Heraclitus) and all<br />

that.<br />

Change isn’t constant. We change constantly,<br />

but at diff erent rates, depending<br />

where we are on the curve. Fast change<br />

comes in times of cheap experimentation.<br />

Massive new life emerged on Earth during<br />

time periods in which a convergence of foundational<br />

platforms, like the diff erent aspects<br />

of Earth’s biosphere, favored the emergence<br />

of diverse species, most of which failed.<br />

Massive new technologies emerge when<br />

the discovery and extraction of massive<br />

amounts of resources (water, minerals, fuel)<br />

provides low-cost industrial experiments,<br />

most of which fail.<br />

Although our narratives of the past reveal<br />

eras of big change, those who lived during<br />

those times likely didn’t see it that way:<br />

“Hey bro, pretty cool, we’re living in the<br />

Age of Renaissance, yeah?”<br />

“Beats the Middle Ages, dude.”<br />

“Word.”<br />

Th e life you live defi nes normalcy.<br />

Is change big or little? Dramatic or incremental?<br />

Permanent or cyclical? Disruptive<br />

or sustaining?<br />

xvii


No one can pinpoint where we exist on<br />

the curve. Is change over or just beginning?<br />

Are we at an infl ection point? Up or down?<br />

Is the end nigh, or is the Age of Aquarius<br />

approaching?<br />

A broken clock is right twice a day.<br />

How can we know when we are amid big<br />

change? Listen to experts and incumbents. If<br />

you hear a lot of this, then be forewarned—<br />

“Th e times they are a-changin’ ”:<br />

• “Don’t worry, it’s just the business cycle;<br />

or, in other words, the next bus to pick us<br />

up will be by in fi ve minutes.”<br />

• “Will x be ubiquitous? Oh that’s ridiculous;<br />

x is exactly what is already consuming<br />

your market. ‘It’s just a normal cycle,<br />

we’ll be back.’ ”<br />

• “Piracy is killing us!”<br />

Th e Lean Entrepreneur is about navigating<br />

big change.<br />

Whether what’s emerging is considered<br />

the postindustrial age, an information society,<br />

or an experience economy, Th e Lean<br />

Entrepreneur aims to help you create<br />

products people want, innovate with new<br />

ventures, and disrupt markets. With big<br />

change comes big opportunity. We’ll provide<br />

you with grounded ways to market test<br />

your ideas with the right market segment;<br />

we’ll give you real, tangible examples of how<br />

xviii INTRODUCTION<br />

successful entrepreneurs are doing so; and<br />

we’ll get you started right now and get you<br />

up to speed quickly.<br />

We think of Th e Lean Entrepreneur as<br />

a fi eld guide because it is designed to be<br />

brought into the fi eld, whether that is your<br />

offi ce, the local co-working space, your client’s<br />

place of business, or the local coff ee<br />

shop as you surf cyberspace, planning your<br />

conquest. Whereas a traditional naturalist<br />

fi eld guide helps outdoorsmen identify the<br />

plants and animals of a certain geography, our<br />

fi eld guide will help you identify concepts and<br />

ideas in the geography of innovation. At fi rst<br />

blush, some of these ideas may not appear to<br />

be applicable to your business, but with an<br />

open mind and a spirit of creativity, we will<br />

demonstrate how these concepts can and will<br />

radically reshape how you bring products to<br />

market and, ultimately, to your business.<br />

Th e Lean Entrepreneur is a book of synthesis,<br />

of recombination, and, we hope, of<br />

inspiration. It is a synthesis in that we will<br />

show where several pre-existing ideas about<br />

how to innovate, which initially appear to be<br />

virtual islands strewn across a sea, actually<br />

share connections and complement each<br />

other. And if we have done this well, a larger,<br />

more complete, and more comprehensive<br />

map of the changes coming and how to<br />

innovate now will have emerged for you.<br />

As Henry Ford recombined existing<br />

technologies from diff erent domains<br />

(interchangeable parts, the assembly line,<br />

the electric motor) into a wholly novel and<br />

disruptive set of innovations resulting in<br />

the manufacture and distribution of the<br />

fi rst durable, mass-market automobile,<br />

we hope to inspire vis-à-vis our interpretations<br />

of several big ideas, which will result in<br />

a new approach that scales well for disruptive<br />

innovators and entrepreneurs, from<br />

small, value-producing businesses to the<br />

Fortune 500.<br />

Th e product development methodologies<br />

and innovation frameworks espoused by Th e<br />

Lean Entrepreneur are heavily infl uenced by<br />

truly big thinkers, such as Steve Blank and<br />

Eric Ries, creators of Customer Development<br />

and Th e Lean Startup, respectively. However,<br />

other, rather similar, innovation methodologies<br />

such as design thinking and discoverydriven<br />

planning also exist.<br />

All the aforementioned frameworks tend<br />

to be driven by principle, rather than by a set<br />

of cut-and-dried tactics, and are typifi ed by<br />

iterative, customer-centric, data-informed<br />

approaches resembling the scientifi c<br />

method; and we, as natural-born bricoleurs,<br />

happily borrow from ideas that we deem<br />

appropriate as well as discard or ignore what<br />

we deem unhelpful.


We urge you, the reader, to do the same<br />

with ideas and approaches presented in<br />

this book.<br />

Why Read (Be) The<br />

Lean Entrepreneur?<br />

Our mission in writing Th e Lean Entrepreneur<br />

is threefold:<br />

1. To describe why our economy is primed<br />

for a new wave of entrepreneurship<br />

using new methods of disruptive<br />

innovation.<br />

2. To provide you real-world examples of<br />

how entrepreneurs are creating new<br />

markets and disrupting others.<br />

3. To show you how you can get started<br />

creating value.<br />

Th e context of Th e Lean Entrepreneur<br />

is an iterative, customer-centric, datainformed<br />

business development approach<br />

in the face of market uncertainty. Although,<br />

to some degree, all businesses operate in<br />

conditions of market uncertainty, all such<br />

conditions are not created equal. Market<br />

uncertainty can be described by an innovation<br />

spectrum stretching from lesser market<br />

uncertainty when undertaking sustaining<br />

innovation to greater market uncertainty<br />

when pursuing truly disruptive innovation.<br />

Uncertainty and innovation are a duality.<br />

Without the former, there is no opportunity<br />

for the latter. True disruptive innovation<br />

can only happen in environments in which<br />

the fi nal product, and its value proposition,<br />

price, marketing, sales channels, and, most<br />

importantly, its customer are, at best, educated<br />

guesses but, more than likely, almost<br />

completely unknown.<br />

Th e inverse is also true: If one is developing<br />

products for which the value proposition,<br />

price, marketing, sales channels, and<br />

market segments are known or very likely to<br />

be known; then iterative, customer-centric,<br />

data-driven approaches as espoused by Th e<br />

Lean Entrepreneur may be suboptimal.<br />

Suffi ce it to say, when the value proposition<br />

is known and successfully delivered by a<br />

business to a known customer, the methods<br />

of execution used by its owners and<br />

employees are good enough, at least for now.<br />

Perhaps they could become more effi cient<br />

or less wasteful, but to instruct successful<br />

businesses on how to be more effi cient is not<br />

our ambition.<br />

As you read Th e Lean Entrepreneur, we’ll<br />

make the case that innovating in uncertainty<br />

requires a highly iterative approach. We’ll<br />

also make the case that a disproportionate<br />

part of your business model is ultimately<br />

determined not by command-and-control<br />

diktats from the executive offi ces of your<br />

company or even your own personal desires<br />

but implicitly by the market segment you<br />

hope to provide value for. Th e sooner you<br />

grok that your customers have signifi cant<br />

de facto control over the destiny of your<br />

business, the better for you, your customers,<br />

your employees, your colleagues, your<br />

shareholders, and other stakeholders in your<br />

business.<br />

To belabor the point, it is your market<br />

segment, not you, that determines how you<br />

distribute your product, how much they are<br />

willing to pay, what sort of messaging they<br />

respond to, and for what job they are in need<br />

of hiring a product. In other words, other<br />

than the fact that you can choose whether<br />

to serve a particular segment, it is up to the<br />

segment to decide whether you should be<br />

given a shot.<br />

Since iterative, customer-centric, datainformed<br />

product development approaches<br />

to creating value predate this book, is this<br />

simply a gussied-up rehash of previous<br />

thinking?<br />

Short answer: No.<br />

We hear time and time again that the<br />

greatest contribution made by Eric Ries and<br />

the Lean Startup is the lexicon. It provides<br />

a language for anyone practicing entrepreneurship<br />

to talk about how to do meaningful<br />

Introduction xix


xx INTRODUCTION


innovation. Th e point has never been about<br />

who came up with what, but, rather, how<br />

can we learn from past successes to make<br />

future endeavors more predictable.<br />

We feel that we are now witnessing a<br />

phase marked by radical disequilibrium and<br />

fundamental changes in innovation and<br />

entrepreneurship enabled by a juggernaut of<br />

technological and cultural trends.<br />

Th e best way to navigate the near future<br />

is to hyperfocus on creating value for<br />

customers and moving at the speed of the<br />

Internet. We’ll show you how.<br />

Who Is the Lean<br />

Entrepreneur?<br />

We’d like to answer that question like most<br />

entrepreneurs who are asked to defi ne their<br />

market: Everyone! However, in order to demonstrate<br />

that we drink our own Kool-Aid,<br />

we have spoken to and worked with many<br />

diff erent individuals as we wrote this book.<br />

Here are our market segments:<br />

• Scalable startup founders—If you are<br />

hoping to build “the next big thing.”<br />

• Lifestyle business founders—We don’t<br />

think the term is derogatory in the least.<br />

If you’re trying to build a real business<br />

that provides value to customers, we’re<br />

talking to you.<br />

• Intrapreneurs—If you are trying to<br />

change your business, whatever size, to<br />

move at the speed of the Internet read on.<br />

• Educators—You recognize that entrepreneurship<br />

needs to be taught diff erently.<br />

• Government Change Agents—If, like<br />

entrepreneurs trying to drive change<br />

inside big businesses, you are trying<br />

to drive change in how governments<br />

operate, we’re here to help.<br />

• Investors—If you could use help fi nding<br />

and providing assistance to the right<br />

startups.<br />

Although we’d like to think this book will<br />

benefi t everyone to some degree, this book<br />

is likely less than optimal for these market<br />

segments:<br />

• Small-business founders who are starting<br />

companies for which there is already a<br />

known model—Typically these are the<br />

types of businesses found in malls: dry<br />

cleaners, retailers, franchises, and so<br />

forth.<br />

• Lifestyle business owners—If you’ve already<br />

built your business and are generally satisfi<br />

ed with what you’ve achieved, congratulations!<br />

You probably don’t need us.<br />

• Solo practitioners—If you’re trying to generate<br />

a personal or family income stream<br />

via “projects” or small-scale products or<br />

services we think that’s great! Th ere are<br />

probably better books for that.<br />

Generally speaking, if you’ve read Eric<br />

Ries’s Th e Lean Startup and are looking for<br />

more tactical application of the principles<br />

espoused there, this is the right book for you.<br />

If you haven’t read it and need convincing<br />

that a lean startup is the right thing for you<br />

and your organization, we will make the<br />

case—but you really should read Eric’s book.<br />

If you’ve read Th e Four Steps to the<br />

Epiphany, our Entrepreneur’s Guide to Customer<br />

Development, or Blank’s Th e Startup<br />

Owner’s Manual, you will fi nd new tools and<br />

methodologies for applying the principles<br />

you already believe in. Th ere is not a lot of<br />

duplication here.<br />

If you are well into the lean startup movement,<br />

a heavy reader of Ash Maurya, Cindy<br />

Alvarez, Sean Murphy, and others, we fi rmly<br />

believe we have exciting new material you<br />

can use to grow your business.<br />

How to Use The Lean<br />

Entrepreneur<br />

Th is book hopes to not only teach you and<br />

inspire you, but also to show you some fun<br />

along the way.<br />

Introduction xxi


To that end, we’ve engaged a talented<br />

entrepreneur and artist who goes by the<br />

name of Fake Grimlock. Fake Grimlock has<br />

created an expressive set of illustrations just<br />

for Th e Lean Entrepreneur. Th e illustrations<br />

tell a story and serve to amplify concepts<br />

from the book.<br />

You’ll fi nd them a bit whimsical at times,<br />

but be prepared to think deep thoughts as<br />

you take them in.<br />

We’ve made them available for you for<br />

reuse and remix, subject to the Creative<br />

Commons license.<br />

If you want to download the illustrations<br />

to use them in your presentations or blog<br />

posts or in other interesting ways, please<br />

do.* You can access them at http://Lean<br />

Entrepreneur.co/illustrations or e-mail us<br />

at pics@leanentrepreneur.co.<br />

Our writing style aims to get to the heart<br />

of the matter quickly. Experts in specifi c<br />

domains will notice, probably much to their<br />

irritation, that we will intentionally gloss<br />

over some of the fi ner points we discuss.<br />

Th is is not because we don’t think the details<br />

xxii INTRODUCTION<br />

matter; they do, but they don’t matter for the<br />

context of this book.<br />

Th e Lean Entrepreneur is divided into 10<br />

chapters:<br />

1. Startup Revolution—A brief redux on<br />

what’s going on now that makes lean<br />

startup the right methodology to apply<br />

to your business, regardless of size or<br />

sector.<br />

2. Vision, Values, and Culture—We describe<br />

what a lean startup looks like in<br />

the startup world and in the enterprise.<br />

3. All the Fish in the Sea—We help you<br />

fi gure out what customers to fi sh for.<br />

4. Wading in the Value Stream—We<br />

explain how to posit the value you are<br />

creating.<br />

5. Diving In—We introduce various<br />

methods of customer interaction to<br />

learn.<br />

6. Viability Experiments—We talk about<br />

various methods of running experiments<br />

to de-risk your market.<br />

7. Data’s Double-Edged Sword—We help<br />

you not drown in data, while fi nding<br />

the information necessary to move the<br />

needle.<br />

8. Th e Valley of Death—We guide you<br />

through the requisite ups and downs of<br />

traversing uncertainty.<br />

9. Real Visionaries have Funnel Vision—<br />

We break down marketing and sales.<br />

10. Th e Final Word—We end with a call to<br />

action.<br />

Th roughout, we include examples of real<br />

companies applying lean startup principles<br />

and succeeding. We hope you gain learning<br />

and inspiration from these companies, many<br />

of whom don’t use the term lean to describe<br />

themselves.<br />

Each chapter also includes exercises and<br />

templates you can use to help you think<br />

through your business model. Although we<br />

don’t believe a step-by-step approach to<br />

success exists, we think many will fi nd our<br />

exercises benefi cial.<br />

Learn the craft, then make it your own.<br />

* We’ve licensed the illustrations with http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. We’d love for you to use and share them, just remember to attribute “Th e Lean Entrepreneur by Brant Cooper and<br />

Patrick Vlaskovits with illustrations by Fake Grimlock” with a link to http://LeanEntrepreneur.co. Th anks!


NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLER<br />

Foreword by MEG WHITMAN<br />

Rebooting<br />

W RK<br />

Transform How You Work in the<br />

AGE OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP<br />

Maynard Webb<br />

A N D C A R L Y E A D L E R


Contents<br />

Foreword: The Benchmark of Success<br />

by Meg Whitman<br />

ix<br />

Preface xiii<br />

Introduction xxv<br />

Part 1 Why Work Isn’t Working<br />

1 Changing Work 3<br />

2 Technology: Powering the Future of Work 11<br />

Part 2 Reframing How We Think About Work<br />

3 The Framework 27<br />

4 Frame 1: The Company Man or Woman 41<br />

5 Frame 2: CEO of Your Own Destiny 61<br />

6 Frame 3: The Disenchanted Employee 79<br />

7 Frame 4: The Aspiring Entrepreneur 105<br />

8 The Age of Entrepreneurship 123<br />

Conclusion: Break New Snow 133<br />

vii


viii Contents<br />

Part 3 Getting Started<br />

Appendix A The Worksheet 141<br />

Appendix B Worksheet Examples 147<br />

Appendix C Services You Should Know About 157<br />

Notes 161<br />

Acknowledgments 171<br />

About the Author 175<br />

Index 177


Introduction<br />

In my last corporate job, as the CEO of cloud-based call center<br />

LiveOps, I was hired to scale a start-up company to become a<br />

mature, fast-growing, operationally excellent technology company,<br />

but something else unexpected happened. I began to see<br />

how big of a problem work has become for most of us, and how<br />

much we could change to make it better. I learned about how many<br />

people were unhappy and unfulfilled and eager for an alternative<br />

way that would give them more control over their lives.<br />

This dissatisfaction was widespread—and alarming. One<br />

survey found that less than half of Americans (just 47 percent) are<br />

satisfied with their work. 1 (When the Conference Board’s first<br />

survey was conducted in 1987, most workers—61 percent—said<br />

they were happy in their job.)<br />

As an employer, I know that this decline in job satisfaction is<br />

unacceptable and dangerous. Another survey by consulting firm<br />

Mercer found that the most discontented are young employees,<br />

with 44 percent of those ages sixteen to twenty-four and 40<br />

percent of the twenty-five- to thirty-four-year-olds saying they<br />

‘‘seriously are considering leaving’’ their jobs. 2<br />

xxv


xxvi Introduction<br />

That too is a big problem. Working adults spend more of<br />

their waking hours at work than anywhere else. Work should be a<br />

place of inspiration and innovation; it should not—it cannot—be<br />

unfulfilling. But for all too many, it is. It’s disconcerting the<br />

degree to which work adversely affects our lives and how much<br />

we come to regret it later. Bronnie Ware, an Australian palliative<br />

care nurse, who tended to patients in the last twelve weeks of<br />

their lives, shared their thoughts in a blog called Inspiration and<br />

Chai, which she turned into a book called The Top Five Regrets of<br />

the Dying. She found common themes in what people regretted<br />

and what we could learn from them. The top two lessons: ‘‘I<br />

wish I’d had the courage to live a life true to myself, not the life<br />

others expected of me,’’ and ‘‘I wish I hadn’t worked so hard.’’ 3<br />

When people realize that their life is almost over and look back<br />

clearly on it, they see how many dreams have gone unfulfilled.<br />

Most people had not honored even a half of their dreams due to<br />

choices they had made or not made.<br />

That’s upsetting, but what gets me most agitated is that it does<br />

not have to be this way. The things that people don’t like about<br />

work—toiling away so many hours in office buildings, spending<br />

too much time in cars commuting to work, and ceding control to<br />

a company—no longer have to be facts of work life. Technology<br />

has evolved to the point that many of our practices and methods<br />

around work could change radically. Advances in cloud services,<br />

Internet telephony, wireless technology, and mobile computing<br />

can be applied to change work and make it better pretty quickly,<br />

and pretty easily. Social technologies, which enable us to know<br />

exactly what our long-lost friends are doing in their spare time,<br />

can help us better understand what is happening in our businesses.<br />

As an investor in start-up companies and someone who meets<br />

young, gifted entrepreneurs who dream about the future every


Introduction xxvii<br />

day, I gain insight and access into other new technologies that<br />

can help us revolutionize work even further. There are so many<br />

new services and apps and ideas that make work easier and more<br />

engaging and more rewarding. There are so many ways to take<br />

out the pain points and allow the soul food to be put back in.<br />

Although technology is a path to a better and brighter future,<br />

it is only an enabler. After all, technology is a word that describes<br />

the concepts, techniques, and methods having to do with how<br />

to accomplish a task. Before we implement methods and plans<br />

and action items, though, we need to take a step back. We need<br />

to change the way we think about work. If we want to change it,<br />

we need to look back and study how we got here, then determine<br />

how we could forge ahead.<br />

I wrote this book to investigate how the current work crisis<br />

came about and to help individuals understand that it is within<br />

their power to end it and move on to careers that can provide<br />

both fulfillment and financial security. In addition to advocating<br />

for the personal joy that comes with being fulfilled, I also come<br />

at this with the perspective of an executive and manager and<br />

strongly believe that companies achieve far more with motivated<br />

and happy people.<br />

Rebooting Work explores the emerging technologies and<br />

techniques that can enable every individual to make this shift<br />

to take charge of his or her own career. It’s not just a better<br />

way—it’s essential for the new era we live in, which is defined<br />

by an entrepreneurial spirit. The old ways of working, which<br />

were previous generations’ paths to success, no longer guarantee<br />

the same results. We are seeing new trends increasingly change<br />

work. Online freelance job postings have skyrocketed over the<br />

last few years, and companies increasingly outsource work. The<br />

shift under way to an information economy is as important as


xxviii Introduction<br />

the last shift, when we transitioned from an agricultural to an<br />

industrial economy nearly one hundred years ago. 4<br />

MERITOCRACY VERSUS ENTITLEMENT<br />

AND THE AGE OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP<br />

Each year more than 1.1 million American high school students<br />

play football. The best of them, the star quarterbacks, running<br />

backs, linebackers, and linemen, dream of scoring scholarships to<br />

play college ball, but only twenty thousand—just 6 percent of<br />

seniors on the team—will play their freshman year of college.<br />

By their final year, that number dwindles to fifteen thousand<br />

athletes. Only 255 of those elite players are drafted to the NFL.<br />

The chance of making it to the pros if you play in high school? A<br />

very small number: a mere 0.08 percent. 5<br />

Andifyouthinkthatonceplayersmakeittotheprosthey<br />

can take a rest, think again. Every player in the NFL must get<br />

revoted on to the team every year. No one can buy his way on<br />

to the team. It’s a model of ruthless efficiency which ensures that<br />

every player brings his A-game every time he steps onto the field.<br />

It’s a system that makes football an incredible game to watch.<br />

I’ve always been inspired by sports, and throughout my career<br />

have taken the lessons I learned playing football and baseball<br />

growing up, as well as what I’ve witnessed through following<br />

professional sports, into the work world. Team dynamics and<br />

the importance of learning to win—and lose—gracefully were<br />

invaluable lessons to me in building my career. Further, the need<br />

to get voted on to the team every day inspired me to demand<br />

the most from myself and my teams. I have found that being<br />

transparent about an individual’s performance—a tactic learned


Introduction xxix<br />

from studying baseball stats—let him know where he stood and<br />

inspired a continuous quest for improvement.<br />

Meritocracy: a system that rewards individuals based on performance<br />

and results. It’s an idea that carries weight for employees<br />

in the workplace. There also are benefits for companies that operate<br />

on this principle by committing to being open and transparent<br />

about their performance. (For example, a website should publish<br />

real-time information about its availability and performance<br />

time, as eBay does with its system announcement board or as<br />

salesforce.com does with its Trust Site.)<br />

But what I’ve also found is that although we have some<br />

great examples of companies that are open about their performance,<br />

overall, most corporations don’t follow these tenets<br />

when it comes to how they evaluate or treat their employees.<br />

In fact, traditional company culture is quite the opposite of a<br />

performance-based meritocracy. Historically—meaning in the<br />

past fifty or so years—loyalty has been given higher priority<br />

than achievements and results. Outside of sales organizations,<br />

goals, and ways to measure goals, were not always clear. How an<br />

individual was performing and how she stacked up against others<br />

were not often transparent.<br />

Although one would expect the rules of the ball park to<br />

be different from the rules of the office park, I found that in<br />

ignoring what made sports so great—essentially its functioning<br />

as a meritocracy—we were missing out on an opportunity to<br />

make work work better. The desire for security trumped the<br />

drive to be spectacular. Everyone played it too safe. And this has<br />

stymied employees and employers.<br />

How come as a society we support a model that embraces<br />

meritocracy—in which the best athletes, those with the best


xxx Introduction<br />

skills, are known and rise to the top—but we don’t demand a<br />

similar model at work? Generally speaking, we accept this system<br />

in school, where grades are based on performance against one’s<br />

peers,notjustonshowinguptoclass.Howisitthatatworkwe<br />

fear systems that allow us to see how we are doing compared to<br />

others, that motivate us to do better work every day, and that<br />

reward us for our meaningful contributions instead of our blind<br />

commitment? How come both employees and employers are so<br />

afraid of operating in a meritocracy, which rewards them for how<br />

well they perform, not for how long they’ve been performing?<br />

At work, both employees and employers often fall into an<br />

entitlement mentality. For example, some employers do everything<br />

they can to keep the talent inside their walls hidden from<br />

everyone else, lest they be ‘‘poached.’’ They feel as though they<br />

know what is best for the employee and must make sure that the<br />

employee knows how to be successful in their company. Employees<br />

who leave are often shunned as being disloyal. For employees,<br />

there’s an expectation that they will be given a job, and as long as<br />

they are doing okay, they expect to keep it. By keeping their head<br />

down, doing an okay job, and not being a problem, they believe<br />

they will be rewarded.<br />

I have always been amazed by how managers seldom actually<br />

want to have truthful discussions about how someone is performing,<br />

even when that individual is doing great. As a manager, I<br />

have often implemented informal weekly and formal quarterly<br />

check-ins in an effort to force a dialogue and prevent a big disconnect<br />

at the end of the year for many employees, when they<br />

find out they were not doing as well as their perception led them<br />

to believe. Think of all the wasted time and productivity when<br />

we give performance feedback only on a yearly basis. The world<br />

doesn’t operate on this type of clock anymore. When everything


Introduction xxxi<br />

is happening in real time, even my formal quarterly meetings<br />

seem grossly inadequate. As a board member of a well-known<br />

technology company, I witnessed a once well-respected CEO<br />

lose the trust of his board and employees in less than ten days. In<br />

the current business environment, the idea of an annual review is<br />

so antiquated, it’s comical. We live in a world in which countries<br />

have been toppled in months, or even days, but certainly not<br />

years. It’s a world in which much is decided instantaneously, and<br />

the workplace must adapt.<br />

Yet we are very far from this kind of culture. How can work<br />

be so out of touch with the way the rest of the world is headed?<br />

I’m a strong proponent of meritocracy, of the value<br />

of hard work over entitlement, of talent over tenure, and of<br />

transparency over closed systems, probably because of where<br />

I came from—and because of where I am today. I believe that<br />

many executives hold these beliefs, I have gained significant<br />

freedom by embracing a mind-set of meritocracy. I’ve seen<br />

what it can inspire, unlock, and unleash, and I’ve also seen how<br />

the opposite—an organization that supports entitlement over<br />

results—limits growth and opportunity.<br />

Unlike the old days when you got news and information from<br />

only one or two sources and a couple of times a day, today you<br />

get information in real time and from multiple sources. There is<br />

no place to hide. You can hope to keep problems in-house, but<br />

you’re unlikely to succeed. Problems do not get better with age;<br />

they get far worse. They spin out of control faster today than<br />

ever before. The only way to deal with this is to be open and<br />

transparent. If you have a problem, admit it, apologize, and fix<br />

it. No one expects perfection, but they do expect honesty. Now,<br />

meritocracy over entitlement is the only way. We are in a new<br />

age—one that is more transparent thanks to the Internet and one


xxxii Introduction<br />

that is being defined by a new generation of workers who grew<br />

up with more technology and a more entrepreneurial mind-set.<br />

My background is really in operations. I see systems not working,<br />

I am called in when they are failing, and I must determine<br />

how to fix them. Whether it’s an e-commerce start-up with an<br />

unreliable website, a public company trying to implement a new<br />

systems architecture, or a legacy company trying to carve a path<br />

for the future with new leadership, I find that by asking the right<br />

questions, you can get to the root of the problem and come up<br />

with a solution. With work it’s no different, and I have created<br />

a model, a framework, to impart everything you need to know<br />

about how to operate in a new world of work. This model, which<br />

we’ll explore in detail in Part Two, is designed to help individuals<br />

become accountable for their own success. With that accountability<br />

comes a new and refreshing freedom—it puts you back in<br />

charge of your life, shifting control from your boss to yourself.<br />

Essentially, it allows you to become the CEO of your own destiny<br />

and to be the one in charge of your career—and your life.<br />

The framework in this book is the culmination of years of<br />

experience in managing and mentoring, and, I hope, will serve<br />

as a template for you as you begin to rework how you think<br />

about work. It identifies four different philosophies around work:<br />

Company Man or Woman, CEO of Your Own Destiny, Disenchanted<br />

Employee, and the Aspiring Entrepreneur. It distinguishes<br />

between those who are self-motivated and those who are<br />

waiting to be discovered, those who are happy and those who are<br />

unfulfilled. It aims to give you the tools to become more self-aware<br />

and happier and to find more meaning in your career. Ultimately,<br />

it is my hope that it inspires you to aggressively chase your dreams.


Introduction xxxiii<br />

Part Three allows you to take the ideas of this book and make<br />

them your own. There is a worksheet to get you started (1) assessing<br />

where you are in your career and (2) understanding the actions<br />

you need to take to make a change. I’ve also included my personal<br />

worksheets, which I have filled out for different stages of my life<br />

and career, to show how goals and objectives can change over<br />

time. These completed worksheets are included in Appendix C.


CONTENTS<br />

Introduction v<br />

Chapter 1 First, Some Context 1<br />

Chapter 2 Intellectual Property, Confidentiality,<br />

and Brands 21<br />

Chapter 3 Ask the Right Question 41<br />

Chapter 4 Fair Incentives to Motivate 59<br />

Chapter 5 Build the Coalition 81<br />

Chapter 6 Recruit the Best Participants 103<br />

Chapter 7 Manage Communities to<br />

Facilitate Great Outcomes 121<br />

Chapter 8 Understand Participant Contributions 145<br />

Chapter 9 Reign in the Tyranny of Ideas 161<br />

Chapter 10 Choose the Right Online Space 181<br />

Chapter 11 Meta 199<br />

Acknowledgments 209<br />

Notes 211<br />

Index 221<br />

iii


INTRODUCTION<br />

Properly organized and run, a group<br />

can be a gold-mine of ideas.<br />

—Alex Osborn<br />

Alex Osborn loved ideas. His ideas helped to propel his advertising<br />

agency, BBDO, to become one of the most innovative<br />

advertising firms in the United States. In 1948, he revealed the secret<br />

to a process for coming up with new ideas and innovations in his<br />

book, Your Creative Power: How to Use Your Imagination. 1<br />

One of the chapters, “How to Organize a Squad to Create Ideas,”<br />

introduced a process for soliciting many ideas from groups of people.<br />

Osborn called the process brainstorming. He described how BBDO<br />

used the process to generate more and better ideas. These ideas were at<br />

the heart of the advertising agencies’ success. Many decades later,<br />

brainstorming is as popular as ever. Need new marketing ideas?<br />

Engineering problem not solved? Wondering how to win that new<br />

deal? No matter the industry or domain, you have likely participated in<br />

brainstorming sessions.<br />

Since its introduction, the brainstorming process has been the<br />

subject of various studies and critiques, and the process has evolved.<br />

For example, Osborn believed that people should delay feedback—<br />

people were encouraged to accept all ideas. However, research suggests<br />

that debating ideas can yield better quality ideas. Similarly, while<br />

Osborn focused on everyone generating ideas together, research suggests<br />

that we are better off producing ideas independently, before<br />

getting together. 2<br />

While Osborn made brainstorming famous, he also introduced<br />

another idea that was much less practical at the time. Following his<br />

v


vi INTRODUCTION<br />

discussion of brainstorming, he talked about idea-thinking on a larger<br />

scale. He described processes that were enabling organizations to<br />

accept ideas from all of their employees. Building on the highly<br />

acclaimed suggestion systems developed at US production plants during<br />

World War II, Osborn showed how his firm was taking brainstorming<br />

to the next level. He showed how hundreds of his employees<br />

were using suggestion systems to get the best ideas from anywhere in<br />

his firm.<br />

Half a century after Osborn introduced us to brainstorming, the<br />

Internet transformed our ability to gather ideas on a large scale. First,<br />

e-mail replaced the paper and wooden suggestions boxes. And now,<br />

applications are speeding the collection and evaluation of ideas on a<br />

scale that lets us take Osborn’s ideas to a new level. Organizations in<br />

countless industries have successfully turned to very large groups for<br />

their ideas. These online crowds might work within large organizations,<br />

but more often participants are not employees. To date, these crowds<br />

have worked together to design new products, improve services, create<br />

new marketing campaigns, and bring to market low-carbon-footprint<br />

housing—to name just a few of the many areas. This is brainstorming<br />

on a much larger scale.<br />

We call this crowdstorming.<br />

Like brainstorming before it, crowdstorming requires that we<br />

understand how best to organize the process for gathering and evaluating<br />

ideas. There are many parts of the process under investigation.<br />

This book is intended to explore and highlight the best ways we know<br />

to make crowdstorms work. Our approach builds on our combined<br />

experience with more than 200 projects and working with over 100,000<br />

individual participants from around the globe in domains spanning<br />

marketing, strategy, design, engineering, and architecture. We have<br />

also studied hundreds of projects from other domains and talked with<br />

some of their organizers. And we have consulted a rapidly growing<br />

body of research across a wide array of disciplines—from social science<br />

to human computer interaction—that cover the many different<br />

dimensions of crowdstorm processes.<br />

We have seen the many ways that organizations can innovate by<br />

working with external talent:


● Fortune 500 companies that are reinventing their product lines<br />

or bringing new offerings to market can benefit from the steps<br />

we outline.<br />

● Small and mid-size companies can use crowdstorming processes<br />

to greatly increase their access to global talent in a number of<br />

domains.<br />

● Nonprofits and governmental agencies can leverage the processes<br />

and tools we discuss to tackle broad social change initiatives<br />

and create awareness around these issues.<br />

● Professional organizations, such as consultancies and advertising<br />

agencies, can benefit from many of the ideas to enhance their<br />

current capabilities—and connect their global talent pools in<br />

more effective ways.<br />

● Universities looking to create new virtual studio environments<br />

can also apply the material in the book—recapturing the<br />

studio environment in an online world where individuals<br />

regularly share and review work.<br />

To highlight the potential value of the processes, we have included<br />

examples spanning industries and business functions, from startups creating<br />

consumer products to a Fortune 500 company’s global energy business.<br />

HOW TO READ THIS BOOK<br />

INTRODUCTION vii<br />

For the reader who is beginning to explore the potential of working<br />

with talent outside his or her organization, we recommend reading<br />

Chapter 1: First, Some Context. We offer an overview of what organizations<br />

are doing with outside talent—from crowdsourcing to<br />

collaborative consumption. We focus on the benefits of outside talent,<br />

crowds, and communities and we explain where crowdstorming fits in a<br />

quickly expanding universe of crowd-enabled business processes.<br />

For those who have worked with crowdsourcing, open innovation,<br />

cocreation, or mass collaboration, the benefits are likely already<br />

familiar. For you, we’ve broken the crowdstorming lifecycle down to<br />

highlight the best approaches to planning, organizing, and executing<br />

crowdstorming projects.


viii INTRODUCTION<br />

Reign in the<br />

Tyranny of Ideas<br />

Understanding<br />

Participant<br />

Contributions<br />

Manage<br />

Communities to<br />

Facilitate Great<br />

Outcomes<br />

meta<br />

Figure I.1 The Crowdstorming Lifecycle<br />

execute<br />

Figure I.1 shows how a crowdstorm project might be organized<br />

from planning and organizing through execution and review (or meta).<br />

There is one notable exception. We have moved the discussion about<br />

online spaces (which covers the role of technologies and platforms) to<br />

the end. We think it’s important to understand everything that makes<br />

crowdstorming work, before considering the right enabling technologies.<br />

Broadly, the chapters try to answer the following questions:<br />

● How to weigh the business benefit of crowdstorming with an<br />

organization’s legal, confidentiality, and brand needs<br />

● What kinds of questions to ask crowdstorm participants<br />

● How to compel a community to participate and reward them<br />

when they do<br />

● How to recruit the best people to join your crowdstorm<br />

● How a coalition of partners can enhance crowdstorming<br />

● How to organize participants for the best results<br />

organize<br />

● How to monitor a community in support of community<br />

management<br />

plan<br />

Intellectual<br />

Property, Confidentiality,<br />

and Brands<br />

Ask the Right<br />

Questions<br />

Recruit the<br />

Participants<br />

Choose the Right Online Space<br />

Fair Incentives to<br />

Motivate the Crowd<br />

Build the<br />

Coalition


● How to evaluate results<br />

● The technology alternatives to enable crowdstorming<br />

● Moving beyond what we have shared in this book<br />

We love the possibilities of crowdstorming, but we are much<br />

more excited about ensuring that you can get results from the process.<br />

So each chapter includes references to academic research and interviews,<br />

as well as our own observations. And the concepts are made<br />

tangible with stories in each chapter.<br />

LET’S BEGIN<br />

INTRODUCTION ix<br />

We cannot promise that we have cracked the code on all the ways<br />

organizations will use crowdstorming. What we can help you recognize—<br />

and utilize—are clear, actionable steps to begin realizing innovative<br />

outcomes by leveraging external talent. Exploring the art of the possible<br />

with a structure to harness this power can help you with idea creation,<br />

innovation, and problem solving.<br />

We love ideas. But we love putting ideas into action even more.<br />

So let’s get started.


CHAPTER 1<br />

First, Some Context<br />

No matter who you are, most of the smartest people work<br />

for somebody else.<br />

—Bill Joy<br />

1


In 2000, Goldcorp CEO Rob McEwen was frustrated with the<br />

relatively poor performance of Goldcorp’s Red Lake Mine in<br />

Ontario, Canada. Goldcorp’s geologists had experienced limited success<br />

in pinpointing the gold’s underground location. McEwen knew he<br />

was literally sitting on a gold mine but unable to realize its potential.<br />

Then McEwen found himself at an executive education session at<br />

MIT. In a session where open source software was being discussed, it<br />

dawned on him what needed to be done. Open source software<br />

benefitted from the ongoing analysis, review, testing, and contributions<br />

of a large diverse group of people working for multiple different<br />

organizations. Could he employ similar principles to help his team<br />

improve their understanding of his mine’s potential?<br />

McEwen took an unprecedented step in his industry. He<br />

assembled digital representations of Goldcorp’s proprietary geological<br />

data and made it available to people outside the company. He challenged<br />

them to prospect, using the digital representations of the mine.<br />

The challenge was launched on Goldcorp’s website. Everything related<br />

to the Red Lake Mine—400 megabytes worth of data about the<br />

55,000-acre site—went online and was transparent to the world. Participants<br />

were offered prize money of $575,000 for the best ideas.<br />

The response was astonishing—especially for an industry that had<br />

always believed the key to success lay in making its proprietary<br />

knowledge accessible only to its own employees. Over 1,400 scientists,<br />

mathematicians, geologists, engineers, military officers, students, and<br />

consultants from 50 countries downloaded the company’s data for<br />

virtual exploration. In all, participants identified 110 sites that might<br />

yield gold. Fifty percent of these sites were previously unknown to the<br />

company. Of these new targets, more than 80 percent yielded significant<br />

gold reserves. The group with the winning entry was from Australia<br />

2


FIRST, SOME CONTEXT 3<br />

and had never even visited Canada. McEwen estimates that the collaborative<br />

process shaved two to three years off their exploration time.<br />

The value of the gold found: $6 billion. 1<br />

Another remarkable story of a company looking to external talent<br />

comes from the world of toys. LEGO is one of the fastest growing and<br />

most profitable companies in toy industry today, but back in 2003, the<br />

company was on the verge of bankruptcy. LEGO’s story is revealing<br />

not only for the way it tapped into external talent to get creative ideas<br />

but also for how it used creative collaboration to vet and find ideas that<br />

had the greatest potential to become profitable. 2<br />

From the mid-1990s to 2003, LEGO’s business stopped growing.<br />

After decades of doubling its revenue every five years, changes in the<br />

market slowed LEGO’s growth to a standstill. The impact of video and<br />

other technologies were shifting its core customer base’sbuyingpatterns.<br />

Distribution channel changes—from mom-and-pop toy stores to retail<br />

giants like Carrefour, Walmart, and Target—impacted how LEGO<br />

interacted with its end customers. And changes in supply chains, from<br />

domestic manufacturing to offshore sources, altered the cost structure of<br />

toy production and negatively impacted the bottom line.<br />

By 2003, the company was almost broke and a new CEO was<br />

appointed, Jørgen Vig Knudstorp. Under Knudstorp, LEGO made the<br />

transition into being an innovative company that was (and still is)<br />

highly profitable. That transition had many facets, but one that has<br />

significance for this discussion concerns the impact one single new<br />

product experience had on the way LEGO now manages innovation.<br />

The product was called LEGO Mindstorms. Mindstorms is a<br />

configurable robotics product that LEGO successfully launched in<br />

1998. However, during the trying times at LEGO, much of the original<br />

team had moved on. But LEGO knew there was an enthusiastic group of<br />

people who were very familiar with Mindstorms—Mindstorms customers.<br />

So they reached out to this group—first on an individual basis and<br />

then through a consumer products show. They had hoped to get support<br />

from 100 of these fans; they were inundated with responses from<br />

10,000. The new development team was flooded with new ideas for<br />

the product.


4 CROWDSTORM<br />

What LEGO discovered was an external pool of design talent<br />

that was smart, enthusiastic, and motivated by their love of the<br />

Mindstorms product. LEGO quickly recognized that this group could<br />

not only provide them with product ideas but, more importantly, they<br />

could help evaluate which ideas were best, and thus help ensure that the<br />

new product would be profitable.<br />

By the time Mindstorms was launched in 2006, the company had<br />

handed over incrementally more control for idea creation, refinement,<br />

and selection to the external community of Mindstorms enthusiasts.<br />

The launch was a huge success. LEGO even turned over part of the<br />

marketing—interviews with the press—to the community. This<br />

external community turned out to be not only more knowledgeable<br />

about the product, but more believable in extolling the virtues of<br />

LEGO’s newest offering.<br />

Almost a decade after they began, LEGO has not slowed in its<br />

pursuit of new and better ways to work with outside talent. In 2011,<br />

LEGO launched a process called Cuusoo (which means wish in Japanese)<br />

to find and evaluate new ideas for LEGO products. Anyone can<br />

submit ideas to the Cuusoo site. Idea owners are encouraged to promote<br />

their ideas. If 10,000 people vote for an idea, LEGO will review<br />

the idea. If the idea meets certain guidelines related to considerations<br />

like design, brand, pricing, availability of a license, LEGO will put<br />

the idea into production and share royalties with the idea owner. In the<br />

case of LEGO Minecraft, the product was already a smash hit game.<br />

Cuusoo made it easy for this already engaged and excited community<br />

to begin creating brand extensions on their own for the benefit of both<br />

LEGO and MineCraft. And, while LEGO is certainly well known for<br />

deals with brands from Disney to Starwars, this time the new partnership<br />

idea and validation came from a different place—the smart,<br />

insightful, and engaged people outside LEGO.<br />

ABUNDANT TALENT OUTSIDE<br />

Goldcorp and LEGO could not be more different businesses. But both<br />

tapped into abundant external talent to help them succeed in the face of<br />

some of their greatest challenges. They discovered people who had the<br />

background, interest, or enthusiasm to engage with their organization


FIRST, SOME CONTEXT 5<br />

and innovate. They found ways to organize interactions with people<br />

outside their internal structure, in part out of a confluence of necessity<br />

and design—but, more tellingly, because they could. And, while their<br />

approach to innovation might seem to be new, it is in fact a very old idea.<br />

In his 1937 essay on the “Theory of the Firm,” 4 Nobel Prize winning<br />

economist Ronald Coase asked this question: Given that “production<br />

could be carried on without any organization [that is, firms] at all,”<br />

why and under what conditions should we expect firms to emerge?<br />

Coase’s essay looks at two competing sets of costs. On the one hand,<br />

Coase finds that organizations tend to become less successful at allocating<br />

resources as they grow; more specifically, they tend to misallocate<br />

resources. On the other hand, Coase looks at the hidden costs of transacting<br />

with the market—such as searching for talent, evaluating skills or<br />

bargaining, securing trade secrets, and enforcing contracts.<br />

In 1937, Coase’s costs were determined in part by the business<br />

processes of the time, and also by the communication options. Today,<br />

online platforms and social networks are reducing some of the transaction<br />

costs and the increasingly competitive global market is escalating the costs<br />

of misallocated resources inside the firm. In other words, it’s a perfect<br />

time to revisit the balance between when to use internal resources versus<br />

when to go out to the market. We also see that, with these lower costs,<br />

there is a third type of relationship—people who are not employees and<br />

who are not accessed via the market. Like LEGO’s communityof<br />

Mindstorms fans, their relationships to the organization are different as<br />

are their motivations.<br />

In his 2008 book Here Comes Everybody, 5 author Clay Shirky hints at<br />

the shifting role of the organization in his subtitle: The Power of Organizing<br />

Without Organizations. He examines how new forms of social<br />

interaction enabled by technology are changing the way people are<br />

forming groups and working—from political movements that topple<br />

dictators, to consumer cooperation that causes corporations to change<br />

behavior. And, in Imagine: How Creativity Works, 6 Jonah Lehrer suggests<br />

that most innovation and creative ideas do not occur when we are alone,<br />

but instead emerge from social interactions that “inspire novel thoughts.”<br />

Lehrer explains, “It doesn’t matter if this sharing takes place on Hudson<br />

Streetoratabarfullofengineers...theexchangeisallthatmatters.”


6 CROWDSTORM<br />

While Coase is focused on the pure economics of the organization<br />

versus the market, author and law professor Yochai Benkler introduces<br />

additional forms of cooperation. In The Penguin and the Leviathan, 7<br />

Benkler tracks the broad expansion of cooperative systems while making<br />

a case for the reduced impact of pure self-interest—and the rise of more<br />

cooperative alternatives. He points to the “disruptions wrought by the<br />

internet” that are “accelerating the rate of globalization and scientific<br />

growth, all of which are forcing an increased number of businesses to<br />

examine how they can emphasize learning and innovation rather than<br />

mere efficiency.” Benkler makes the case for balancing social and selfish<br />

incentives. He notes how organizations are seeing the best talent drawn<br />

to work that is either inherently rewarding or widely associated in the<br />

society with respect and value. And, he concludes, “As our world continues<br />

to flatten and the boundaries of communication continue to<br />

disappear, more and more companies are adopting . . . collaborative<br />

strategies. . . . In a global economy, you never know who, somewhere<br />

in the world, will be willing and able to help you or who will come up<br />

with a new and better way to do what you are doing. . . . The most<br />

successful know that innovation happens everywhere. Not just in<br />

executive boardrooms, or R&D labs, but everywhere.”<br />

One of the first to explore the shifting balances between transaction<br />

costs and resource allocation was Henry Chesbrough. In his<br />

book Open Innovation, 8 he proposes that there are a much greater<br />

number of smart, creative, and innovative people and ideas outside an<br />

organization than within it. Chesbrough says that innovative solutions<br />

to challenges exist somewhere in the world and an organization’s<br />

“innovative” process is no longer problem solving but “solution finding.”<br />

Thus, the innovative process needs to focus on the methods<br />

needed to do the outreach to talent and then manage the process. He<br />

indicates that bringing resources together to collectively work on<br />

challenges creates a much broader network to address problems. To be<br />

successful, the innovative process needs to focus on ways to motivate<br />

and manage this truly diverse and often global resource.<br />

Organizations such as Goldcorp and LEGO—along with many<br />

others that we will discuss in this book—have been exploring how to


FIRST, SOME CONTEXT 7<br />

leverage external talent to address all kinds of creative and innovative<br />

challenges: from new product design to making sense of massive<br />

data sets, from architectural challenges to reframing social issues. As<br />

the projects above highlight, companies adopt crowdstorming for<br />

varying reasons. These organizations are finding new ways to live<br />

with Joy’s Law, that most of the best people work for somebody else.<br />

But this no longer needs to mean that you cannot work with them in<br />

new ways.<br />

In The Power of the Pull, 9 John Hagel III and John Sealy Brown<br />

lay the groundwork for organizations to access external talent by<br />

pointing out what is happening in today’s business environment.<br />

Organizations that were used to planning their operations with<br />

long-term horizons and focusing on operational efficiency must now<br />

respond rapidly to a business environment characterized by fluidity.<br />

They must become learning organizations and figure out how to<br />

achieve extreme performance by learning to scale their organization’s<br />

talent base quickly. Hagel and Brown state that the twentyfirst-century<br />

organization will still use tools within the firm but will<br />

need to access a much broader ecosystem. Their takeaway: learning<br />

and innovation will come from collaboration with talent outside the<br />

organization.<br />

Leading business consulting organizations like McKinsey are<br />

helping clients evaluate when and how to use collaborative planning<br />

to set strategic direction for their companies. In a 2012 McKinsey<br />

Quarterly article entitled “The Social Side of Strategy,” 10 Anna Gast<br />

and Michael Zanini argue that, while it’s certainly not a replacement<br />

for the strategic planning edifice, engaging larger groups in strategy<br />

discussions is valuable for generating ideas, prioritizing them, and<br />

challenging operational plans. McKinsey continues to explain that<br />

this represents a shift in how an organization should think about its<br />

leadership roles and structure: the “C” suite moves from their traditional<br />

roles of all-knowing decision makers to “‘social architects’<br />

who spend a lot of time thinking about how to create the processes<br />

and incentives that unearth the best thinking and unleash the full<br />

potential of all who work at a company.”


8 CROWDSTORM<br />

Finally, in business academic circles, reviews like the MIT Sloan<br />

Management Review have been providing research and analysis for years<br />

on how to engage in what they call collective intelligence. In a seminal<br />

article from 2010 entitled “The Collective Intelligence Genome,” 11 a<br />

team led by Thomas Malone starts with the premise that collective<br />

intelligence has already proved that it works. It suggests that there are<br />

four building blocks, or genes—what is being done, who is doing it,<br />

why are they doing it, and how it is being done—that help organizations<br />

create their own systems for setting up and managing open<br />

innovation projects effectively.<br />

WORKING WITH CROWDS<br />

Crowdsourcing is the term most often used to describe how organizations<br />

work with large groups to achieve any number of ends. When Jeff Howe<br />

first presented examples of the concept in his 2006 Wired article, 12<br />

he covered a broad range of activities. Tasks differed by the level of<br />

expertise required, as well as by the amount of time required to participate.<br />

Figure 1.1 offers a perspective of what is being sought from crowds.<br />

Jeff Howe’s original examples were mainly focused on labor. This<br />

was an extension of an older concept of outsourcing. But rather than have<br />

one organization outsource from another, organizations can work<br />

directly with the crowds—as Shirky observed, people are organizing (and<br />

being organized) without organizations. Now crowdsourcing has taken<br />

on a much bigger definition, covering much more than labor resources.<br />

Assets: When we use Skype, we effectively borrow bandwidth and<br />

computing resources from our peers. It is invisible to us. In<br />

What’s Mine is Yours: The Rise of Collaborative Consumption, 13<br />

Botsman and Rogers highlight a range of more explicit resource<br />

sharing arrangements. Car2Go or ZipCar enables sharing of cars<br />

and ride sharing services like Zimride or Lyft fall into this category.<br />

Another example is Airbnb, which provides an alternative<br />

to hotels—only the rooms are made available by individuals.<br />

Capital: One of the first very large-scale examples of soliciting<br />

funds from the crowd (that was not a tax system) came in 2008<br />

during the presidential election in the United States, when


9<br />

traditionally enabled<br />

via relationships with firms<br />

employees<br />

partner firms (suppliers, distributors)<br />

professional service firms<br />

broadcast media<br />

in person social + professional networks<br />

expert reviews + recommendations<br />

data samples<br />

research firms<br />

purpose built data collection<br />

financial institutions<br />

loans or equity via financial institutions<br />

donations via high net worth individuals<br />

credit via credit card companies<br />

individual ownership<br />

finance asset via financial institution<br />

lease via rental or leasing firm<br />

labor<br />

communication<br />

data<br />

capital<br />

assets<br />

Figure 1.1 The Ways Crowds Deliver Value<br />

$€¥<br />

crowd-enabled<br />

via relationships with people<br />

“cocreation, microtasks, open innovation”<br />

freelance and micro-work marketplaces<br />

expert communities<br />

customer communities<br />

“social media”<br />

content distributed via social networks<br />

peer reviews + recommendations<br />

“big data”<br />

continuous data collection<br />

data as a by-product<br />

“crowdfunding”<br />

micro loans or equity via large crowds<br />

micro donations via large crowds<br />

pre-purchase via prospective customers<br />

“collaborative consumption”<br />

asset sharing<br />

peer-to-peer lending


10 CROWDSTORM<br />

then-candidate Barack Obama made use of a whole array of<br />

crowd funding sources. This approach tends to focus on different<br />

models for sourcing and allocating capital, usually in<br />

return for products, services, or equity. Examples of this<br />

approach include IndieGoGo, Kickstarter, and LendingClub.<br />

Networks: A good deal of social media is concerned with how<br />

organizations can get people to influence their social networks,<br />

very often via content that is likely to be shared for a<br />

variety of reasons, including humor or utility. Having the<br />

crowd distribute content in this way is not just cheaper than<br />

paying for distribution (often called paid media), but it often<br />

has the benefit of being more believable because it comes via<br />

people we know.<br />

Data: As we have shifted more of our business and social<br />

interaction online, we are creating “Big Data”—that is, massive<br />

amounts of data that organizations are trying to understand<br />

to use for many purposes. For example, the data is<br />

used to determine what ads we see online and what we might<br />

prefer to purchase or rent. The data can be used to monitor<br />

our driving, qualify us for better insurance, or compute traffic<br />

flow and propose better routing. The main challenge is<br />

understanding all of this data. Of course you can connect with<br />

a crowd to help with this now. Kaggle will let you connect<br />

with data scientists who are expert in the processes of teasing<br />

insights and models from these large data sets.<br />

Each of these are fascinating, fast-moving shifts in how we (and<br />

our organizations) access resources. But our primary concern is the<br />

Labor category. Within this category are a number of models for<br />

connecting organizations and crowds. There are labor marketplaces<br />

(e.g. oDesk, Task Rabbit, eLance, Workmarket, Mechanical Turk) to<br />

connect organizations with independent professionals in areas ranging<br />

from administrative tasks to software testing, from graphic design<br />

to assembling Ikea furniture. These are classic jobs made more<br />

accessible because of lower transaction costs, which is what Coase was<br />

concerned with. Then there are microtasks—small pieces of work that


FIRST, SOME CONTEXT 11<br />

may not require domain expertise, but require human judgment—like<br />

determining whether content is pornographic or what words appear in<br />

an image. Neither of these models is our main concern, though.<br />

We are interested in a particular type of work—the generation and<br />

evaluation of ideas. In the cases we will explore, ideas take many forms—<br />

from short text descriptions like the ones you might find in a suggestion<br />

box, to complex prototypes (from prediction algorithms to robot cars).<br />

Ideas can be business plans or proposals for new business strategies.<br />

They can be beautifully rendered homes barely distinguishable from real<br />

photos or flowcharts illustrating how a proposed software application<br />

might work. And, just as important, we are interested in the reactions to<br />

these ideas. We want to understand the conversations that are inspired<br />

by the ideas that can help to improve and evaluate the ideas. In the end,<br />

all the ideas require some level of investment, and we want to know<br />

which ideas we should expend time and effort to develop.<br />

STARBUCKS BETACUP CHALLENGE—NEW SOURCES<br />

OF SUSTAINABLE INNOVATION<br />

When Starbucks decided to sponsor the complex problem of reducing<br />

waste generated by coffee cups in 2010, it was already well on its way to<br />

finding solutions to the problem. 14 But they recognized that they could<br />

use additional help. Director of Environmental Impact Jim Hanna put it<br />

this way: “Given the complexity of the disposable cup waste issue, we<br />

need a broad range of stakeholders to become involved in finding<br />

solutions. In addition to working with local municipal governments,<br />

materials suppliers, and cup manufacturers to improve recycling infrastructures,<br />

we believe in harnessing the creativity of environmentally<br />

conscious individuals to identify new alternatives.” To do this, Starbucks<br />

sponsored an outside group of partners who had initiated the Betacup<br />

Project to address the global problem of disposable cups.<br />

While Starbucks sponsored the contest initiative, the Betacup<br />

team managed the challenge. It was led by Toby Daniels, social<br />

crowdsourcing agency Mutopo, and run as an online contest on jovoto,<br />

a platform designed to cultivate creators and innovators to work


12 CROWDSTORM<br />

together collaboratively on challenges and which had its own creative<br />

community. Notably, Starbucks, along with the Betacup team, reached<br />

out to include additional partners including Core77, Denuo, Good<br />

Day Monsters, Instructables, and Threadless—all of whom brought<br />

their own community of professional designers, design students, and<br />

enthusiasts, as well as media outreach and ongoing exposure for the<br />

contest.<br />

The contest provided a brief that outlined the problem, as well as<br />

a cash incentive of $20,000 for the winners, which would be divided<br />

among those whom the creative community—as well as an expert<br />

panel—judged to have the best solution. The challenge was open to all<br />

and encouraged public discussion and feedback that allowed for<br />

ongoing refinement and updates on submissions. Evaluation and<br />

curatorial input by the creative community encouraged networking and<br />

teaming. The low barrier of entry—along with the collaborationenabling<br />

infrastructure—allowed the Betacup organizers to tap into a<br />

new audience of creators: a community that not only provided new<br />

ideas, but could also validate ideas that were submitted, as well as<br />

validating Starbucks’ three-pronged approach to addressing the paper<br />

cup waste issue.<br />

We can measure the results of the Betacup challenge in two ways that<br />

shed light on important aspects of crowdstorming. First, Starbucks<br />

received a lot of good ideas. The Betacup contest ran for two<br />

months, received 430 idea submissions, and 1,500 idea revisions from all<br />

over the world. The contest logged over 5,000 comments and 13,000<br />

ratings. The winning idea was not even a product. It was a low-tech<br />

solution called the Karma Cup whoseeleganceisinitssimplicity.Every<br />

Starbucks store captures reusable cup usage and posts it on a chalkboard;<br />

when the tenth beverage is sold to a person using a reusable cup, that<br />

beverage is free. The solution resulted not only in a cool new initiative, but<br />

in a behavioral change among customers as well. It was designed to change<br />

the global conversation that had begun the platform into a local conversation<br />

in each Starbucks and bring customer awareness to the local level,<br />

stimulating conversation as customers discussed reusable cup activity in<br />

their local store. The idea was eventually prototyped and in-store trials<br />

showed that it worked as proposed—it was possible to inspire more reuse.


The second element of the project’s success was that, by working<br />

with partners, Starbucks expanded outreach beyond its own fan base.<br />

This opened up the possibility of generating ideas from around the<br />

world and dramatically increased awareness of the problem—and in so<br />

doing cast Starbucks as an environmentally conscious company. The<br />

creative collaboration contest not only produced a huge number of<br />

innovative ideas for Starbucks and provided it with insight about its<br />

product strategy, it raised awareness of an important issue that Starbucks<br />

was addressing and thus earned Starbucks valuable media.<br />

TRIPLE EIGHT HELMET DESIGN—BENEFITS FOR<br />

SMALLER FIRMS, TOO<br />

FIRST, SOME CONTEXT 13<br />

We have talked about large organizations using external talent to tackle<br />

creative challenges. But crowdstorming is not only for large companies.<br />

Imagine you are standing on a street corner in LA, San Francisco,<br />

São Paulo, or Cape Town waiting for the light to change. A skateboarder<br />

rolls by on a long board and you are instantly taken by the<br />

design on his helmet: an image of a robot clutching a balloon as it floats<br />

over the city. While the helmet’s unique design may not be an unusual<br />

sight on city streets these days, the story behind the helmet artwork is<br />

the result of a creative collaboration challenge run by the helmet maker<br />

Triple Eight.<br />

Triple Eight is a small, privately held company that has been<br />

making professional and amateur protective gear for a wide variety of<br />

action sports since 1995—from skateboarding and bicycle riding to<br />

snowboarding and skiing. Throughout its history, Triple Eight has<br />

worked closely both with its customers and with athletes in designing<br />

its products. As Triple Eight president Bobby Oppenheim says,<br />

“Community has always been a key ingredient in Triple Eight’s success.<br />

We’re inspired by the industry we work in; in the action sports<br />

community, competitors use collaboration to continually improve and<br />

develop new ideas. This spirit is pervasive at Triple Eight: We work<br />

with our team, distributors, and customers throughout our product<br />

development process.” 15


14 CROWDSTORM<br />

In 2010, what was unique for Triple Eight was handing over the<br />

artwork design for its Brainsaver skate helmet to creative talent with<br />

which it had no relationship. When Bobby first discussed the project he<br />

asked: “Why would I work with people I don’t know?” It’s an understandable<br />

reaction and we expect some of you might be contemplating<br />

the same question. But the answer makes a compelling case for the<br />

power of crowdstorming—bringing together a diverse, unknown<br />

community of design talent to join Triple Eight’s known skateboard<br />

community resulted in the delivery of unexpected, creative ideas vetted<br />

by the combined community.<br />

The first step in the process was inviting creative design communities<br />

as well as skaters. Triple Eight’s goal was to look to a variety<br />

of different groups to gather feedback about the designs—to explore<br />

the art of the possible. In a coordinated effort, Triple Eight, Mutopo,<br />

and jovoto spread the news of the contest to different parts of the<br />

skateboarding community and to existing design communities (such as<br />

jovoto itself, which consisted of over 15,000 product and package<br />

designers, branding professionals, and graphic artists). Secondly, Triple<br />

Eight decided on a revenue-sharing compensation option to<br />

motivate participation. For work such as this, designers are typically<br />

compensated by the hour or perhaps by the project. Triple Eight was<br />

running this particular challenge as a contest, and was asking people to<br />

propose designs in return for the possibility of winning a prize and<br />

receiving a contract. The contract then would be tied to a shared risk/<br />

reward structure—in this case, sales numbers.<br />

Finally, Triple Eight elected to run the challenge in an open<br />

contest format. Submitted ideas would be publicly available; open to<br />

comments and evaluation. Like Starbucks, the approach was designed<br />

to get a lot of great ideas and also to enable Triple Eight to gather<br />

insights from comments, understand the community’s choice by<br />

tracking voting, and encourage a broader conversation with its<br />

customers.<br />

The results were impressive: 170 submissions, over 900 comments,<br />

and 3,300 ratings. The top three submissions selected by the community<br />

were then presented to 20 members of Triple Eight’s professionalteam<br />

as well as retail partners and Balloon Robot design was selected.


OUTCOMES BEYOND IDEAS<br />

Starbucks, LEGO, Goldcorp, and Triple Eight were working on<br />

diverse issues—but they all had one thing in common: all tapped into<br />

abundant talent outside their organizations to help them achieve the<br />

desired outcomes to their challenges.<br />

Despite the similarities of their processes, the desired outcomes<br />

and measures of success varied for each of these challenges. While<br />

the focus of crowdstorming is generation and evaluation of ideas, the<br />

process can generate other valuable by-products too. Most notably,<br />

the discovery of the people behind the ideas or the feedback about the<br />

ideas, can be as valuable as the resulting ideas. And the conversations<br />

resulting from the process can have important communication value in<br />

an increasingly social business landscape. Table 1.1 outlines the range<br />

of outcomes.<br />

Table 1.1 Five Crowdstorming Outcomes<br />

Outcomes Descriptions<br />

Getting Ideas Obtaining a large number of ideas beyond the scope<br />

of what is possible with internal team or<br />

traditional partners.<br />

Evaluating Ideas Efficiently receiving feedback and interpretations<br />

from a wide range of stakeholders to determine<br />

where to make future investments.<br />

Finding Talent Through the proposals, identifying new individuals,<br />

teams, and organizations to work with.<br />

Causing Conversation Generating content and often provocative ideas that<br />

in turn lead to conversations and media coverage.<br />

Transforming<br />

Relationships<br />

FIRST, SOME CONTEXT 15<br />

Enabling stakeholders to participate in generating<br />

and selecting ideas can positively change the<br />

relationship between the organization and<br />

stakeholders.


16 CROWDSTORM<br />

We have focused so far on organizations working to improve<br />

existing products and services. But our last example shows how an<br />

organization uses a crowdstorm process to identify new partners and<br />

investment opportunities, finding not just new ideas, but also the teams<br />

capable of making the ideas real.<br />

GE ECOMAGINATION CHALLENGE—A NEW PATH TO<br />

CORPORATE DEVELOPMENT<br />

In 2010, corporate giant General Electric launched a $200 million global<br />

challenge called “The Ecomagination Challenge: Power the Grid.” 16<br />

GE’s starting point: “Since good ideas can come from almost anywhere,<br />

GE has opened its digital doors to inventors all around the world.”<br />

In 2005, GE CEO Jeffrey Immelt launched Ecomagination to<br />

develop new power grid technologies—a market that the company<br />

estimated could be worth hundreds of billions of dollars in the coming<br />

years. GE committed to investing $10 billion in Ecomagination between<br />

2010 and 2015, but realized that it would have to look beyond the<br />

corporation’s four walls for ideas—and determine how to collaborate<br />

with small companies to accelerate innovation and production in order<br />

to meet its ambitious goals. It made three important decisions: to<br />

partner with venture capital firms Emerald Technology Ventures,<br />

Kleiner Perkins Caufield & Byers, and Rockport Capital; to commit<br />

(along with its partners) $200 million to entrepreneurs to develop new<br />

ideas and bring them to market, in addition to offering $100,000 in prize<br />

money to the top winners; and to choose a technology partner,<br />

Brightideas, to run an open contest on its platform. GE coordinated<br />

outreach and media support with its partners and ran a 10-week challenge<br />

that generated over 3,800 ideas, 80,000 comments, and 120,000<br />

votes. The community voted for its winners and the ideas were routed to<br />

subject matter experts at both GE and the venture capital firms for<br />

evaluation and further development. The evaluation committee considered<br />

ideas for the following: (1) an equity investment by GE or<br />

others; (2) a cooperative agreement to develop a product or technology;<br />

and (3) a review of the product or service for possible qualification to be<br />

a part of the GE Ecomagination program.


The results of this open crowdstorming project were again<br />

impressive: GE partners committed over $134 million for cleantech<br />

startups that showed promise. A company press release called the<br />

Ecomagination Challenge an “efficient magnet, attracting so many<br />

good ideas that GE has been able to enter into commercial partnerships<br />

with 22 startups representing a broad spectrum of technologies,<br />

including wireless power transmission, thermoelectric materials that<br />

transform heat into electricity, grid-scale energy storage, self-tinting<br />

energy saving windows, software energy management systems and<br />

much more. . . . GE has even acquired one company. . . . As an<br />

innovative approach to finding and funding the next generation of<br />

energy technology, GE’s Ecomagination Challenge has been an outstanding<br />

success.”<br />

In a further show of commitment to the practice of open innovation,<br />

GE has since expanded its efforts using external talent. In<br />

September 2011, GE created the healthymagination challenge to identify<br />

and accelerate ideas to advance breast cancer early detection and<br />

diagnosis in order to help save lives affected by breast cancer.<br />

THE BUSINESS MODEL IMPACT<br />

FIRST, SOME CONTEXT 17<br />

Crowdstorming has the potential to help transform businesses. Each<br />

example provided had different outcomes and the impact on their<br />

business has been different. To help us see how organizations have<br />

used crowdstorming (and to get you thinking about how you might), it<br />

is useful to see how they have considered using it in the context of their<br />

business models. To help with this, we can use the Business Model<br />

Canvas from Alex Osterwalder’s book Business Model Generation, 17<br />

shown in Figure 1.2.<br />

What tools such as the “Canvas” help us do is to see how organizations<br />

have used crowdstorming to improve their business.<br />

As we work through the stories we have covered so far, we can see<br />

the different ways the crowdstorm process has impacted each organization.<br />

For Goldcorp, their Key Resources were simply not able to<br />

determine where they might find gold. When they engaged an outside<br />

crowd, they transformed their Value Proposition—they were able to


18<br />

Key Partners Key Activities Value Propositions Customer Relationships Customer Segments<br />

+ GE identified new<br />

potential partners and<br />

investment opportunities<br />

+ Triple Eight found new<br />

disign partners<br />

+ Goldcorp was able to greatly<br />

augment its ability to identify<br />

the best locations for gold<br />

Key Resources Channels<br />

+ LEGO found new key<br />

resources to support new<br />

product development<br />

Cost Structure Revenue Streams<br />

+ GE, LEGO, Starbucks Betacup, and Triple Eight found efficient ways<br />

to earn media and generate awareness for their brands and offerings.<br />

+ Starbucks Betacup found<br />

solutions that asked<br />

customers to play a role in<br />

reduce paper cup waste.<br />

+ GE, LEGO, Starbucks<br />

Betacup, and Triple Eight<br />

benefitted from increased<br />

awareness by crowdstorming<br />

in public.<br />

+ LEGO was able to identify<br />

ideas to serve new<br />

customers segments (like<br />

adult fans of LEGO or<br />

Minecraft fans).<br />

+ Goldcorp, GE, Triple Eight, and LEGO all found new revenue<br />

streams<br />

Figure 1.2 The Business Model Canvas—Showing How Crowdstorming Impacts Business Models for GE,<br />

LEGO, Goldcorp, Triple Eight, and Starbucks<br />

Source: Alexander Osterwalder and Yves Pigneur, Business Model Generation: A Handbook for Visionaries, Game Changers, and Challengers<br />

(Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, 2010).


FIRST, SOME CONTEXT 19<br />

more efficiently locate gold. Understanding where to expend effort to<br />

look for gold is at the heart of their business, and this is where<br />

crowdstorming helped. For LEGO, they did not lack innovation, but<br />

they lacked the ability to understand where they might invest. Like<br />

Goldcorp, they did not know where to focus and their crowd helped<br />

them ignore the less promising new products and focus on areas they<br />

knew LEGO customers would love. In the process, they also transformed<br />

their Customer Relationships, bringing them closer and giving<br />

them a stake in shaping the products they love.<br />

For Starbucks, the impact is less clear. The crowd did not save the<br />

business, and it is not clear how the crowdstorming will impact how<br />

they deliver value. However, in the short term, the discussion around<br />

the ideas had a positive impact on communication about the company.<br />

It impacted their communication “Channels,” generating awareness of<br />

Starbucks’ commitment and efforts to operate a more sustainable<br />

business. Finally, for GE Ecomagination, the crowdstorm process<br />

provided access to new Partners, which in turn offered GE a new Value<br />

Proposition and Channels.<br />

As exciting as these stories are, they are just the start. These<br />

organizations are tapping into crowdstorm processes selectively, as a<br />

complement to existing business processes. But what happens when we<br />

create organizations that place crowdstorm processes at the core of<br />

their business model? We’re going to introduce you to a few organizations<br />

that are doing just that—like Giffgaff, Quirky, LocalMotors,<br />

and Threadlesss. The oldest is just over a decade, while the youngest<br />

have been around for only a few years. And yet they reveal what might<br />

be possible when we engineer organizations around outside talent, to<br />

take advantage of the massively reduced transaction costs that defined<br />

the shape of organizations created before the Internet.<br />

We’re excited about the potential. But we are even more excited<br />

that we are starting to understand how you can make crowdstorming<br />

work. We know from experience that when you have the capacity to<br />

transform organizations at this scale, you are going to meet resistance.<br />

You will encounter resistance simply because of the scale of the proposed<br />

changes. And you will encounter resistance because of the risks<br />

associated with change. For all the insights we will share, we know that


20 CROWDSTORM<br />

few of the success stories could have happened without substantial<br />

support from the most senior people in the organization—and the<br />

combined efforts across multiple groups within each organization from<br />

IT and legal to marketing and R&D.<br />

To address this issue head on, the next chapter lays out a<br />

framework for thinking through ways to balance the business benefit of<br />

using crowdstorming while assessing and managing the risks related to<br />

intellectual property, confidentiality, and the brand.


Contents<br />

Acknowledgments xi<br />

You Choose the Path to Follow xiii<br />

Preface xv<br />

Short On Time, But<br />

Still Crave Amazing Things? 1<br />

Why a Guidebook? 4<br />

Introduction: My Journey<br />

So Far 8<br />

Chapter 1 How to Be a Passion Hit 32<br />

Chapter 2 Trust Your Gut 36<br />

vii


viii CONTENTS<br />

Chapter 3 Take Stock 39<br />

Chapter 4 Knowing When to Move On 41<br />

Chapter 5 The Power of Writing<br />

It Down 44<br />

Chapter 6 The Three-Word Exercise 48<br />

Chapter 7 The Magic of Turkey Pot Pie 57<br />

Chapter 8 Don’t Let the Seagulls Get<br />

You Down 61<br />

Chapter 9 Simplify, Focus, and Attack 65<br />

Chapter 10 Everyone Has Excuses 70<br />

Chapter 11 No More Saying, “I Can’t” 72<br />

Chapter 12 Stop Talking; Start Doing 77<br />

Chapter 13 Risk Can Be Scary; Embrace<br />

It and Move Forward 82<br />

Chapter 14 Quitting Is Always an Option 85<br />

Chapter 15 Know What You Hate and<br />

Then Don’t DoIt 88


Contents ix<br />

Chapter 16 With a Little Help from<br />

Our Friends 91<br />

Chapter 17 Life Is Too Short for<br />

Bad Wine 95<br />

Chapter 18 Be a Duck 99<br />

Chapter 19 To Each Their Own . . . 105<br />

Chapter 20 Forget Skipping Pebbles;<br />

Throw a Boulder! 108<br />

Chapter 21 Living the Road Less<br />

Traveled 112<br />

Chapter 22 Focus on the Flame 115<br />

Chapter 23 Learning to Say No 118<br />

Chapter 24 Have a Small-Town Mentality 124<br />

Chapter 25 Workshifting 134<br />

Chapter 26 Rules Are Like Rubber Bands 140<br />

Chapter 27 Beer and Coffee 144<br />

Chapter 28 Hallway Magic 148


x CONTENTS<br />

Chapter 29 Celebrate Success of All Sizes 151<br />

Chapter 30 Learn from Failure, But<br />

Don’t Seek It Out 155<br />

Chapter 31 Don’t Let the Asshats and<br />

Ankle Biters Get You Down 158<br />

Chapter 32 Can You Idle Well? 163<br />

Chapter 33 Giving Back and Gratitude 167<br />

Chapter 34 Play in the Rain 171<br />

Chapter 35 The End and the Beginning 173<br />

Appendix Dangerous Books 177


You Choose the Path<br />

to Follow<br />

Welcome to Amazing Things Will Happen.<br />

The following pages are filled with advice,<br />

thoughts, and experiences that you need to take to<br />

heart if you want to live a happier and more fulfilling<br />

life. They are a collection of lessons I’ve<br />

learned from my experiences and that have been<br />

given to me from a variety of people I’ve met<br />

throughout my life. They’ve served me well and<br />

will assist you to move forward in your life.<br />

The smartest people are lifelong students—<br />

always learning from those around them and never<br />

believing that they know enough. Although our<br />

education system may believe that we can learn<br />

xiii


xiv YOU CHOOSE THE PATH TO FOLLOW<br />

only from books and in classrooms, the truth is<br />

that everything around us is a classroom. To be a<br />

better person, you should never stop experiencing<br />

and learning new things.<br />

How you get from where you are now to<br />

where the amazing things begin to happen is up<br />

to you. This is a guide to get you jump-started,<br />

push you forward, and motivate you to find your<br />

own path.


Preface<br />

You need to know up front what this book is and,<br />

more important, what it is not.<br />

People say that the way I live my life inspires<br />

them. I had always just sort of shrugged this off<br />

with a giggle or a gracious nod and moved on<br />

to other things. But as more people told me this,<br />

I became inspired to share my approach with the<br />

world in the hopes that it helps change others’<br />

lives as well.<br />

For years, my podcast Managing the Gray has<br />

been an outlet to share my diverse knowledge about<br />

everything from online marketing to advice on how<br />

to have a more successful career. The more listeners<br />

commented and reacted to what was said, the clearer<br />

xv


xvi PREFACE<br />

it became that focusing on self-improvement,<br />

achieving your goals, and living a happier life was<br />

what they were most interested in. This book grew<br />

out of that show.<br />

This book takes the knowledge I’ve accumulated<br />

over the years and shares it with you. It<br />

isn’t a life guide, a coaching playbook, or a behappy-quick<br />

manual. It is my personal approach<br />

and thoughts on life straight from the heart.<br />

Although many people get lucky, most people<br />

who have found a successful balance of life and<br />

work have done so through lots of hard work. Life<br />

rarely will hand you something without requiring<br />

you to put in the time to earn it. You have to do<br />

the work!<br />

The words of encouragement and inspirations<br />

shared are meant to push you in the direction<br />

of which you’ve always dreamed. Perhaps you<br />

will decide to pursue your dreams, change career,<br />

make a difference in the world, or follow your<br />

passions wherever they lead. A large part of success<br />

also calls for taking risks that don’t always pay


Preface xvii<br />

off. You don’t get to walk on the path of amazing<br />

if you are too scared to risk a bit.<br />

I don’t promise the world, but I do promise<br />

that if you work hard, stay true to yourself, be a<br />

good person, help others, and listen to those<br />

around you, amazing things will happen.


Short On Time, But<br />

Still Crave Amazing<br />

Things?<br />

The reality of reading is that most don’t make<br />

enough time for it.<br />

For those of you who are short on time but<br />

still want to learn from this book, I’ve made it easy<br />

for you. Sure, it is cheating a bit, but I’d rather you<br />

think of this condensed overview as a little lifehack<br />

instead. Hopefully when you have time, you’ll<br />

come back and read the full thing.<br />

The ideas for this book began forming as<br />

my children grew older and began asking lots of<br />

questions about their future. Combine that with<br />

1


2 SHORT ON TIME<br />

the constant stream of questions from others<br />

asking how to live a happy and fulfilling life and<br />

I knew I had to get this book out into the world.<br />

Many people want more money, a new job, or<br />

a happier relationship, but they are not willing to<br />

put in the time and work to make any of it happen.<br />

Those people drive me nuts. There are so many<br />

get-rich-quick schemes out there that I wanted to<br />

create a road map that people could actually use<br />

to achieve their dreams successfully.<br />

Amazing things happen only if you work<br />

hard—really hard. And they happen only if you<br />

are good to others. No one can do it alone, and it<br />

is the people around you who are going to help<br />

make your success happen. When you are kind<br />

toward others, they will return the kindness to<br />

you. Listening and kindness are two skills that<br />

don’t get taught in school, yet they are crucial for<br />

you to succeed in any capacity.<br />

Life is short. You never know if you’ll be given<br />

tomorrow, so get out there and make the most<br />

of it. At its heart, that is what this book is about.


Short On Time 3<br />

If all these pages were summed up into a<br />

single paragraph, they would say:<br />

Amazing Things Will Happen makes it clear<br />

that once you figure out what you want out<br />

of life, if you work very hard, day in and day<br />

out, you can make it happen. But you have<br />

to be a good human in addition to doing the<br />

work. As you achieve success, never forget to<br />

be kind to others. Help those who need it<br />

and share everything you’ve learned with all<br />

who ask. Follow these principles in your life,<br />

and amazing things will happen.<br />

Still not condensed or short enough for your<br />

busy life? I can condense it even further:<br />

Amazing Things Will Happen is a guide to<br />

living a good life.


Why a Guide?<br />

Life doesn’t come with an instruction manual.<br />

Humans are too much of a mixed bag for it to be<br />

that easy.<br />

Each of us must find the stories, books, inspirations,<br />

and people who inspire us. Those who give<br />

you a kick in the right direction or guidance on big<br />

decisions.<br />

As such, I’m sharing the words of wisdom<br />

that have been shared with me over the years<br />

from various intelligent individuals, as well as<br />

some words of wisdom I’ve discovered on my own.<br />

Hopefully, these words will speak to you and in<br />

turn inspire you as they have me.<br />

4


Why a Guide? 5<br />

If it were as simple as X þ Y ¼ A Happy<br />

Life, then the world would be a much happier<br />

place. And although these words are meant to help<br />

each of you, this book can only guide you forward;<br />

it cannot give you specific directions.<br />

The path for each of us is unique, and it’s up<br />

to you to find the way.<br />

How you use this book is up to you.<br />

I’ve divided the book into rough sections,<br />

with the hopes that you can pick and choose<br />

what is most impactful to you. The sections are as<br />

follows:<br />

1. Telling the Tale<br />

This is where we are right now. Every<br />

house needs to be built upon a solid foundation.<br />

Once we’ve established a few essential things,<br />

the real fun begins and we can take steps toward<br />

making your life more enjoyable.<br />

2. Taking Stock<br />

If you are going to make changes, you<br />

first need to identify where you are now and<br />

where you want to be. Many people are able


6 WHY A GUIDE?<br />

to recognize that they must make changes, but<br />

they are not sure what to do next. Looking<br />

over the edge of a cliff into the unknown<br />

below never comes without fear. Some choose<br />

to enjoy the view and never take the plunge.<br />

But the wise will minimize any dangers they<br />

might encounter before jumping in with<br />

anticipation.<br />

Taking risks can be immensely rewarding,<br />

as long as you are informed of and prepared<br />

for the outcomes. And this section is<br />

going to ensure that you are.<br />

3. Time for Change<br />

Once you’ve prepared for the big change,<br />

it is time to do it. Often, this is when the most<br />

obstacles and challenges will arise. It is easy to<br />

question if you’ve made the right decision, but<br />

the tips in this section will give you plenty to<br />

think about to keep pushing forward.<br />

No one enjoys change, but it is a crucial<br />

part of finding and doing what you love in<br />

life, so it’s important to face it and push<br />

through your fears.


Why a Guide? 7<br />

4. Taking the Road Less Traveled<br />

There isn’t a single path that everyone<br />

can use to reach the goals they seek. We each<br />

make our own success, and that can come<br />

only after a lot of trial and error. But the<br />

sooner you realize that the journey is part of<br />

the enjoyment, the more fun your adventure<br />

will be.<br />

There have been plenty of books written<br />

about making the decision to do what you<br />

love, but not enough has been written about<br />

fully enjoying the time once you get there. Be<br />

sure to come back to this section for inspiration<br />

if you get stuck along the way.<br />

Are you ready? Let’s go!


CHAPTER<br />

1<br />

How to Be a<br />

Passion Hit<br />

Passion Hits are people who are able to make a<br />

living doing what they love.<br />

You want to do what you love, or you<br />

wouldn’t be reading this book. You want to find a<br />

way to spend every day working on that single<br />

thing that fills you with glee thinking about it.<br />

32


How to Be a Passion Hit 33<br />

Those who decide to make their passion their<br />

work and keep pushing forward no matter what<br />

are Passion Hits, a play on the word passionate.<br />

My official definition for my made-up word:<br />

Passion Hit—(noun) A person who has discovered<br />

his or her true passion in life and found<br />

a way to make it his or her livelihood.<br />

Most entrepreneurs are also Passion Hits.<br />

If you dedicate that many hours of a day to your<br />

business, you’ve got to be at least a little bit passionate<br />

about it. Sure, some do it only for the<br />

money or to solve a problem, but the successful<br />

ones are also the passionate ones.<br />

They include people such as Jason McCarthy,<br />

who after bravely serving our country as a Green<br />

Beret wanted to start an American manufacturing<br />

company that could live up to military standards as<br />

well as the everyday traveler. He focused his<br />

energy on starting the GORUCK brand.<br />

Ellen McGirt always had a love for finding,<br />

capturing, and sharing the stories of others. She


34 AMAZING THINGS WILL HAPPEN<br />

has interviewed chief executive officers, U.S. presidents,<br />

celebrities, and regular people across the<br />

country. She is currently a senior writer for Fast<br />

Company magazine.<br />

AJ and Melissa Leon wanted to work and<br />

travel together. They formed Misfit Inc. to make<br />

both a reality. They now live on the road and help<br />

make the world a better place with each new<br />

project their team takes on.<br />

Zack Arias is a poster child for the fact that<br />

hard, constant work can make dreams come true.<br />

He is now one of the best professional photographers<br />

in Atlanta and beyond. His style of using<br />

only one light when shooting has grown into a<br />

series of courses that he sells himself and teaches<br />

around the world.<br />

Chris Penn and Chris Brogan were not finding<br />

the level of interaction and teaching that they had<br />

hoped for at other conferences so they began Pod-<br />

Camp to create a forum for the interaction they<br />

wanted. Since that first event in Boston, people have<br />

hosted PodCamps around the globe that have educated<br />

and networked tens of thousands of people.


How to Be a Passion Hit 35<br />

Each of these people has a unique story to<br />

tell, but every one of them exemplifies the values<br />

that a Passion Hit believes in.<br />

I wanted as many people as possible to be<br />

inspired by these stories, so I started my Web<br />

series Passion Hit TV (http://www.passionhit.tv).<br />

I’ll be adding new stories there all the time, so be<br />

sure to subscribe, and if you have ideas of new<br />

Passion Hits that I should interview, you can<br />

e-mail me.<br />

The hope and goal is that by the time you<br />

finish reading these pages, you’ll be inspired<br />

enough to set off on your own journey to be a<br />

Passion Hit doing what you love. Be sure to let me<br />

know how it goes!


CONTENTS<br />

Preface xi<br />

Author Note xv<br />

Introduction xvii<br />

PART 1 Plan 1<br />

Chapter 1 Learning to Run 3<br />

Chapter 2 What Is an Explanation? 7<br />

What Is Not An Explanation 8<br />

Defining Explanation 9<br />

Explanations Require Empathy 10<br />

Act and Art 11<br />

Look at Your Fish 12<br />

Explanation Lowers the Cost of Understanding 13<br />

An Explanation Is a Way to Package Ideas 14<br />

Explanations Answer the Question ‘‘Why?’’ 16<br />

Explanations Make People Care 16<br />

Chapter 3 Why Explanations Fail 23<br />

All About Confidence 24<br />

Assumptions Cause Failure 24<br />

Words Can Hurt 26<br />

We Lack Understanding 27<br />

We Want to Appear Smart 28<br />

vii


viii Contents<br />

The Direct Approach—No Context 30<br />

Summary 32<br />

Chapter 4 Planning Your Explanations 33<br />

Identifying Explanation Problems 34<br />

PART 2 Package 43<br />

Chapter 5 Packaging Ideas 45<br />

Stepping Outside the Bubble 46<br />

What Goes into the Packaging? 48<br />

Chapter 6 Context 51<br />

Forest then Trees 53<br />

Solving the Context Problem 56<br />

Context in Explanation—We Can All Agree 61<br />

Context and Pain 63<br />

Example: Google Docs 63<br />

On the Explanation Scale 65<br />

Summary 66<br />

Chapter 7 Story 67<br />

Stories Versus Facts 68<br />

But I’m Not a Storyteller 69<br />

Common Craft and Stories 71<br />

The Simple Ingredient: People 73<br />

Using Stories in Explanation 74<br />

Basic Story Format 75<br />

When Does Storytelling Not Work? 77<br />

Personification and Story 79<br />

On the Explanation Scale 81<br />

Summary 81<br />

Chapter 8 Connections 83<br />

Connecting Your Long Lost Uncle—Old Versus New 84<br />

Building-on Versus Establishing 87


Contents ix<br />

Analogy 89<br />

Common Craft Videos 90<br />

On the Explanation Scale 92<br />

Summary 92<br />

Chapter 9 Description 93<br />

Explaining Web Browsers 95<br />

Explanation Is Not a Recipe 97<br />

On The Explanation Scale 99<br />

Summary 99<br />

Chapter 10 Simplification 103<br />

Chapter 11 Constraints 113<br />

Common Craft and Constraints 115<br />

Constraints and Your Explanations 117<br />

Summary 119<br />

Chapter 12 Preparing for and Writing an Explanation 121<br />

The Common Craft Writing Process 122<br />

Big Ideas 123<br />

Research and Discovery 123<br />

Script Writing 125<br />

The Real Thing 128<br />

Chapter 13 Bringing an Explanation Together 131<br />

PART 3 Present 147<br />

Chapter 14 Common Craft’s Lessons Learned 149<br />

Common Craft Gets Started 149<br />

Ten Lessons Learned from Common Craft Explanations 151<br />

Chapter 15 Right Medium for the Message 157<br />

A Transformation 158<br />

Media Options 159<br />

Presentation Modes 161


x Contents<br />

Recording and Distribution Options 164<br />

Constraints Come to the Rescue 165<br />

Summary 171<br />

Chapter 16 Visuals 173<br />

You Can Use Visuals 178<br />

Dan Roam’s 6 × 6 Rule 178<br />

Common Craft Visual Metaphors 186<br />

Noise and Simplicity in Visuals 188<br />

Infographics 191<br />

Creating Digital Visuals 193<br />

Summary 193<br />

Chapter 17 Emma and Carlos 195<br />

Epilogue 202<br />

Chapter 18 Explanation Culture and Your Life as an Explainer 203<br />

Your Life as An Explainer 206<br />

Acknowledgments 209<br />

Links to Common Craft Videos 211<br />

About the Author 215<br />

Bibliography 217<br />

Index 219


INTRODUCTION<br />

For most of my life (especially in school), I struggled to grasp some of the subjects I<br />

was supposed to be learning. Although I grasped subjects such as science and history<br />

fairly easily, topics such as math and accounting consistently proved to be challenging.<br />

In my mind, these subjects were made up of thousands of rules that I had to memorize<br />

to solve the associated problems. The ideas seemed to float around in my head without<br />

any foundation or place.<br />

As so many students who struggle do, I felt inadequate at the time, as if my brain<br />

was not wired for solving these problems. I became a person who said ‘‘I’m not good at<br />

math’’ and avoided anything related to it. The notion of trying to memorize rule after<br />

rule frustrated me, and I wondered how others did it with such apparent ease. Were<br />

they simply more skilled at memorization? What was I missing?<br />

At the same time, however, I knew I was a capable student. Along with science and<br />

history, writing came easily to me. But as much as I wanted math and subjects like it to<br />

work for me, it seemed like the light bulb never went on.<br />

However, I learned to work with this apparent limitation throughout my years of<br />

education. I eventually earned a graduate degree in health administration and moved to<br />

Seattle, where I currently live. It was during this phase of my career that I identified<br />

the underlying cause of my struggle with subjects like math and started to see how the<br />

same problem affected others. When I looked back, it seemed like there were some<br />

people in my classes who could look at a set of rules or details and naturally see the<br />

big picture—in other words, the why. They seemed to be able to understand math and<br />

accounting at a higher level, whereas students like me were getting so mired in trying<br />

to memorize the how that the why faded into the background. We could still pass tests<br />

xvii


xviii Introduction<br />

and make good grades, but we did it by memorizing facts, not by developing a true<br />

understanding of the material.<br />

The more I thought about this, the clearer the solution became. My learning style<br />

meant that I needed a way to approach new ideas in a unique way. I needed to see the<br />

big picture first, the foundation of the details. Therefore, to understand accounting, I<br />

needed to understand business basics first. To understand math, I needed to understand<br />

the reasoning behind it first. I needed to see the forest before the trees.<br />

Soon enough I realized what was missing: I needed better explanations. My learning<br />

style demanded that I see the why before the how. This revelation became a part<br />

of my communication style. I became a student of communication and watched my<br />

friends and peers explain ideas. I began to recognize how people got confused or lost<br />

confidence in their ability to understand something completely. This experience made<br />

a deep impression on me.<br />

But it was not until I got involved in the technology industry in 1998 that this<br />

realization became a part of my work. I was hired as a data analyst at a healthcare<br />

software company in Bellevue, Washington. Within two years I met my wife and<br />

business partner, Sachi, and I developed a strong passion for the idea that customers<br />

should be able to communicate and get support using message boards on the company<br />

website. What is now known as social media was called online communities in 1999, and<br />

I wanted to be the online community manager.<br />

As you might imagine, this was not an easy sell inside the company. Most of<br />

my colleagues had never considered the potential of an online community and were<br />

naturally risk-averse. But I had a plan: I would explain my way into creating this<br />

program. So I set up meetings with product managers and created materials that<br />

supported my ideas. I educated my colleagues in the way I hadwantedtobeeducated<br />

throughout my life.<br />

I provided a foundation by building context and discussing big ideas—the forest.<br />

I helped them feel confident that they fully understood what I wanted to do before<br />

talking about any details—the trees. I planned my explanations and told stories that<br />

highlighted how this online community had the potential to be a rich source of customer<br />

information. It could even become an early warning system for product teams.<br />

I asked them to imagine a world in which customers could solve each other’s<br />

problems. I explained the idea to executives and connected it to the company’s


Introduction xix<br />

strategy and goals. Slowly but surely, the stakeholders saw the potential, and most<br />

became advocates.<br />

Soon enough I was the online community manager—a job I held until 2003,<br />

when I left to found Common Craft. I launched it as an online community consulting<br />

company aimed at helping organizations understand and implement their own online<br />

communities. My job as an explainer was just beginning.<br />

My role as a consultant was to influence my clients and help them see and understand<br />

new opportunities. I soon realized my clients were experiencing difficulties very similar<br />

to those I experienced when attempting to understand certain subjects in school. Their<br />

view of social media was like my view of accounting: they knew the words and had<br />

memorized the features of various tools, but they had no foundation. They were stuck<br />

with countless trees, but no forest, and like me, they could not fully apply what they<br />

were learning.<br />

This gave me an idea.<br />

I decided to take subjects such as wikis and RSS feeds—topics that had proved<br />

challenging for my clients to grasp—and write my own explanations using the tagline<br />

‘‘in plain English.’’ The idea was to help solve a problem for my clients and to create<br />

something interesting for the Common Craft blog. This was the first time I realized that<br />

my unique perspective on explanation could be a useful business tool. I had developed<br />

the ability to put myself in other people’s shoes and create media that helped them feel<br />

confident. They loved reading the blog posts and I enjoyed writing them, but it would<br />

be a few years before they would be called into action.<br />

At around the same time, I put my explanation skills to the test. A few companies<br />

sponsored what they called ‘‘The Perfect Corporate Weblog Pitch Contest.’’ The idea<br />

was to explain the value of corporate weblogs in the time it takes to ride an elevator<br />

(under 160 words). When I saw this contest, I thought to myself, ‘‘Man, I am all over<br />

this!’’ It was true. My award-winning pitch read as follows:<br />

First, think about the value of the Wall Street Journal to business leaders. The value<br />

it provides is context—the Journal allows readers to see themselves in the context of the<br />

financial world each day, which enables more informed decision making.<br />

With this in mind, think about your company as a microcosm of the financial<br />

world. Can your employees see themselves in the context of the whole company? Would


xx Introduction<br />

more informed decisions be made if employees and leaders had access to internal news<br />

sources? Weblogs serve this need. By making internal websites simple to update, weblogs<br />

allow individuals and teams to maintain online journals that chronicle projects inside the<br />

company. These professional journals make it easy to produce and access internal news,<br />

providing context to the company—context that can profoundly affect decision making. In<br />

this way, weblogs allow employees and leaders to make more informed decisions through<br />

increasing their awareness of internal news and events.<br />

My goal was to convey the value of weblogs in a way that would appeal to the<br />

judges; however, I learned something else from this experience. For the first time, I felt<br />

that explanation was not simply a tactic or way of approaching communication. It was<br />

something that excited and motivated me. I specifically remember my heart beating<br />

rapidly when I drafted the corporate weblog pitch. It made me feel like I had found<br />

my calling, like I was born to make ideas easier for others to understand in the form of<br />

explanations.<br />

I came to realize over the next few years that the consulting clients with whom I<br />

worked were not unique in their thoughts about technology. The general public also<br />

struggled to see the value of these new online products and tools. Most people were<br />

constantly caught up in the features and details. They wanted to stay ahead of the curve<br />

but were cautious about wasting time on a product they did not fully understand.<br />

The tragedy from my perspective was that the tools were often free, easy to use,<br />

and could have a positive impact on people’s lives. However, people weren’t adopting<br />

them because of how they were explained. The technologists were doing the explaining,<br />

and doing it poorly.<br />

We came to call this an explanation problem, which is when the biggest barrier to<br />

adoption is not design, features, or benefits but communication. And the problem was<br />

epidemic. Thousands of life changing tools and ideas were not being used because they<br />

lacked clear explanations of their value.<br />

When Sachi joined me at Common Craft in 2006, we set out to solve this problem.<br />

It was the year YouTube went mainstream; suddenly, anyone could easily publish<br />

videos to the Web. We started to experiment and looked for ways to make video part<br />

of Common Craft. After feeling awkward trying to be the guy standing in front of a


Introduction xxi<br />

whiteboard, Sachi had the idea to point a camera straight down onto a whiteboard and<br />

use hands, markers, and paper cut-outs to tell a story.<br />

Common Craft videos were born in 2007, and we created our first video based<br />

on a blog post for my clients from years before, entitled ‘‘RSS in Plain English’’<br />

(www.commoncraft.com/video/rss). We shot the video in our basement with no<br />

expectations or video production skills, and it showed. We lit the whiteboard with the<br />

strongest portable lights we had: bedroom lamps. And for the narration, I spoke directly<br />

into the microphone on the camera. As it turned out, this three-minute video changed<br />

our lives.<br />

Sachi with our second generation studio setup, summer 2007.<br />

We posted it on YouTube in April, and it became a viral hit. It was viewed tens<br />

of thousands of times the first day and we received a torrent of e-mails, comments,<br />

and blog posts about our work. People contacted us and encouraged us to make more<br />

videos. It was one of the most exciting days of my life. Our explanation was a hit<br />

because it solved the RSS explanation problem and invited people to use it by helping<br />

them see it from a new, more understandable perspective.


xxii Introduction<br />

The next question became: can we do it again? We published our second video<br />

about a month later, which was also based on a previous blog post. This one was called<br />

‘‘Wikis in Plain English’’ (www.commoncraft.com/video/wikis), and was received in<br />

a similar way. People seemed to love our videos and want more.<br />

By the end of the summer of 2007, we had published four more videos and<br />

started making custom videos for products and services. In August of 2007, we decided<br />

that Common Craft would become a video production company that specialized<br />

in video explanations. We redesigned our website, and our tagline became ‘‘Our<br />

Product Is Explanation.’’ One of our first custom videos, called ‘‘Google Docs in Plain<br />

English,’’ hit the web that fall (www.commoncraft.com/google-docs-plain-english).<br />

We were on our way.<br />

Since that time, people around the world have come to know Common Craft for<br />

our explanation skills. We have made more than 100 video explanations in the same<br />

format as the first video on RSS—what is now known as Common Craft Style. Our<br />

videos have been viewed more than 50 million times online and we have worked<br />

with companies such as LEGO, Intel, Google, Dropbox, and Microsoft to explain their<br />

products and services. Further, teachers and students are now creating their own video<br />

explanations in classrooms and calling them ‘‘Common Craft Style Videos.’’ Perhaps no<br />

company is better known for video explanations than Common Craft.<br />

Now more than ever, I am a believer in the power of explanation, and not just for<br />

product and service videos. I believe it is a skill that everyone can learn and improve<br />

upon, and one that is needed to help people grasp ideas in a useful and productive<br />

way. This book is designed to give everyone an opportunity to rethink how he or she<br />

explains ideas, and learn to package them into explanations that work.


CHAPTER 1<br />

Learning to Run<br />

Trevor limped through the front door, sore again. These past<br />

few months had been tough on his joints. Six months ago he<br />

picked up running again after his doctor said he needed to get<br />

more exercise. To help keep himself motivated, he set a goal of<br />

completing a half-marathon within a year. But it didn’t seem like<br />

this was going to happen—not the way things were looking now.<br />

Trevor was beginning to realize that his body just couldn’t take a<br />

beating these days, and he joked with friends that he felt like an<br />

old man at 45.<br />

It wasn’t always this way. Trevor had always been a runner in one way or another.<br />

He played soccer in high school, and started to run as a way to stay in shape in college.<br />

He took to it naturally. But as he moved onto a career, his time became limited and he<br />

ran less and less frequently.<br />

Trevor knew that something needed to change if he was going to complete the<br />

half-marathon. He tried a variety of tactics—buying new running shoes, wearing knee<br />

braces, and concentrating on stretching. However, nothing seemed to work, and the<br />

date for the half-marathon was drawing closer.<br />

3


4 The Art of Explanation<br />

Trevor had recently been enjoying a drink with a friend and mentioned that he was<br />

having a difficult time preparing for the race. After some probing, his friend asked a<br />

simple question that he wasn’t sure how to answer: ‘‘Have you tried changing how you<br />

run?’’ Perplexed, Trevor replied, ‘‘I’m not sure what you mean ... I run how I run.<br />

It’s always been the same—one foot in front of the other!’’ After a chuckle, his friend<br />

asked again ‘‘Seriously, have you ever thought about how you run—and what you could<br />

do to run better?’’<br />

The thought had never occurred to Trevor. He had always taken his running style<br />

for granted. After all, it had usually come easily to him, and he achieved the results<br />

he wanted. He assumed that his running style was as good as it ever could be, so he<br />

responded ‘‘Nah, the way I run is fine. And anyway, aren’t we born with the ability<br />

to run?’’<br />

His friend replied, ‘‘Of course we can all run. But like anything, there is an art and<br />

skill to running, and part of getting what you want out of it is knowing how to run<br />

correctly.’’<br />

Trevor had never considered that there might be a right or wrong way to run, and<br />

questioned incredulously, ‘‘What could possibly make my running better?’’<br />

His friend smiled and answered, ‘‘Look it up.’’ And that is just what he did.<br />

Trevor’s perspective started to change within a few days. The more he researched,<br />

the more he saw running as a skill that he could improve. He learned about proper<br />

posture, stride, and how a foot strikes the surface, and discovered tactics that professional<br />

runners use to stay healthy. For the first time, he could see that his joint problems were<br />

likely due to how he was running. A feeling of relief came over him. Unlike his age, this<br />

was something he could change!<br />

As he trained for the race, he began paying attention to his form and movements.<br />

Within a few weeks, his knee and back pain began to fade, and his endurance seemed<br />

to jump, which gave him the energy to run longer than ever. The half-marathon now<br />

seemed like a reality and it felt good.<br />

If you ask Trevor about running today, he will tell you that his only regret is not<br />

discovering how he could improve his running earlier. But now that he has this new<br />

perspective, a full marathon doesn’t seem too far away.<br />

Like Trevor and his running, we all take explanation for granted. Because it is<br />

a natural part of how we communicate, the thought may never occur to us that


Learning to Run 5<br />

explanation is a skill we can improve and put to work in achieving our goals. In this<br />

way, running and explanation have much in common:<br />

We have the ability to do it<br />

We may do it so frequently that we never think about it<br />

We think the way in which we do it is normal<br />

We never consider that we could improve the way we do it, but,<br />

Improvement is possible, and creates positive results<br />

Because explanation is a skill that we can improve and apply to nearly every part of<br />

our lives, let’s get started in doing so. In Chapter 2 we’ll define explanation and consider<br />

the characteristics that make it useful and powerful.


BETH KANTER<br />

KATIE DELAHAYE PAINE<br />

FOREWORD BY LAURA ARRILLAGA-ANDREESSEN<br />

MEASURING<br />

THE<br />

NETWORKED<br />

NONPROFIT<br />

USING DATA<br />

TO CHANGE<br />

THE WORLD<br />

Edited by<br />

WILLIAM T.<br />

PAARLBERG


CONTENTS<br />

Figures and Tables xi<br />

Foreword by Laura Arrillaga-Andreessen xiii<br />

Preface: Th e Queen of Nonprofi ts Meets the Goddess of Measurement xvii<br />

Acknowledgments xxiii<br />

Th e Authors xxvii<br />

PART ONE: Introduction of Concepts 1<br />

ONE The Secret Sauce for Nonprofi ts: Networked<br />

Strategies + Measurement = Amazing Success 3<br />

TWO The Rise of the Networked Nonprofi t: A New<br />

Paradigm for Nonprofi t Success 13<br />

PART TWO: Basic Measurement Principles, How-Tos,<br />

and Best Practices 27<br />

THREE Creating a Data-Informed Culture: How Your Organization<br />

Can Embrace the Data and Use What It Can Teach You 29<br />

FOUR Measurement Is Power: How to Take Control<br />

of Your Programs and Progress with the Art and<br />

Science of Measurement 41<br />

FIVE Don’t Confuse Activity with Results: The Value of<br />

Expressing Your Results in Terms of Organizational Goals 59<br />

ix


x<br />

SIX The Ladder of Engagement: How to Measure Engagement<br />

and Use It to Improve Relationships with Your Stakeholders 77<br />

SEVEN How to Turn Your Stakeholders into Fundraisers: Social<br />

Fundraising and How Measurement Can Make It More Effective 99<br />

EIGHT Measurement Tools: How to Choose and Use<br />

the Right Tool for the Job 119<br />

NINE Measurement and the Aha! Moment: Using Your<br />

Data to Tell Stories, Make Decisions, and Change the World 151<br />

PART THREE: Advanced Measurement Concepts<br />

and Practices for Networked Nonprofi ts 171<br />

TEN Measuring What Really Matters: The Importance<br />

and Measurement of Relationships 173<br />

ELEVEN Understanding, Visualizing, and Improving Networks 187<br />

TWELVE Infl uence Measurement: How to Determine<br />

Your Infl uence and That of Your Organization, Free Agents,<br />

and Nonprofi t Champions 203<br />

THIRTEEN How to Be Naked and Measure It:<br />

Transparency Is a Networked Nonprofi t’s Best Friend 221<br />

FOURTEEN Measuring the Impact of the Crowd 235<br />

Epilogue: With Measurement and Learning, Networked<br />

Nonprofi ts Can Change the World 245<br />

Appendix A: Measuring Relationships and Relationship Research 247<br />

Appendix B: Crawl, Walk, Run, Fly Assessment Tool for<br />

Networked Nonprofi ts 251<br />

Appendix C: Social Media Measurement Checklist 255<br />

Appendix D: A Checklist for Monitoring Services 261<br />

Notes 269<br />

Glossary 281<br />

Resources for Tools, Tutorials, and Assistance 287<br />

Index 289<br />

Contents


PART ONE Introduction of<br />

Concepts


The Secret Sauce for<br />

Nonprofi ts<br />

Networked Strategies 1<br />

Measurement 5 Amazing Success<br />

chapter<br />

ONE<br />

3


4<br />

C<br />

arie Lewis positioned the party hat on her dog Bella ’s head,<br />

leaned down from her desk, and said, “Say cheeseburger!”<br />

Carie ’s boss snapped a photo with a mobile phone and shared it on<br />

1<br />

the nonprofi t organization ’s Facebook page (Figure 1.1 ).<br />

You may be wondering why Carie ’s dog was in her offi ce wearing a party hat.<br />

Perhaps you ’re even more curious as to why the photo was posted on Facebook.<br />

Carie Lewis is the director of emerging media for Th e Humane Society of the<br />

Measuring the Networked Nonprofi t<br />

Figure 1.1<br />

Carie Lewis and Bella Celebrate


United States (HSUS), the nation ’s largest animal protection organization, where<br />

she has been responsible for social media for more than fi ve years. Th e HSUS<br />

has a pet-friendly offi ce policy because its staff , like its constituents, are animal<br />

lovers. Th e party hats? Th ey were celebrating because Th e HSUS Facebook page<br />

had just broken the 1 million fan mark.<br />

Says Lewis, “Although we prefer not to focus on numbers of fans as a measure<br />

of ultimate success, 1 million fans is a huge landmark that we celebrated with<br />

our online community of animal lovers.” According to a 2011 nonprofi t social<br />

media benchmark study sponsored by Craig Newmark, animal charities are<br />

among the most active on social networks, perhaps because people love photos<br />

of cute animals. 2 But there was more to it than that.<br />

Th e HSUS fans are more than just fans; they love to talk about how much<br />

they love their pets and care for animals. Th ey share photos online, donate to<br />

Th e HSUS (and tell their friends to do so), and take action on animal rights<br />

issues when they receive a call to action. In answer to the question of how Th e<br />

HSUS built a fan base on Facebook that is not only large but is always ready<br />

get involved in supporting animals, Lewis responds, “We would not be successful<br />

if we were not using measurement to track and learn and constantly<br />

improve.” 3<br />

Lewis is a curator of social media metrics. She and her colleagues in other<br />

departments build their integrated advocacy or fundraising campaigns around<br />

outcomes, key performance indicators, and associated metrics. “We look at three<br />

things,” Lewis noted: “actions taken, donations made, and customer service<br />

wins. Th at ’s also how our department has been able to obtain more resources to<br />

handle the volume we have.” Th ey use measurable objectives for specifi c campaigns,<br />

and Lewis tracks everything they do on social networks in order to<br />

improve and get better results.<br />

For its campaign to reach 1 million fans, depicted in the screen capture in<br />

Figure 1.2 , Th e HSUS wanted to create a celebration so that fans could engage<br />

and participate in the fun. Th ey wanted to create a personalized experience that<br />

makes the fans feel that they are a part of something really great. Carie noted,<br />

“Because we ’ve been using measurement to improve our social media use for<br />

years, we know that we need to make these participatory campaigns as easy and<br />

simple as possible for stakeholders.”<br />

Lewis found that getting everyone in her organization on the same page<br />

about evaluating results is crucial: “Before launching any campaign, I present<br />

The Secret Sauce for Nonprofi ts 5


6<br />

Figure 1.2<br />

The HSUS ’s Million Fan Campaign Facebook Page<br />

the measurable objectives and strategies at a cross-department meeting. We<br />

spend a lot of time clarifying what success looks like and what metrics we will<br />

collect to measure it.” Th ese sessions also generate many great ideas for strategy,<br />

including the idea to create an infographic describing the organization ’s fans on<br />

Facebook.<br />

Lewis is oft en called in to consult with diff erent departments or affi liates:<br />

“We ’ve codifi ed our best practices on measurement and off er a menu of social<br />

media tactics that we review with them, letting them know the options, and<br />

use cases for each. Most important is a report template that helps them collect<br />

the right metrics and to do a content analysis. We even have a section that asks,<br />

‘What did you learn?’”<br />

Carie writes out “the objectives and metrics and measurement plan before we<br />

launch. Th at way we know what it will take to reach the goals, but also we get<br />

an opportunity to continuously improve what we ’re doing. In the long run, we<br />

know it is helping the animals we all love. Working as a networked nonprofi t<br />

Measuring the Networked Nonprofi t


without a measurement plan is a waste of resources and does a disservice to<br />

our mission.”<br />

THE KEYS TO NONPROFIT SUCCESS: NETWORKING<br />

AND MEASUREMENT<br />

Two key processes lead to tremendous success for nonprofi ts: becoming networked<br />

and using measurement. Th is book, through numerous examples and<br />

practical techniques, explores the many ways in which these two concepts<br />

dramatically improve the effi ciency and success of nonprofi ts.<br />

A networked nonprofi t is an organization that uses social networks and the<br />

technology of social media to greatly extend its reach, capabilities, and eff ectiveness.<br />

Measurement is the process of collecting data on your communications<br />

results and using the data to learn and improve your programs. An organization<br />

with a data-informed culture uses data to help make decisions and uses<br />

measurement to continuously improve and refi ne its systems. Each chapter of<br />

this book provides examples of organizations that are using these techniques to<br />

achieve success.<br />

Most nonprofi t organizations use at least some sort of informal measurement<br />

and some form of social media–enabled networking. Many nonprofi ts<br />

are striving to build a data-informed culture and networked mind-set. But few<br />

organizations use these powerful techniques to their greatest potential. One of<br />

these is MomsRising.org, a poster child for networked nonprofi ts and nonprofi t<br />

measurement mavens.<br />

MOMSRISING: A SUPERSTAR OF NETWORKED NONPROFITS<br />

KNOWS THE JOYS OF MEASUREMENT<br />

Kristin Rowe-Finkbeiner and Joan Blades founded MomsRising in 2006. To<br />

design this nonprofi t, they combined their experience in grassroots organizing<br />

and social media with successful ideas from organizations like MoveOn,<br />

ColorOfChange, League of Conservation Voters, and others. Th e result was an<br />

organization that embraces constant learning from experience and embeds this<br />

powerful concept in its organizational culture and processes. It has fueled the<br />

organization ’s growth from zero members in May 2006 to over a million active<br />

members—moms, dads, grandparents, aunts, and uncles—today.<br />

The Secret Sauce for Nonprofi ts 7


8<br />

MomsRising uses measurement to achieve tremendous success. As you read<br />

this book, you will fi nd several themes concerning the value of measurement<br />

and many examples of how it is used. Here are nine of them.<br />

Theme 1: “Likes” on Facebook Is Not a Victory—Social Change Is<br />

Proper measurement keeps organizations focused on results rather than<br />

the tools they use, a theme we explore in greater detail in Chapter Four.<br />

MomsRising, for instance, does not simply count “likes” on Facebook. Instead,<br />

it uses social change to defi ne its successes and develops metrics accordingly. Its<br />

most important goals generally include these:<br />

• Getting policies passed on family-related issues<br />

• Increasing capacity<br />

• Increasing the movement size by increasing membership<br />

• Working with aligned partner organizations<br />

• Garnering attention from all media through creative engagement<br />

For MomsRising, the holy grail of results is getting legislatures to pass familyfriendly<br />

policies. Th is requires grabbing the attention of policymakers. As one<br />

indicator of progress toward that goal, it counted an invitation to bring mothers<br />

to the White House to talk with policymakers about their experience with<br />

Medicaid. Th e White House blogged about the power of people ’s stories, and<br />

MomsRising members blogged about their White House experience, resulting in<br />

even greater exposure for their messages. Says Rowe-Finkbeiner, “Th e aft er-story<br />

is just as important because it will oft en get picked up by mainstream media outlets<br />

like NPR or the Huffi ngton Post. ”<br />

Theme 2: Measurement Helps Nonprofi ts<br />

Understand and Improve Their Social Networks<br />

Another theme of this book is that measurement helps nonprofi ts listen to and<br />

engage with their constituents. Measurement enables organizations to assess<br />

and improve their relationships with their members and stakeholders. Th is powerful<br />

technique will help you understand how your stakeholders perceive you,<br />

what they do with the information you send to them, and how it bears on their<br />

behavior. Th is theme is explored in more detail in Chapter Five.<br />

Measuring the Networked Nonprofi t


An important part of MomsRising ’s decision making is the use of member<br />

feedback in the form of stories or comments on social channels or e-mail and in<br />

more structured ways such as surveys. Says Rowe-Finkbeiner, “We are in constant<br />

dialogue with our members to fi gure out what works and what doesn ’t. Th e<br />

data keeps us focused on our mission of building a movement for family economic<br />

security, while listening and engaging with our members breathes life into<br />

our movement.”<br />

Theme 3: Measurement Means Data for Decisions,<br />

Not for Data ’s Sake<br />

Unfortunately, many organizations see measurement as collecting data to dump<br />

on the boardroom table or the executive director ’s desk. But measurement isn ’t<br />

about justifying one ’s existence or budget, and it isn’t about it fi lling spreadsheets<br />

with lots of “just-in-case” data to throw over the fence.<br />

Measurement is about using data to learn to become more eff ective and more<br />

effi cient. It’s about doing your job better, and helping your organization achieve<br />

its mission with fewer resources. It’s about reaching more people, and becoming<br />

better at saving the world.<br />

Theme 4: Measurement Makes You Plan for Success<br />

More and more nonprofi ts are making larger investments in social media: hiring<br />

dedicated staff , upgrading Web sites to incorporate social features, and using<br />

more powerful professional tools to do the work. Measurement helps you make<br />

smarter investments and helps you use those investments in a smarter way.<br />

Having a social media measurement plan and approach is no longer an aft erthought.<br />

It ’s the smart way to run an organization.<br />

Theme 5: Good Measurement Is Good Governance<br />

As networked nonprofi ts become more skilled in their social media practice,<br />

their boards and senior management are becoming more knowledgeable about<br />

this area. Th ey expect reports showing social media results, and they expect<br />

results expressed in the kind of language that measurement provides. In addition,<br />

foundations and other funders want credible evaluation reports and demonstrations<br />

of impact. Today boards and foundations increasingly include<br />

executives from the for-profi t world who have come to expect actionable data<br />

and standardized measurement systems.<br />

The Secret Sauce for Nonprofi ts 9


10<br />

Theme 6: Data Without Insight Is Just Trivia<br />

Th e key to MomsRising ’s success is that it uses data to refi ne its strategies and<br />

tactics. It has achieved its success not by luck or gut instinct but by using measurement<br />

to make decisions.<br />

MomsRising holds a weekly staff meeting, nicknamed “Metrics Monday.”<br />

Prior to this meeting each program and campaign staff person reviews his or<br />

her results as part of an explicit process of preparation. Th e meeting is actually a<br />

group conversation about what actions to reinforce, how to refi ne messages, and<br />

what other improvements need to be made. Says Rowe-Finkbeiner, “Our dashboards<br />

have multiple views: a high-level view and the ability to drill down into<br />

specifi c campaigns. Th is informs our discussion.”<br />

Theme 7: Measuring Failure Is Part of the Path to Success<br />

Some experiments bomb. Some projects or ideas seem brilliant at fi rst, but when<br />

the results come in the data shows that they simply didn ’t work. Th e staff at<br />

MomsRising give themselves permission to kill these. To remove the stigma of<br />

failure, they do this with humor, calling it a “joyful funeral.” To learn from the<br />

experience, they refl ect on why it didn ’t work.<br />

Theme 8: Incremental Success Is Not Failure<br />

Many organizations experiment with social media. Networked nonprofi ts are<br />

expert at setting up and measuring low-risk experiments and pilots. What sets<br />

MomsRising apart is that the staff don ’t do aimless experiments; they set realistic<br />

expectations for success and measure along the way. What they have learned<br />

is that many times victories happen in baby steps. Th ey know from experience<br />

that many of their campaigns that incorporate social media lead to incremental<br />

successes.<br />

Yet some experiments, actions, or issues provide dramatic results. For example,<br />

a MomsRising interactive educational video garnered over 12 million views,<br />

hundreds of comments, and thousands of new members who signed up or took<br />

action. Rowe-Finkbeiner says, “Th at type of success does not happen every day,<br />

but we need to try for that kind of success every day. We can do it only if we<br />

decide not to pursue things that don ’t work.” Th ey analyze these game- changing<br />

successes to understand how they can be replicated and to make sure they<br />

weren ’t accidents.<br />

Measuring the Networked Nonprofi t


Theme 9: Measurement Is Valuable at Every Level of Functioning<br />

Any nonprofi t can learn to use measurement to make its social media more<br />

eff ective. It is not hard to get started and doesn ’t require expensive soft ware, a<br />

graduate degree, or even an aptitude for mathematics. Th e trick is to start simple<br />

and grow from there. Th is book shows you how to do that.<br />

Networked nonprofi ts and measurement programs exist at all levels of functioning,<br />

from just beginning to fully functioning. Th ese are not one-time addon<br />

upgrades. Th ey are journeys—step-by-step processes of learning by doing.<br />

You can ’t measure any nonprofi t just by clicking a button, or hiring someone, or<br />

doing a single project. You can ’t become a networked nonprofi t that way either.<br />

But you can take the fi rst step to get started.<br />

CONCLUSION<br />

Th is book is fi lled with remarkable social media and nonprofi t success stories,<br />

stories of organizations that have embraced the core principles of being a networked<br />

nonprofi t and measurement. Measurement is the key to improving<br />

social media practice and how to work in a networked way, and this book shows<br />

you how to do just that.<br />

Any nonprofi t can become a networked nonprofi t and learn how to apply the<br />

measurement techniques in this book. From improving your networks, to planning<br />

strategy, to communicating with your membership and boardroom alike,<br />

measurement is the tool that will help you become more effi cient, more eff ective,<br />

and better at saving the world.<br />

The Secret Sauce for Nonprofi ts 11


JASON LANKOW JOSH RITCHIE<br />

Founders of Column Five<br />

fig. 01<br />

12<br />

6<br />

ROSS CROOKS<br />

3<br />

Response<br />

Efficiency<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

ATTRACT<br />

INFORM<br />

INSPIRE<br />

and patterns, expediting<br />

INFOGRAPHICS CS C<br />

AUDIENCE<br />

x<br />

Response<br />

y<br />

Market<br />

Currency<br />

$<br />

¥<br />

£<br />

€<br />

The design and visual<br />

representation of information,<br />

including the visualization<br />

of data, processes, hierarchy,<br />

anatomy, chronology, and other<br />

facts. The use of such graphics<br />

can aid in the detection of trends<br />

comprehension and improving


I N T R O<br />

I<br />

INTRODUCTION<br />

A BRIEF HISTORY OF INFOGRAPHICS<br />

THE PURPOSE OF THIS BOOK<br />

WHAT THIS BOOK IS NOT<br />

A NOTE ON TERMINOLOGY<br />

HOW TO USE THIS BOOK<br />

C O N T E N T S<br />

010<br />

014<br />

018<br />

018<br />

019<br />

024<br />

C H A P T E R<br />

01<br />

IMPORTANCE AND EFFICACY:<br />

WHY OUR BRAINS LOVE INFOGRAPHICS<br />

VARIED PERSPECTIVES ON INFORMATION DESIGN:<br />

A BRIEF HISTORY<br />

OBJECTIVES OF VISUALIZATION<br />

APPEAL<br />

COMPREHENSION<br />

RETENTION<br />

028<br />

031<br />

038<br />

040<br />

044<br />

050


C H A P T E R<br />

02<br />

INFOGRAPHIC FORMATS: CHOOSING THE RIGHT<br />

VEHICLE FOR YOUR MESSAGE<br />

STATIC INFOGRAPHICS<br />

MOTION GRAPHICS<br />

INTERACTIVE INFOGRAPHICS<br />

056<br />

060<br />

074<br />

082<br />

C H A P T E R<br />

03<br />

THE VISUAL STORYTELLING SPECTRUM:<br />

AN OBJECTIVE APPROACH<br />

UNDERSTANDING THE VISUAL STORYTELLING<br />

SPECTRUM<br />

088<br />

090


C H A P T E R<br />

04<br />

EDITORIAL INFOGRAPHICS<br />

WHAT ARE EDITORIAL INFOGRAPHICS?<br />

ORIGINS OF EDITORIAL INFOGRAPHICS<br />

EDITORIAL INFOGRAPHIC PRODUCTION<br />

112<br />

114<br />

122<br />

128<br />

C H A P T E R<br />

05<br />

CONTENT DISTRIBUTION:<br />

SHARING YOUR STORY<br />

POSTING ON YOUR SITE<br />

DISTRIBUTING YOUR CONTENT<br />

PATIENCE PAYS DIVIDENDS<br />

146<br />

149<br />

152<br />

159


C H A P T E R<br />

06<br />

BRAND-CENTRIC INFOGRAPHICS<br />

“ABOUT US” PAGES<br />

PRODUCT INSTRUCTIONS<br />

VISUAL PRESS RELEASES<br />

PRESENTATION DESIGN<br />

ANNUAL REPORTS<br />

160<br />

162<br />

166<br />

167<br />

175<br />

178<br />

C H A P T E R<br />

07<br />

DATA VISUALIZATION INTERFACES<br />

A CASE FOR VISUALIZATION<br />

IN USER INTERFACES<br />

DASHBOARDS<br />

VISUAL DATA HUBS<br />

182<br />

185<br />

186<br />

189


C H A P T E R<br />

08<br />

WHAT MAKES A GOOD INFOGRAPHIC?<br />

UTILITY<br />

SOUNDNESS<br />

BEAUTY<br />

196<br />

199<br />

200<br />

201<br />

C H A P T E R<br />

09<br />

INFORMATION DESIGN BEST PRACTICES<br />

ILLUSTRATION<br />

DATA<br />

VISUALIZATION<br />

202<br />

204<br />

206<br />

210


C H A P T E R<br />

10<br />

THE FUTURE OF INFOGRAPHICS<br />

DEMOCRATIZED ACCESS TO CREATION TOOLS<br />

SOCIALLY GENERATIVE VISUALIZATIONS<br />

PROBLEM SOLVING<br />

BECOMING A VISUAL COMPANY<br />

220<br />

236<br />

237<br />

247<br />

248<br />

FURTHER INFOGRAPHIC GOODNESS<br />

THANK YOU<br />

INDEX<br />

250<br />

252<br />

254


fig. 1.1-1.17<br />

01 02 03 08 09 10<br />

IMPORTANCE AND EFFICACY:<br />

WHY OUR BRAINS LOVE INFOGRAPHICS<br />

VARIED PERSPECTIVES ON INFORMATION DESIGN:<br />

A BRIEF HISTORY<br />

OBJECTIVES OF VISUALIZATION<br />

APPEAL<br />

COMPREHENSION<br />

RETENTION<br />

ESSENTIAL READING CHAPTERS<br />

028<br />

055<br />

C H A P T E R<br />

031<br />

038<br />

040<br />

044<br />

050<br />

01<br />

29


30 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

In De Architectura, Roman architect and engineer Vitruvius<br />

states that there exist three standards to which all structures<br />

should adhere: soundness, utility, and beauty. In their paper, On<br />

the Role of Design in Information Visualization, authors Andrew<br />

Vande Moere and Helen Purchase point out that these standards<br />

can and should also be applied to information design and the<br />

various applications that serve this purpose. They state that a<br />

good visualization should be sound; that is, the design’s form<br />

should be suitable for the information it depicts. It should be<br />

useful, enabling the viewer to derive meaning from it. And of<br />

course, as with all design, it should have aesthetic appeal that<br />

attracts the viewer’s attention and provides a pleasing visual<br />

experience.<br />

This framework provides a solid basis that anyone can<br />

use to judge the value of visualization. However, we will use a<br />

slightly different categorization for the purpose of discussing the<br />

positive effects of infographics. We will refer to beauty as appeal,<br />

and divide utility into the areas of comprehension and retention—<br />

as these are the three basic provisions of all effective verbal or<br />

visual communication methods:<br />

1. Appeal<br />

Communication should engage a voluntary audience.<br />

2. Comprehension<br />

Communication should effectively provide knowledge that<br />

enables a clear understanding of the information.<br />

3. Retention<br />

Communication should impart memorable knowledge.<br />

We will address the need to have a sound design on a<br />

more practical level in Chapter 9 (Information Design Best<br />

Practices) when we discuss principles for the practice of information<br />

design.<br />

Images and graphics should always look appealing and encourage<br />

viewers to engage in the content. It is important that we<br />

examine why this is the case and identify the primary elements<br />

that lead to this appeal. This is certainly the first and potentially<br />

most challenging step in conveying a message: getting the recipient<br />

to commit to hearing what you have to say.<br />

People have long accepted the notion that a picture can<br />

replace a thousand words, and similarly, that a simple graph can<br />

replace a table full of numbers. Basic visualization allows us to<br />

immediately comprehend a message by detecting notable patterns,<br />

trends, and outliers in the data. This chapter will look at<br />

how visualization achieves this feat so easily while other forms<br />

of communication fall short.<br />

Further, we’ll determine how we can make those visualizations<br />

more memorable. The democratization of media, especially<br />

online, has given us a great variety of options that we can use to<br />

consume our news, videos, and funny pictures—and generally<br />

educate ourselves on myriad topics. However, the downside to<br />

this exponential increase in stimuli is that we tend to lose much<br />

of this knowledge shortly after we gain it. While no one should<br />

lament forgetting a mediocre LOLcat, it pays to be memorable—<br />

especially in the business world. Fortunately, connections have<br />

been made recently between the illustrative elements of graphics<br />

and the retention rates of the information displayed—and<br />

these connections can help us all figure out how to have people<br />

remember our material.<br />

This chapter will also discuss the fact that information<br />

design lends itself to achieving these objectives, and will seek<br />

to understand exactly how and why it does this, based on the<br />

way our brains process information. We will not be getting into<br />

too much heavy science; rather, our main goal is to understand<br />

which elements of design help us reach our specific communication<br />

goals, and to leave behind those that do not. For this we will<br />

lean heavily on several key works that have covered the science


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

of visualization exhaustively, most notably Colin Ware’s thought-<br />

fully written Information Visualization: Perception for Design.<br />

Finally, we will identify several of the divergent schools<br />

of thought. We’ve concluded that the differences in these ap-<br />

proaches are largely rooted in the failure to recognize that varied<br />

objectives necessitate varied approaches to the practice. That is,<br />

a design whose primary objective is to give the viewer information<br />

for analysis cannot be considered, designed, or judged in<br />

the same way as one whose primary goal is to be appealing and<br />

entertaining while informing. We will discuss these varied approaches<br />

to each unique objective and elaborate on the practice<br />

in the applications chapters (3, 4, 6, and 7). We will then discuss<br />

how we can use these different methods to serve our three basic<br />

communication provisions: appeal, comprehension, and retention.<br />

VARIED PERSPECTIVES ON INFORMATION<br />

DESIGN: A BRIEF HISTORY<br />

Many a heated debate over the proper approach to information<br />

design is raging online nowadays, which seems to raise the question:<br />

Why all the conflict in the friendly field of pretty picture<br />

creation? The debate surrounds just that: The role of aesthetics<br />

and decoration in the design of infographics. To understand the<br />

underlying tension, a bit of background is necessary.<br />

Science and publishing have used information design and<br />

visualization as a communication tool for centuries. However,<br />

study and development in the field has mostly been dominated<br />

by academics and scientists, who are concerned primarily with<br />

understanding the most effective way to process and present<br />

information to aid viewers’ analyses. These efforts are driven by<br />

loads of research, with highly theoretical consideration; when<br />

practical, the focus is on using software to process and visualize<br />

data sets. For years, only a select few—an educated, knowledge-<br />

able, and skilled group of individuals—have discussed and practiced<br />

visualization in this sense. Then the Internet caught on.<br />

Around 2007, interest in infographics (mostly editorial in nature)<br />

began to grow on the web, as people shared old infographics<br />

like Napoleon’s march on Moscow (Figure 1.1) and newer<br />

creations such as those published by GOOD Magazine (Figure<br />

1.2). Suddenly, a whole new group of “experts” was praising,<br />

sharing, and critiquing (mostly critiquing) any infographic they<br />

could find.<br />

Since then, an impressive number of new infographics have<br />

been created as various industries and areas identified different<br />

applications for their use. One of the most common was to use<br />

editorial infographics for commercial marketing purposes. This<br />

new breed of visual took a bit of a different path, both in format<br />

and content. The long, skinny graphic, designed to fit within a<br />

blog’s width, became ubiquitous and almost instantly synonymous<br />

with the term infographic. These pieces used illustration<br />

and decoration much more than their traditional counterparts.<br />

And as with most marketing efforts, their goal was to use their<br />

content and design to attract attention, interest, and adoration<br />

for the company that produced them—making each brand<br />

a “thought leader” in its industry. This was quite a divergence<br />

from the traditionally stated purposes of the field, which was<br />

purely to use visual representation to aid in the processing and<br />

comprehension of data.<br />

As you can imagine, the new field of infographic designers<br />

often lacked knowledge of best practices for information<br />

design. In other words, people were winging it. As with any field<br />

experiencing this kind of growth, overall quality of designs vary<br />

drastically—which has attracted criticism (read: utter disdain)<br />

from the academic and scientific visualization community.<br />

The Internet had usurped infographics.<br />

31


32 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

Figure 1.1<br />

Flow map of Napoleon’s Russian Campaign of 1812.<br />

Charles Minard.


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

Figure 1.2<br />

You Should Vote Because.<br />

Open, NY for GOOD.<br />

33


34 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

Figure 1.3<br />

E X P L O R A T I V E N A R R A T I V E<br />

ACADEMIC RESEARCH<br />

C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S<br />

A P P L I C A T I O N S<br />

ILLUSTRATIVE<br />

ONLY INCLUDES ELEMENTS THAT REPRESENT DATA DESIGN-FOCUSED<br />

Approaches to infographic design.<br />

MINIMALIST<br />

SEEKS TO COMMUNICATE INFORMATION<br />

IN THE MOST CLEAR, CONCISE MANNER<br />

SCIENCE<br />

BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE<br />

DATA ANALYSIS<br />

SEEKS TO APPEAL TO VIEWER WITH ENGAGING VISUALS<br />

INFORMS AND ENTERTAINS<br />

PUBLICATIONS<br />

BLOGS<br />

CONTENT MARKETING<br />

SALES AND MARKETING MATERIALS


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

The debate over what should be considered an infographic<br />

continues to this day, as people seek to find concrete definitions<br />

in an area that’s constantly becoming more nebulous. Among<br />

the most known and quoted voices in this area is Yale University<br />

statistics professor Edward Tufte, who has written some of<br />

the most acclaimed and comprehensive works on the topic of<br />

information design. Tufte has contributed much to its popular<br />

terminology by coining terms such as chartjunk (unnecessary<br />

graphic elements that do not communicate information) and<br />

developing the data-ink ratio—a measurement of the amount of<br />

information communicated in a graphic as it relates to the total<br />

number of visual elements in it. Tufte’s thoughts on the topic<br />

represent a conservative lean on the spectrum of approaches to<br />

infographic design (Figure 1.3), which is typical of those who<br />

have an academic or scientific background. He argues that any<br />

graphic elements of a design that do not communicate specific<br />

information are superfluous and should be omitted. He believes<br />

that chartjunk such as unnecessary lines, labels, or decorative<br />

elements only distract the viewer and distort the data, thus<br />

detracting from the graphic’s integrity and decreasing its value<br />

(Figure 1.4). Although Tufte does concede that decorative elements<br />

can help editorialize a topic in some instances, his teachings<br />

typically discourage their use.<br />

Figure 1.4<br />

Example of explorative graphic approach using<br />

minimalist design.<br />

35


36 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

The work and writing of British graphic designer Nigel<br />

Holmes characterizes the opposite end of the spectrum, which<br />

supports the heavy use of illustration and decoration to embellish<br />

information design (Figure 1.5). Holmes is best known for<br />

his illustration of editorial “explanation graphics” in Time from<br />

1978 to 1994. The perspective that Holmes’ work supports the<br />

notion that using illustration and visual metaphor to support<br />

and reinforce the topic makes the graphic appealing to viewers.<br />

Recent studies show that these decorative elements can also<br />

aid in the retention of the information presented, which we will<br />

examine later in the chapter.<br />

So which is the correct approach? Both are. What people<br />

often overlook in these debates is the most central issue to any<br />

design: the objective. While Tufte and Holmes might want to<br />

represent the exact same data set, they likely would be doing it<br />

for very different reasons. Tufte would aim to show the information<br />

in the most neutral way possible, to encourage his audience<br />

to analyze it without bias. Conversely, Holmes’s job is to<br />

editorialize the message in order to appeal to the viewer while<br />

communicating the value judgment he wants readers to take<br />

away. Tufte’s communication is explorative; that is, it encourages<br />

the viewer to explore and extract his or her own insights.<br />

Holmes’s, on the other hand, is narrative, and prescribes the<br />

intended conclusion to the viewer. The difference is inherent in<br />

their areas of work, as the objectives of science and research are<br />

much different than those of the publishing world. There’s no<br />

need to establish a universal approach to govern all objectives;<br />

rather, different individuals and industries should develop best<br />

practices unique to each application’s specific goal.


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

Figure 1.5<br />

The Tipsy Turvy Republic of Alcohol.<br />

Nigel Holmes.<br />

37


38 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

COMPREHENSION<br />

APPEAL<br />

1<br />

Figure 1.6<br />

Infographic priorities by application.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Key<br />

Academic/Scientific<br />

Marketing<br />

Editorial<br />

RETENTION<br />

OBJECTIVES OF VISUALIZATION<br />

Of course, we must first look at what each infographic is try-<br />

ing to achieve before we can establish the best practices for its<br />

application. By definition, all information graphics are aimed<br />

at communicating information. What varies is the purpose for<br />

doing so—and understanding this purpose is what determines a<br />

graphic’s priorities. These priorities account for a necessary difference<br />

in approach to each design.<br />

For example, if an infographic is intended to communicate<br />

information in the most clear and unbiased manner possible,<br />

then the first priority for the designer is comprehension, then<br />

retention, followed by appeal (Figure 1.6). This is common in<br />

academic, scientific, and business intelligence applications, as<br />

these areas typically lack any agenda aside from conveying and<br />

having viewers comprehend knowledge. Appeal is less necessary<br />

in this setting, as the viewer most typically needs the information<br />

and seeks it out as a result. Appeal is only useful when it<br />

keeps the viewers’ attention to enable further comprehension.<br />

Such a graphic typically would be used as a resource for information—which<br />

is why retention is also a secondary priority. If<br />

the viewer needs the information and it is a readily accessible<br />

resource, then he or she can revisit it as needed to retrieve it<br />

again. There’s no need for it to take up any more valuable brain<br />

space than necessary.


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

However, a graphic created with a commercial interest<br />

in mind will have much different priorities. Brands primarily<br />

seek to get viewers’ attention and eventually (hopefully) convert<br />

those users into paying customers. As evidenced by Super Bowl<br />

commercials, companies will go to almost any length to get this<br />

attention. The order of priorities of a commercial marketing<br />

graphic would be appeal, retention, and then comprehension.<br />

Brands are looking to catch viewers’ attention and make a lasting<br />

impression—which usually means that viewers’ comprehension<br />

of content is frequently the brands’ last priority. The exception<br />

to this would be infographics that are more focused on the<br />

description of a product or service, such as a visual press release,<br />

since designers in these cases would want the viewer to clearly<br />

understand the material as it relates to the company’s value<br />

proposition. However, being appealing enough to prospective<br />

customers to get them to listen is always goal number one.<br />

Publishers that create editorial infographics have a slightly<br />

different mix: appeal, comprehension, and retention. Since the<br />

appeal of a magazine’s content is what will make it fly off the<br />

newsstand, it shares this top priority—improving sales—with<br />

companies in other industries. A publisher’s survival is based<br />

solely upon its ability to spark readers’ interest. The quality of<br />

content or graphics produced on a consistent basis helps drive<br />

this interest by making a strong impression on readers—and this<br />

is where comprehension comes into play. A publication’s quality<br />

is based on the content it produces, which is intended to help<br />

readers understand a given topic. However, whether or not the<br />

reader can recall that topic with the same level of understanding<br />

one week later is of little importance to a publisher’s bottom line.<br />

The common denominator between commercial and editorial<br />

interests is that they both desire to compel the consumer to take<br />

a specific action.<br />

39


40 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

APPEAL<br />

In 2010, Google CEO Eric Schmidt famously stated that we now<br />

create more information in two days than we created from the<br />

dawn of man up until 2003. This staggering statistic obviously<br />

necessitates clarification of what constitutes information and<br />

its creation. Regardless, the message is clear and uncontested:<br />

humanity is creating and consuming far more information than<br />

it ever has before. As a result, it is increasingly difficult to get<br />

people’s attention, since they’re constantly bombarded with<br />

various stimuli throughout the day—material that ranges from<br />

breaking news to funny photos to Facebook updates. Marketers,<br />

salespeople, brand evangelists, and publishers must all figure<br />

out how to grab a slice of this attention—a task that is becoming<br />

more challenging by the day. How do you get people’s attention,<br />

and keep it long enough to share your message with them? Due<br />

to the sheer volume of “stuff ” out there, it’s a formidable task to<br />

make yours stand out.<br />

How do you appeal to an audience in a world of information<br />

overload in which people constantly face new inputs,<br />

options, and decisions? Ask the world’s biggest company, Apple.<br />

With a cash reserve larger than the total valuation of all but fifty<br />

companies worldwide (as of early 2012), this organization surely<br />

must have some insight into what people like. In the battle for<br />

MP3 player dominance, the iPod came in early and overshadowed<br />

the competition. What was, and still is, the key differentiator<br />

between this and other products? The simple answer is<br />

design. While features such as OS compatibility, memory, and<br />

screen size certainly factor into the decision, the most outstanding<br />

difference between the iPod and its competitors is its<br />

impressive design. As Steve Jobs preached, good design not only<br />

garners additional appeal for an item, it can also actually incite<br />

an emotional reaction. Few can deny the good feeling of pulling<br />

a new Apple product out of the box.<br />

So how does this translate to best practices for information<br />

design? Our consumer culture is becoming increasingly design<br />

focused in areas that extend beyond graphics and consumer<br />

electronics, and that play a role in many other industries. Home<br />

products company IKEA, for example, has made clever furniture<br />

design mainstream. British mega-brand Virgin brought sexiness<br />

to the airline industry, with an interior design that looks<br />

more like a chic lounge than a mode of mass transit. Regardless<br />

of whether they can articulate it—or if they even know it—consumers<br />

connect with these brands because of designs that continues<br />

to attract new fans and followers. The ever-growing media<br />

landscape makes it increasingly important to use great design to<br />

differentiate your brand from the crowd.<br />

Even if your goal is to present information for a purely<br />

analytical objective—that is, without any desired action from the<br />

reader—it is still beneficial to have aesthetic appeal.<br />

DESIGN IS TO DATA AS CHEESE SAUCE IS TO BROCCOLI.<br />

(That analogy is on the SAT, if you don’t remember.) In other<br />

words, people need an added incentive to eat their vegetables—<br />

especially when those vegetables are as cold and dry as research<br />

studies and analytics reports. Presenting information by way of<br />

engaging visuals immediately attracts readers and entices them<br />

to dig deeper into the content.<br />

Possessing this appeal to your audience is not a “nice to<br />

have” for businesses; it is a “must have.” You can’t sell magazines<br />

if no one picks them up, and you can’t sell products if you can’t<br />

get potential customers’ attention.


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

The modern marketer can learn a lot from Horace’s quote<br />

in the introduction, and the notion that delighting people with<br />

your content is a must. It has become a necessity in order to<br />

build trust with your audience and capture their attention often.<br />

We will discuss how to do this further in Chapter 3 (The Visual<br />

Storytelling Spectrum) and Chapter 4 (Editorial Infographics),<br />

in the sections pertaining to Editorial Infographics. For now, it<br />

is important for us to focus on the first step: How to get their<br />

attention in the first place.<br />

Just what appeals to us when we become interested in<br />

consuming information? We are drawn to formats that we see<br />

as efficient, engaging, and entertaining (Figure 1.7). It’s highly<br />

unlikely that someone would prefer to read a lengthy article than<br />

view a multimedia display presenting the same information. A<br />

diversity of media keeps our brains engaged in the material, and<br />

the visualization can enable us to digest it more efficiently and<br />

facilitate understanding.<br />

Figure 1.7<br />

Source: Reprinted with permission of THE ONION.<br />

Copyright 2012, by ONION, INC.<br />

www.theonion.com.<br />

41


42 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

Further, a recent study from the University of Saskatch-<br />

ewan suggests that viewers prefer a greater use of illustration in<br />

visual representations. When presented with both a simple chart<br />

and one that contained an illustration by the aforementioned<br />

Nigel Holmes (Figure 1.8), participants consistently opted for<br />

the Holmes version in a number of different areas (Figure 1.9).<br />

While this conclusion—that a more dynamic and stimulating<br />

visual is preferable to a plain one—seems somewhat obvious,<br />

it’s important to consider in design approach. It’s not enough to<br />

make your content visual; you must also make it visually interesting.<br />

You can do this by using representative iconography,<br />

illustrative metaphor, or relevant decorative framing mechanisms—all<br />

powerful tools for communicating your message.<br />

However, you always want to remember your objective. The<br />

appropriateness of decorative and illustrative elements will vary<br />

based on an infographic’s application and use. For example, an<br />

editorial graphic in the Sunday newspaper on the topic of corporate<br />

profits could find great use in the illustration of a rotund<br />

executive sitting atop a throne of gold bullion. Shareholders, on<br />

the other hand, might not share the same appreciation for such<br />

a work of art if it adorned the pages of an annual report containing<br />

similar data.<br />

If used incorrectly, decorative elements have the potential<br />

to distract the viewer from the actual information, which<br />

detracts from the graphic’s total value. Mastering this execution<br />

and finding the balance between appeal and clarity can be a nuanced<br />

process. We will discuss the proper use of illustration and<br />

decorative elements further in Chapter 9 (Information Design<br />

Best Practices), where we’ll cover the principles and best<br />

practices of information design.<br />

MONSTROUS COSTS<br />

Total House and Senate campaign expenditures, in millions<br />

1972 ‘74 ‘76 ‘78 ‘80 ‘82 est<br />

Figure 1.8<br />

Illustrative Nigel Holmes graphic with simplified equivalent.<br />

$300<br />

250<br />

200<br />

150<br />

100<br />

50<br />

0


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

KEY<br />

COUNT OF RESPONSES<br />

20<br />

18<br />

16<br />

14<br />

12<br />

10<br />

8<br />

6<br />

4<br />

2<br />

HOLMES PLAIN<br />

MOST PREFERRED<br />

MOST ENJOYED<br />

MOST ATTRACTIVE<br />

EASIEST TO DESCRIBE<br />

EASIEST TO REMEMBER<br />

EASIEST TO REMEMBER DETAILS<br />

MOST ACCURATE TO DESCRIBE<br />

Figure 1.9<br />

University of Saskatchewan study results.<br />

FASTEST TO DESCRIBE<br />

MOST ACCURATE TO REMEMBER<br />

43<br />

FASTEST TO REMEMBER


44 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

COMPREHENSION<br />

You often hear someone claim to be a “visual learner,” which<br />

simply means that they need to see something in order to understand<br />

it. Researchers have studied and modeled learning styles in<br />

a number of different ways over the past several decades, and the<br />

origins of this specific visual style of thinking can be traced to<br />

Neil Fleming’s VAK model. One of the most commonly known<br />

and quoted models of thinking, it states that when comprehending<br />

information, people learn best with one of three types of<br />

stimuli:<br />

V I S U A L<br />

A U D I T O R Y<br />

K I N E S T H E T I C O R T A C T I L E<br />

Visual learners best comprehend information that is presented<br />

in pictures, diagrams, charts, and the like; auditory learners do<br />

best when hearing this information spoken; and tactile learners<br />

need to touch and learn by doing. While this theory is commonly<br />

accepted, it has been highly scrutinized in the scientific<br />

community, which posits that there is little to no evidence that<br />

any one preferred method of learning is actually more beneficial<br />

for comprehending and retaining information.<br />

Regardless of this ongoing debate, it is important to consider<br />

the media structure and channels through which people<br />

obtain information. It is less important to identify how people<br />

prefer to learn, and instead figure out how they are actually<br />

learning—and these experiences are occurring increasingly online<br />

today, a channel based primarily on visual display. The use<br />

of audio-only content on the web is relatively minimal outside of<br />

music sites—and until virtual reality is able to provide interactive,<br />

tactile experiences, the majority of information on the<br />

Internet will be communicated visually.<br />

Given that people are more likely to consume information<br />

visually, the value of using visuals in our communication—instead<br />

of just words—is truly significant. As Colin Ware states in<br />

Information Visualization: Perception for Design,<br />

“The human visual system is a pattern seeker of enormous<br />

power and subtlety. The eye and the visual cortex of the brain<br />

form a massive parallel processor that provides the highestbandwidth<br />

channel into human cognitive centers. At higher<br />

levels of processing, perception and cognition are closely<br />

interrelated, which is why the words understanding and seeing<br />

are synonymous (p. xxi).”


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

Ware goes on to state that we are able to acquire more<br />

information through our visual system than we do through all<br />

our other senses combined (p. 2). This is largely because visualizations<br />

contain certain characteristics called preattentive<br />

attributes, which our eyes perceive very quickly (within 250<br />

milliseconds) and our brains process with impressive accuracy—<br />

without any active attention on our part. Force-feeding for the<br />

mind—how convenient! To use a common illustration of this<br />

concept, refer to Figure 1.10. Try to count the number of 7s in<br />

the number set. How long did that take?<br />

Now, try the same exercise with Figure 1.11. A color change<br />

makes recognition almost instant, since color is one of several<br />

preattentive attributes, displayed in Figure 1.12. All visualizations<br />

contain such attributes, and using them properly to convey<br />

information is the key to visual communication. Our brains are<br />

able to recognize and process many of these visual cues simultaneously<br />

through a course of action called preattentive processing.<br />

All this action precedes any cognitive attempts to focus on<br />

any specific area; rather, it is purely involuntary and will simply<br />

proceed wherever our eyes are pointed.<br />

These natural functions that result from the connection<br />

between the eyes and brain can be quite handy when we want to<br />

communicate to people who don’t have a lot of time—or a long<br />

attention span. We know that we can use these visuals to attract<br />

people by appealing to them aesthetically, but we can also<br />

decrease the amount of time it takes them to comprehend the<br />

message by using these same tools.<br />

That said, you can’t tell a story through color alone, or craft<br />

compelling messaging using only shapes and symbols. So how<br />

do words factor into information design? Within the context of<br />

a society that speaks the same language, words—as compared to<br />

symbols—have a distinct advantage in terms of familiarity. No<br />

set of symbols has universal ubiquity; rather, most are isolated<br />

to specific social or cultural settings. This necessitates a costversus-benefit<br />

analysis of using visualization instead of verbal<br />

communication. Symbols can take longer to interpret than language<br />

when conveying a concept to someone who is unfamiliar<br />

with the symbols. In this case, communication should favor text<br />

descriptions. To someone who knows the symbols, however, this<br />

comprehension process is far easier; in this case, communication<br />

should rely more upon visualization methods.<br />

Ware provides a sound breakdown of the general value of<br />

each medium by explaining that “images are better for spatial<br />

structures, location, and detail, whereas words are better for<br />

representing procedural information, logical conditions, and<br />

abstract verbal concepts” (p. 304). The practical reality is that we<br />

don’t need to choose between the two. The strongest visualizations<br />

are those that are supported by descriptions as well as narratives,<br />

especially in editorial applications. Using words in this<br />

way helps to bring both personality and clarity to an infographic.<br />

45


46 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

Figure 1.10<br />

Preattentive Processing Test 1.


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

Figure 1.11<br />

Preattentive Processing Test 2.<br />

47


48 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

F O R M<br />

S I Z E<br />

F O R M<br />

E N C L O S U R E<br />

Figure 1.12<br />

Preattentive attributes.<br />

F O R M<br />

O R I E N TAT I O N<br />

F O R M<br />

S H A P E<br />

C O L O R<br />

I N T E N S I T Y


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

F O R M<br />

L I N E L E N G T H<br />

F O R M<br />

C U R V AT U R E<br />

F O R M<br />

L I N E W I D T H<br />

F O R M<br />

A D D E D M A R K S<br />

C O L O R S P AT I A L P O S I T I O N<br />

H U E<br />

2 - D P O S I T I O N<br />

49


50 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

RETENTION<br />

The third main benefit of using infographics in communication<br />

is their ability to help people retain information, as the graphics<br />

are able to extend the reach of our memory systems. Visualizations<br />

do this by instantly and constantly drawing upon nonvisual<br />

information that’s stored in our long-term memory (Ware,<br />

p. 352). The human brain can recall familiar symbols, scenes,<br />

and patterns, allowing us to make rapid connections to already<br />

stored information and to quickly comprehend what we’re seeing.<br />

This prompts the question: Which visualization methods<br />

best serve recall for various different types of memory?<br />

There are three main types of memory that relate to viewing<br />

images. The iconic memory is the snapshot of a scene that<br />

you retain for a brief instant after looking at something. It is<br />

stored for less than a second, unless it is analyzed and connected<br />

to something that is already stored in your brain (Sperling via<br />

Ware, p. 352). Long-term memory stores information from our<br />

experiences that we will retain for long periods of time, and<br />

from which we draw upon in order to process new information.<br />

Long-term memory is further divided into three areas:<br />

episodic memory, semantic memory, and procedural memory.<br />

Episodic memory is the primary device for recalling images and<br />

scenes that we’ve experienced, and the feelings associated with<br />

those experiences. Semantic memory enables us to recall knowledge<br />

that has no specific context or experience associated with<br />

it, and could generally be considered the storage of “common<br />

knowledge.” Procedural memories are those that recall processes<br />

of doing—such as typing or tying a tie—that we access involuntarily<br />

without conscious thought. These memories often build on<br />

themselves, which is why you are able to recall that the “M” arm<br />

position comes after the “Y” when the Village People are played<br />

at a wedding reception.<br />

Visual working memory is what lies in between iconic and<br />

long-term memory, and is most essential to processing visual<br />

information. When we see an object that requires further attention,<br />

we move it from iconic to visual working memory. Visual<br />

working memory then calls upon semantic memory (long term,<br />

nonvisual) to understand its meaning. All this happens in about<br />

100 milliseconds (Ware, p. 353). With our vision transmitting<br />

massive amounts of information into the brain, and the brain<br />

accessing its stored knowledge to provide context, we are able to<br />

understand much more quickly than with any other combination<br />

of sensory perception and processing.<br />

So what visual elements should be used to best ensure<br />

that individuals store this understanding for long-term recall?<br />

While academics have typically argued against using decorative<br />

elements in information design—claiming that they only serve<br />

to distract the viewer—this isn’t always the case. A very interesting<br />

finding from a University of Saskatchewan study conducted<br />

by Scott Bateman and his colleagues from the Department of<br />

Computer Science uncovered that a more illustrative approach<br />

to design actually benefits information recall significantly. All<br />

participants were shown a set of alternating graphics, some plain<br />

and some in Holmes’s illustrative style, such as that depicted<br />

in Figure 1.8. The researchers split the participants into two<br />

groups: half were part of an immediate recall group, and the<br />

other half were in the long-term recall group. After seeing all<br />

the graphics, the immediate recall group played a five-minute<br />

game to clear their visual and linguistic memory. They were then<br />

questioned regarding the information in each graphic. The longterm<br />

recall group was scheduled to come back for their recall<br />

session two to three weeks following the initial observation.<br />

Each participant had to answer questions about the<br />

graphic’s subject, the categories displayed within it, and the general<br />

trend of the chart. They also had to describe whether there<br />

was a value judgment presented in the chart; that is, a perceived


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

opinion that the graphic’s creator had presented.<br />

The immediate recall group showed no significant differ-<br />

ences between Holmes’s graphics and their plain counterparts in<br />

terms of how well they’d retained information about the subject,<br />

categories, or trends (Figure 1.13). Yet there was a significant<br />

difference in their identification of whether a value judgment<br />

had been presented. However, the long-term recall group experienced<br />

notable differences in their ability to recall information<br />

in all areas (Figure 1.14). The subjects, categories, trends, and<br />

value messages within Holmes’s graphics stuck with users more<br />

prominently after two to three weeks.<br />

KEY<br />

SUM OF SCORES<br />

16<br />

14<br />

12<br />

10<br />

8<br />

6<br />

4<br />

2<br />

HOLMES PLAIN<br />

SUBJECT CATEGORIES TREND VALUE MESSAGE<br />

I M M E D I A T E R E C A L L<br />

Figure 1.13: Results of immediate recall group.<br />

Bateman et al. offer up three possible explanations for the<br />

findings in this experiment:<br />

1. Additional imagery enabled people to encode informationmore<br />

deeply, as there were more visual items to recall and use<br />

memory to draw upon.<br />

2. The variety of Holmes’s style gave it a unique advantage in<br />

being memorable over the style of the plain graphics, which<br />

all had a similar look.<br />

3. The user preference (as described earlier in the Appeal section)<br />

provided a hidden factor: The participants’ emotional<br />

responses to the graphic, combined with the imagery used,<br />

helped to solidify the image in their memories.<br />

SUM OF SCORES<br />

16<br />

14<br />

12<br />

10<br />

8<br />

6<br />

4<br />

2<br />

0<br />

SUBJECT CATEGORIES TREND VALUE MESSAGE<br />

L O N G - T E R M R E C A L L<br />

Figure 1.14: Results of long-term recall group.<br />

51


52 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

So what does all of this tell us about using infographics,<br />

particularly for commercial objectives? Graphics that contain<br />

visual embellishment beyond the information being displayed<br />

may be superior not only in terms of appeal, but also in their<br />

ability to ensure that viewers understand and retain your message—which<br />

is likely value-based. Appealing to someone not<br />

only aesthetically but also emotionally prompts a deeper connection<br />

with the information, which makes them more likely to<br />

remember it.<br />

While design style is something that varies greatly and<br />

often cannot be categorized neatly, there are certain devices that<br />

we can use to facilitate understanding and retention. We refer to<br />

these collectively as illustrative design:<br />

1. Visual Metaphor<br />

We use this often at Column Five and it works incredibly well<br />

when implemented effectively. You can do this by containing<br />

information within a framing mechanism that is indicative of<br />

your subject matter (Figure 1.15).<br />

2. Symbols and Iconography<br />

The success that these achieve depends largely on cultural<br />

context. Your audience must universally understand your<br />

icons and symbols for them to be effective. When this is the<br />

case, they can provide a great communication shortcut by using<br />

visual elements in the place of verbal explanation (Figure<br />

1.16).<br />

3. Decorative Framing<br />

Using design elements that appeal to your target audience<br />

lets them connect with infographics on an emotional level,<br />

thereby deepening their interest in and retention of the information<br />

(Figure 1.17).<br />

Illustrative design can also have its negative effects, so it is<br />

important to determine when it might potentially detract from<br />

rather than support your message. The main pitfall here is the<br />

designer’s accidental or intentional distortion of the display of<br />

data. Illustrations should complement visualization elements,<br />

but never at the expense of misleading the viewer. Whether<br />

intentional or not, you always want to avoid altering accurate<br />

information representation.


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

Figure 1.15<br />

Example of visual metaphor.<br />

Column Five for GOOD.<br />

53


54 I N F O G R A P H I C S<br />

Figure 1.16<br />

Example of use of symbols and iconography. Column Five<br />

for Microsoft.


I M P O R TA N C E A N D E F F I C A C Y<br />

Figure 1.17<br />

Example of decorative framing.<br />

Column Five for GOOD.<br />

55


Contents<br />

1 How One Man Changed a Billion-Dollar Brand 1<br />

2 Marketing Is a Verb 4<br />

3 Companies Aren’t Awesome; People Are 7<br />

4 Remarry Your Current Customers 11<br />

5 The Sun Rises Online 14<br />

6 Sporting Event Awesome 17<br />

7 I Think Geeks Rule 20<br />

8 DKNY 4 U 2 24<br />

9 PR Stands for People React 27<br />

10 The Red Cross Is Getting Slizzard 30<br />

11 Grand Rapids Serves Up Some Humble Pie 34<br />

12 The One Thing More Delicious Than Ice Cream 36<br />

v


vi Contents<br />

13 How to Apologize to a Woman 40<br />

14 How to Ship Out Your Reputation, and Then Return It 42<br />

15 You Can’t Ignore What You Hate 44<br />

16 The Only Good Use for QR Codes 46<br />

17 Benefit of the Brand Doubt 48<br />

18 How to Spice Up an Old Brand 51<br />

19 How Manya Made Vegas Awesome 53<br />

20 Fractional Reaction 56<br />

21 Third Circle 58<br />

22 Reflecting on Awesome 62<br />

23 Part Man, Part Machine, All Crowdfunded 65<br />

24 The Social Media ROI Conversation 68<br />

25 Before Social ROI 71<br />

26 Connect Outside Your Field of Vision 74<br />

27 Peripheral Referrals 76<br />

28 Seven Dollars and an iROI, Lessons in Social Return on<br />

Investment 78<br />

29 Thirty Tips for Speakers 81<br />

30 Rocking a Panel 87<br />

31 Shedding Some Social Pounds 90


Contents vii<br />

32 You Don’t Need the Man If You Are the Man 92<br />

33 The Hall of Fame 95<br />

34 Mr. Happy Crack 97<br />

35 Pimp My Lift 100<br />

36 Nightmares 102<br />

37 An Awesome Sweatband 111<br />

38 Moncton Snow blower 114<br />

39 Calgary Philharmonic 118<br />

40 A Unicorn Fighting a Bear 120<br />

41 Awesome End 122<br />

Awesome Acknowledgements 124


1<br />

How One Man Changed a<br />

Billion-Dollar Brand<br />

Every employee is your brand ambassador, your marketer, and the face<br />

of your company.<br />

I was in Hartford at the Hilton Garden Inn, on stop number eight<br />

of my 30-city UnBook Tour to promote UnMarketing, Stop Marketing,<br />

Start Engaging. The tour was amazing, but it also meant that I was<br />

living on airplanes and in hotels.<br />

I rolled out of bed and headed downstairs for breakfast around<br />

9:45 am. Did I mention I’m not a morning person? It’s actually one<br />

of the great problems I have in life: I love breakfast, and I hate<br />

mornings. The lobby had a breakfast buffet, and I’m not talking about<br />

the ‘‘continental’’ breakfast that most hotels throw in as a bonus with<br />

some Danish and something that resembles juice. This was a full spread<br />

of eggs, bacon, sausage, hash browns, cereal, bagels, you name it. I<br />

was pretty impressed with myself for being up in time for this feast,<br />

especially after crossing the continent the day before.<br />

1


2 The Book of Business Awesome<br />

I told the chef that I’d like eggs, bacon, sausage, and hash browns<br />

(shut it, foodies); grabbed a juice; and took a seat. As soon as I sat<br />

down, I noticed they turned off the lights around the buffet. Score! I<br />

got there just in time.<br />

Apparently not.<br />

I dug in to my food, and it was bad. Old and cold. A bad<br />

combination for anything in life, let alone breakfast meats. I forced<br />

down some bacon, and after testing each of the other items, I couldn’t<br />

continue. The waitress walked over with my bill and placed it on the<br />

table, without saying a word.<br />

Most of the time in situations like these, what do we do? We take<br />

out our phones and share our bad experiences with the world, all the<br />

while quietly accepting them in real life. Most people would just allow<br />

this to happen and walk away, but I called her over. If I owned this<br />

business, I would want to know if something was up.<br />

‘‘Hi, the food was really bad. It was cold and old.’’<br />

She just looked at me, not knowing what to do, and mentally took<br />

out the customer service playbook and said the ‘‘right’’ thing.<br />

‘‘I’ll go get the manager.’’<br />

And she walked away. I never asked for the manager or to have the<br />

bill taken care of. The manager came over and was nice and offered to<br />

have the chef make an omelet or something special for me. I declined,<br />

letting him know I really wasn’t hungry anymore. I explained to him<br />

that I wasn’t looking for a freebie but thought he needed to know. He<br />

picked up the bill and said they’d take care of it and apologized again.<br />

This is where the customer service ‘‘apology’’ usually ends for 99.9<br />

percent of businesses in the hospitality industry. Really, to be great at<br />

customer service, you need to be only mediocre, because everyone else<br />

sucks.<br />

But not here.<br />

The sous-chef, Forbes, ran out, stopped me from walking out, and<br />

looked shaken. Not in a shaken way like he’d been chewed out by<br />

anyone, but a sincere look of being upset. Did I mention he was about<br />

6 foot 4 inches and 220 pounds? And that he ran at me? I have to<br />

admit, for a moment there, I regretted giving my feedback at all ...<br />

He caught up to me and said, ‘‘Sir, I’m terribly sorry about your<br />

food this morning. A few things, although not excuses, we didn’t know<br />

until we were cleaning up that the water underneath the food trays


How One Man Changed a Billion-Dollar Brand 3<br />

that keep everything warm was gone, hence why it was cold. And I<br />

also should have never given you the food that was sitting out that<br />

long; I could have made you something fresh right there, but I thought<br />

you looked like you were in a hurry. Regardless, I’m terribly sorry; this<br />

is not how we operate, and we’d like another chance to make it up<br />

to you.’’<br />

Wow.<br />

This guy gave a damn that a guest had a subpar experience and he<br />

needed to make it right. We can’t stop screw-ups, only how we remedy<br />

them. And the solution usually isn’t hard. Most people who complain<br />

just want to feel validated, able to walk away feeling that someone has<br />

heard and understood them.<br />

I didn’t threaten to ‘‘tweet about it’’ or use ‘‘Do you know who I<br />

think I am?’’ I was just another person staying at the hotel. He could<br />

have simply talked about how much of a moron I was to his coworkers<br />

or brushed it off by saying, ‘‘You can’t please everyone.’’ He truly cared<br />

that they screwed up. He owned it. He changed my view of the Hilton<br />

Garden Inn and the Hilton overall. And he didn’t have to.<br />

To me, Forbes is the Hilton. Not their mission statement or logo.<br />

Every employee is your brand ambassador, your marketer, and the<br />

face of your company. Employees make a difference. Forbes made a<br />

difference for a billion dollar hotel brand to me.<br />

As I walked away and headed back up to my room he said, ‘‘I’d like<br />

to make this right.’’<br />

And my reply was, ‘‘You already did.’’


2<br />

Marketing Is a Verb<br />

We need to hand off the branding baton to everyone in our company;<br />

everyone is a marketer.<br />

Welcome to the Awesome side, fine reader. If you’ve chosen to start<br />

reading from this side of the book it’s for one of three reasons:<br />

1. You are the optimist, who sees the glass full because you just filled<br />

up the second half. You may or may not own a shirt with a unicorn<br />

on it.<br />

2. You are the pessimist, so jaded by years in business that you<br />

are just hoping this side will give you hope and save your soul.<br />

You will last about three chapters before you switch over to the<br />

UnAwesome side, laughing diabolically ...until you realize there<br />

is a part written about you in there. (By the way, the author fits<br />

here with you into Choice 2.)<br />

3. You fall into the group thinking, ‘‘Wait! There’s another side to<br />

this book!?!?’’ Or you bought this purely for the Awesome. Or<br />

you’re my mom. Or you’re reading this in the bookstore, and you<br />

4


Marketing Is a Verb 5<br />

haven’t even noticed the other side yet. You’re waiting for the<br />

stock clerk to get you the latest Twilight novel, aren’t you? Spoiler,<br />

he dies at the end. 1<br />

Whatever the reason, I’m glad you’re here. To be awesome at<br />

business, you first have to realize that it can’t be a policy. You can’t<br />

mandate being awesome; you can’t demand it. You have to hire<br />

awesome. You have to inspire awesome in others, and you have to be<br />

your awesome self. Awesome has to go through every level and every<br />

step of your company. Just like creating a great poster for a crappy<br />

movie doesn’t make the movie any better, fantastic advertising for a<br />

horrible product won’t change how people react once they use it. A<br />

known product name with a horrible return policy will hurt the original<br />

product. Every point of contact with your market is an opportunity to<br />

show them just how great your business really is.<br />

Marketing is a verb. Awesome is a verb. You have to do it. People<br />

may come in because of great marketing, but they come back because<br />

of the experience. Loyalty isn’t built through plastic cards; it’s built<br />

through amazing experiences. No one ever said, ‘‘This restaurant was<br />

horrible, but did you see those ads in the paper!? We have to come<br />

back!!’’ It’s our front lines that engage the market, and without them,<br />

our marketing means nothing. And sadly, although it is our front line’’<br />

who have the first and most important contact with customers, they are<br />

often the lowest paid and least appreciated. We need to hand off the<br />

branding baton to everyone in our company; everyone is a marketer.<br />

According to some really brilliant research about customer service<br />

by Nobel Prize Winner Daniel Kahneman, as companies we should<br />

be focusing on the ‘‘Peak End Rule.’’ 2 We judge our experiences with<br />

companies on the peak experience—either the worst or the best—and<br />

the end result. When people think about your business, they’re going<br />

to focus on how good or how bad things got and on how everything<br />

worked out in the end. A really great salesperson who helps with an<br />

exchange can erase negative experiences along the way. The long wait<br />

in line and the bad music in your changing room are both forgotten.<br />

1 #TeamWesleySnipes, http://bit.ly/UnTwilight.<br />

2 http://onforb.es/PeakEndRule


6 The Book of Business Awesome<br />

As long as you can out-awesome mistakes and resolve issues, customers<br />

will have a positive brand experience. Think about that.<br />

We spend a great deal of time and energy focusing on what our<br />

competitors are doing when we should be working on improving<br />

ourselves, especially our front lines. We pour money into designing<br />

logos and brochures while we allow poor customer service to be the<br />

norm. We listen to statistics about when we should schedule our<br />

newsletter and ignore feedback from our employees. Did you know<br />

that, on average, a company saves more than $7,000 for each employee<br />

suggestion that is put into practice? These are the employees we value<br />

least, with the highest turn over. We brush them off, when we need to<br />

be handing them the brand baton.<br />

In The Book of Business Awesome, we are going to look at how we<br />

can ensure we hand off the brand baton to every part of our business.<br />

We will look at how marketing, human resources, and public relations<br />

are all really under the same roof in business.<br />

Some people will ask if this is another social media book. The<br />

way I see it, social media is simply another term for communication.<br />

Everything about business is communication. Whether you’re trying<br />

to build brand awareness, improve customer service, or fill a vacancy,<br />

it’s about people and their impact, good or bad, on our bottom line. So<br />

yes, this book is about people—what they say and what they do.<br />

As you are reading, I want you to be thinking about how we can<br />

get better. Everyone is always jumping ahead to what’s new, but I want<br />

us to make this the year of getting better at what we’re already doing.<br />

We need to shed a few social pounds and stop trying to add more social<br />

media networks to our repertoire. Instead, let’s get better where we<br />

already exist. Social media isn’t about how many places you can be.<br />

It’s about being amazing where you are.


3<br />

Companies Aren’t Awesome;<br />

People Are<br />

We can’t all be Zappos.com or work somewhere supercool like Google.<br />

And I’m glad that we can’t, because if we were all the same, we’d all be<br />

perfectly ordinary.<br />

When we see awesome companies at work around us, a few things can<br />

happen. As customers, we love them for it. They make the day-to-day<br />

chore of being a consumer so much more fun. We’ve all seen enough<br />

boring commercials. We actually spend time and money on ways to<br />

avoid being sold to, so the last thing we’re looking for is another boring<br />

sales pitch. Let’s be honest, we get excited as customers when we’re just<br />

not treated badly. We can’t help but lose our minds when something<br />

great happens.<br />

As business owners, the effects are a little more complicated.<br />

For me, seeing and reading about the great things people do in<br />

business makes me feel like I can do great things too. That’s why I love<br />

to share them. But sometimes, these examples can be intimidating and<br />

7


8 The Book of Business Awesome<br />

even limiting. It’s very easy to see a company in action and think that<br />

you’ll never be able to do the things it can do. Whether it’s because<br />

you’re just getting started, you don’t have the same budget or resources,<br />

your industry isn’t cool enough, or you’re sure your customers wouldn’t<br />

like it, other people’s awesomeness can sometimes make us feel a<br />

little small.<br />

Too often, feeling intimidated becomes our excuse not to be<br />

awesome.<br />

I want to make sure that as you read this book you put yourself in<br />

the picture. Don’t be overwhelmed or think that you need to mimic<br />

the stories I’m going to share. Instead, be inspired to find your own<br />

brand of awesome, that only you can bring to the table.<br />

I know what you’re thinking, and I want you to know you’re<br />

absolutely right. We can’t all be Zappos.com or work somewhere super<br />

cool like Google. And I’m glad that we can’t, because if we were all the<br />

same, we’d all be perfectly ordinary. We spend too much time trying to<br />

be like others in business, when we should be focusing on finding our<br />

own story. I promise you, we all can find our window of awesome in<br />

our job and our companies and great things can happen. That’s what<br />

this book is all about.<br />

So how do we keep ourselves from being intimidated or overwhelmed?Business<br />

is built on relationships—on the simple act of<br />

people interacting and engaging with others. And that all starts with<br />

the individual, with you. In every great business story there is an individual<br />

who started it all. Every great marketing campaign started with<br />

someone deciding to take a chance and step outside the norm. The<br />

outstanding customer service a company is known for was executed<br />

one contact at a time and started with one voice deciding to care.<br />

They may not have always executed it on their own. But at the start<br />

there was one.<br />

I call this situational awesome, and we can all do it. We have access<br />

to it every day—in our attitudes and in our interactions. It starts with<br />

the passion we have for our work and our product. It can be as simple<br />

as just giving a damn about our customers. Sometimes it’s the smile<br />

we give across a store counter to someone looking for a little help. It<br />

might sound simple, but this is the start of every great story I share in


Companies Aren’t Awesome; People Are 9<br />

this book. Someone decided to care or to try. This can be a cashier at<br />

a pet store, a janitor, or a volunteer.<br />

Next we have occupational awesome, which although similar to<br />

situational awesome, comes with a little more definition.<br />

Occupational awesome is about our roles and how they define<br />

windows of awesome for us. For example, customer service agents<br />

have a special opportunity to make amazing things happen in their<br />

companies every day. As we will speak about often in the chapters<br />

ahead, frontline workers, especially, are capable of making a huge<br />

impact on brand perception, because their jobs give them so many<br />

opportunities to engage with customers.<br />

Other positions in a company come with their own opportunities.<br />

Although it might be easy to assume that more senior positions would<br />

have an easier time finding opportunities for awesome, this isn’t always<br />

true. Every single job in a company is important, and every single<br />

person a part of your branding and marketing.<br />

Next up, we have divisional awesome. This is all about groups and<br />

the amazing things that can happen when people come together and<br />

the results are truly greater than the sum of their parts. Here we also<br />

start to see the opportunity for situational or occupational awesome<br />

to start spreading throughout a company. This is where one person’s<br />

passion can start to shape an entire company. And when one division<br />

of a company starts to shine, it’s hard for the others to ignore.<br />

And last, but certainly not least, is institutional awesome. This is<br />

where you find companies that, through the work of individuals and<br />

groups, have created brand-wide amazingness. These are the companies<br />

known for their outstanding customer service, products, services, and<br />

campaigns.<br />

This level has an especially powerful role to play, through hiring<br />

and human resources. Here, a company can create opportunities for<br />

awesome at every level, from the individual up. At the institutional<br />

level we also see what public relations (PR) can do for a brand and<br />

how awesome PR will not only do damage control but will make the<br />

company come out looking even better than it did before the mistake.<br />

Together, all these levels become your brand voice, the message,<br />

and the image people think of when they think about your company. No


10 The Book of Business Awesome<br />

matter whether your business is a one-person show just getting started<br />

or a multinational corporation, whether you are a frontline worker<br />

or a top-level executive, you can create awesome. The individual is<br />

the start.<br />

How are you going to be awesome today? 1<br />

1Scratch that. You’re reading this book, which makes you already awesome by default.<br />

High-five.


Contents<br />

1 Usually High Call Volume 1<br />

2 Marketing Is a Verb 3<br />

3 Customers Don’t See Silos 6<br />

4 How to Flip Off Your Customers 8<br />

5 Bright Shiny Objects 11<br />

6 QR Codes 15<br />

7 Groupon, Social Commerce Psychology, and Too Many<br />

Cupcakes 17<br />

8 What Is the ROI of a Pin? 21<br />

9 Skippy the Social Scaler 23<br />

10 Mobile Madness 25<br />

11 Data Is Dangerous 31<br />

12 Toyota Punk’d 34<br />

v


vi Contents<br />

13 Kids Don’t Play in Crappy Playgrounds 36<br />

14 The UnSilent Minority 38<br />

15 Respect the Inbox 40<br />

16 Lies Internet Marketers Tell 44<br />

17 Warm Spam 49<br />

18 Social Is Human 53<br />

19 Human Is Social 56<br />

20 Lehigh Valley 61<br />

21 Outrage Is Contagious 63<br />

22 Check Your Facts 66<br />

23 Manning the Wall 71<br />

24 Franklin Goose 74<br />

25 Boners BBQ 76<br />

26 Cooks Source 83<br />

27 Social Extortion 85<br />

28 ConAgra 88<br />

29 800 Million Not Listening 90<br />

30 5 Percent of Companies Are Awesome 93<br />

31 Win a Chance to Ruin Your Brand 95<br />

32 How We’re Killing Facebook 100


Contents vii<br />

33 Hall of Shame 103<br />

34 Kenneth Cole 105<br />

35 Newt Gingrich 108<br />

36 Airline UnAwesome 114<br />

37 Political UnAwesome 118<br />

38 Chrysler 122<br />

39 Dilbert 124<br />

40 The UnAwesome End 126<br />

UnAwesome Acknowledgments 128


1<br />

Usually High Call Volume<br />

What we do trumps what we say every time.<br />

I have to call my bank a lot. Because of all the travelling I do, they<br />

like me to keep in touch about where I am. You know, to make sure<br />

those withdrawals in Vegas one day, lunch out at home a few days<br />

later, and then a taxi in Chicago the next week are all on the up and<br />

up. I would check up on me too.<br />

Now they always say their mission is customer satisfaction. In<br />

fact, my bank’s number one core value, as listed on their website,<br />

is to ‘‘Deliver Legendary Customer Experiences.’’ Legendary. You see<br />

that and you know that you are important to them. The customer is<br />

the bank.<br />

The problem is, when I call, I get this message while I wait<br />

for my legendary customer service experience: ‘‘We are experiencing<br />

unusually high call volumes.’’ You expect this sometimes, right? I get<br />

it; we’re all busy. The thing is, for the past five years, every single<br />

time I call, I hear this message. And I got to wondering, when exactly<br />

1


2 The Book of Business UnAwesome<br />

do unusually high call volumes become the usual high call volumes?<br />

There is no such thing as a 24-hour-long peak time for calls.<br />

Theysaythatthecustomerismostimportant,thatserviceis<br />

number one, but they act differently. You are treated as though you<br />

aren’t important at all. If I were really number one, they would staff<br />

their phone line properly. They would make it easier for me to use<br />

their services around the world. There would be no hoops, or at least<br />

very few, for me to jump through.<br />

It usually costs a pretty penny for someone to write a company’s<br />

mission statement, find a frame that’s just right, and hang it on the<br />

wall. But if your actions contradict those values hanging on your wall<br />

or posted on your website, I suggest not investing in a nice frame,<br />

because the statement is worthless. In fact, you are no longer going to<br />

be writing your mission statement—because your customer is going to<br />

rewrite it for you. What we do trumps what we say every time.<br />

Welcome to The Book of Business UnAwesome, wherewelook<br />

at the ways businesses are letting us down, messing things up, and<br />

of course, causing the brand train wrecks we can’t take our eyes off<br />

of. We’re going to look at UnAwesome in all areas of business, from<br />

marketing and public relations (PR) to human resources (HR) and<br />

customer service.<br />

Put on your seat belt, hold on tight, and get ready for a bumpy ride.


2<br />

Marketing Is a Verb<br />

It’s what we do that affects our brand perception more than any brochure<br />

ever could.<br />

Welcome to the UnAwesome side.<br />

You are the person who cheered on Darth Vader. You have Boba<br />

Fett statues in your office and Predator ones too (just like I do). Don’t<br />

be shy, UnAwesome reader; this is the side of the book I would read<br />

first too.<br />

It’s not so much that we hate people. It’s just that we’ve found,<br />

through experience and extensive research, that they’re morons about<br />

85 percent of the time.<br />

You are the person who has been so abused as a customer for so<br />

long that even mediocre customer service feels extraordinary. You’ve<br />

had every kind of bad boss and horrible employee. And if one more<br />

of your friends invites you to vote for them, asks you to like their<br />

Facebook page, or reminds you about their LinkedIn request, you may<br />

just throw this book at them. You aren’t expecting the awesome to<br />

happen, so you find yourself here, with me, on the UnAwesome side.<br />

3


4 The Book of Business UnAwesome<br />

If you are in business yourself, here are the steps for creating the<br />

ultimate UnAwesome business.<br />

The first step to spend all of your money on brochures, billboards,<br />

and car wraps.<br />

Place that order for Frisbees with your logo on them and a giant<br />

Yellow Pages Ad. Be sure to have nothing left over to properly hire<br />

any talent whatsoever: no money for customer service, quality control,<br />

or the person who cleans up the lunchroom once a week.<br />

Make sure your website is a non-mobile-friendly copy of your<br />

brochure. Flash is always good. Animations and music that force play<br />

automatically are critical.<br />

Don’t forget to include a pop up, pop in, and pop under—all great<br />

ways to increase your chances of beating that prospect who landed on<br />

your page over the head a few more times. Why not? They were just<br />

leaving anyway.<br />

Ignore your customers. Pretend the conversations they are having<br />

about you, online and offline, aren’t happening at all. Really, wouldn’t<br />

business be so much better if we didn’t have to deal with pesky<br />

customers at all? The only time we should be reaching out to our<br />

market is with promotions and new product launches.<br />

With these simple steps you are ready to go. Let the UnAwesome<br />

begin!<br />

Serious Scott: I hope you can see how insanely ludicrous this all<br />

sounds, yet sadly this is exactly what you are doing when you think<br />

marketing is all about branding, brochures, and billboards. Marketing<br />

is a verb; it’s what we do that affects our brand perception more than<br />

any brochure ever could. In the upcoming sections you are going to<br />

see how companies’ actions speak louder than any printed word.<br />

I cannot even begin to estimate how much money and time have<br />

been spent by companies crafting, redrafting, and editing their mission<br />

statements. They work long and hard on creating these statements and<br />

hang them up on their walls. So fancy.<br />

The problem is, when you go to any employee (okay, except<br />

maybe the ones on the mission statement committee)—or even more<br />

important, when you go to customers—and ask them if they know<br />

your mission statement, they won’t. You will end up with tons of<br />

different answers—more than to any other question you could ask<br />

about a company.


Marketing Is a Verb 5<br />

That’s because your mission statement, no matter how nicely it sits<br />

on your desk, actually doesn’t matter at all. Your mission statement is<br />

your actions, and each person who comes in contact with your brand<br />

can have a different experience. The statement you make to the world<br />

about your goals and what you truly value as a business is not found on<br />

a piece of paper. It’s found in what you do.<br />

When your wall says that ‘‘customers are number one’’ and yet<br />

you make them jump through hoops every time they want to return<br />

something, ask a question, or reach a customer service agent, then they<br />

are not number one to you. Efficiency, overhead, and not hiring enough<br />

customer service representatives are your number one concerns.<br />

It is simply not good enough to spend more energy deciding what<br />

our mission statements are than we do listening to our customers. It’s<br />

not good enough to talk about what our brand is once a year, when<br />

we have our yearly business retreat at an overpriced destination. Our<br />

mission statements are being written every single day by our customers.<br />

Our values are being dictated by the actions of our employees—every<br />

day and with every interaction people have with our brand, company,<br />

product, or service.<br />

If you want to be UnAwesome, consider these companies as<br />

examples, follow their lead, and we’ll see you in the next book. 1<br />

1Seriously, if you really fark up, shoot me an e-mail and we’ll fit you in. This guy needs<br />

content. unawesome@un-marketing.com.


3<br />

Customers Don’t See Silos<br />

Being great in social media needs to carry through the resolution chain.<br />

Have you ever waited in line at a store to return something? Always<br />

seems to happen to me on the busiest shopping days, like Black Friday<br />

or Boxing Day. And then, once you’ve waited a very long time, trying<br />

to be patient, you get up to the front of the line and somebody tells<br />

you, ‘‘This isn’t the right line.’’<br />

You have to go line up somewhere else, starting the process all over<br />

and giving up even more of your time, effort, and energy. And the whole<br />

time you’re thinking, ‘‘Hey, I’m the customer here. This shouldn’t be so<br />

hard.’’ If you’re returning something, you may already have a negative<br />

issue with the store. Or maybe you just want to exchange what you<br />

have and turn around and spend even more money. Either way, you<br />

don’t want spend more time in another line. I know I never do.<br />

This is what a lot of companies are doing online in social media.<br />

Time and time again, I see examples of people tweeting or saying<br />

something on Facebook to a brand, looking for resolution, just to be<br />

6


Customers Don’t See Silos 7<br />

told they are in the wrong line. Sometimes the brand replies directly<br />

to let them know that this place (Twitter or their Facebook page)<br />

is not the right spot for talking about whatever issue they’re having.<br />

More often, and worse, no one is manning the account at all, and the<br />

customers and their issues are simply ignored and left sitting there.<br />

One of the worst things you can do online as a brand is write<br />

in your profile, company description, or even hidden in your notes<br />

that your page is ‘‘not the place for customer service complaints or<br />

inquiries.’’ People don’t usually read everything about you on your<br />

page before commenting. They just won’t see it, and that’s why it is<br />

such a big problem.<br />

We run our businesses through silos. There’s human resources,<br />

marketing, and public relations, and then there’s customer service.<br />

We use these to keep us organized and make sure everything gets<br />

done. The thing is, customers don’t see silos. They see your brand<br />

as a whole. And every time they don’t get a response or are told that<br />

they’re waiting in the wrong line, it hurts your brand. If you have a<br />

Twitter account, that is your company. Your Facebook wall is your<br />

company—it isn’t HR or customer service or PR; it’s you. We have<br />

to realize that this online place needs to be more of a social traffic<br />

control tower, automatically putting customers into the right line,<br />

versus one that puts up walls and acts as a gatekeeper.<br />

If you open up the social media doors and people start flooding in,<br />

be prepared for them to flood in and say anything, not just what you<br />

want them to say or ask. Set up something within your organization<br />

so that whoever sees comments will automatically assign them to<br />

the right department and reply to the customer. Be sure someone is<br />

responsible for letting customers know your brand is listening, cares<br />

about their feedback, is taking care of whatever issues may have arisen,<br />

and has passed it along to the right people. There is nothing wrong<br />

with asking a customer to e-mail you or phone you because you need<br />

specific or private information that shouldn’t be shared online, but<br />

make sure you tell them publicly in your reply.<br />

All of these interactions with customers are changing your brand’s<br />

impression every single day.<br />

Right now, when people are driving down the road, they don’t see<br />

the separate silos listed with your department names. All they see is you.<br />

And we are changing that brand impression with every interaction.<br />

Being great in social media needs to carry through the resolution chain.


4<br />

How to Flip Off Your Customers<br />

It should never take 10 business days to reply to a customer.<br />

A couple of close-to-home examples for me when it comes to<br />

silos have to do with the connection, or lack there of, between a<br />

company’s social presence and offline presence. Last year, while riding<br />

judgmentally in the VIA Rail business class cabin, I happened upon<br />

a very unpleasant train attendant. I had apparently wronged her in a<br />

past life, and her snarky attitude was something I didn’t care for. I felt<br />

like she was thinking, ‘‘If it wasn’t for these passengers, working on<br />

this train would be so much better.’’<br />

While racing down the tracks, I tweeted about my impression<br />

and the VIA Rail Twitter account tweeted back almost immediately,<br />

wanting to help. They provided me with a customer service e-mail<br />

address, where I was asked to better explain what had occurred.<br />

All the while, the same train attendant was still dishing out the<br />

attitude. 1<br />

1 Talk about real-time customer service!<br />

8


How to Flip Off Your Customers 9<br />

After sending the e-mail, I immediately got a reply back and<br />

thought, ‘‘Wow, being a big deal on Twitter rules!’’ but it turned out to<br />

be an autoresponder, thanking me for my e-mail and warning me that<br />

it would be about 10 business days before I would hear back from them.<br />

Ten. Business. Days. Not even 10 days. They needed to take weekends<br />

into account. So it would take about two weeks to reply back to me. I<br />

understand managing expectations, but unless you are writing out each<br />

e-mail in chalk and running the slate to somebody up a mountain,<br />

it should never take 10 business days to reply to a customer. I then<br />

decided to phone in my complaint, and let’s just say I would have had<br />

a better chance running my complaint up said mountain than talking<br />

to anybody with a reasonable amount of intelligence or concern.<br />

This is the problem when we get excited about social media but<br />

then drop the brand ball in other departments. Being great in social<br />

media and only mediocre or terrible in the rest of your customer<br />

service channels is a bad move. Every part of the machine needs to be<br />

running at the same level. This is why I don’t think social media is<br />

the immediate answer for many large companies; first they need to fix<br />

their existing customer service issues.<br />

It gets even worse when brands outsource social platforms to<br />

a powerless PR agency. I have no problem delegating social media<br />

to another company that handles your current communications, but<br />

when they have no knowledge, say, or influence over anything outside<br />

of a press release, they’re a virtual talking head—and one that can’t<br />

say much.<br />

An example of this is what happened online with the now discontinued<br />

Flip video camera. The awesome Chris Farias, who is the<br />

Yoda of design, unicorn influencer, 2 and partner at Kitestring Creative<br />

Branding Studio, 3 the ones who are responsible for unmarketing.com,<br />

decided to tweet the Flip video Canada account about an issue with his<br />

camera. You should know that Chris and the entire agency staff were<br />

huge fans of the product, but they had a problem with an apparent<br />

common fault and decided to tweet about it, because Twitter is their<br />

preferred method of communication.<br />

2 Seriously, go check him out on Klout.com.<br />

3 http://www.kitestring.ca.


10 The Book of Business UnAwesome<br />

The Flip account replied and basically told Chris he was in the<br />

wrong line, that his question was a customer service issue, and that he<br />

would have to call them. Well, I got wind of this and decided to let<br />

them know my thoughts, specifically that they were representing the<br />

entire company. The least Flip could do was throw Chris a bone and<br />

connect him with someone who could help.<br />

Next thing you know, Chris’s phone rings and the guy who runs<br />

the Flip account is on the other end. You might think he called to<br />

apologize and get Chris a new camera, but no. He actually called<br />

and reamed him out, asking why Chris was causing trouble. The Flip<br />

account manager explained that he provided only PR for Flip and<br />

wasn’t responsible for their customer service.<br />

Listen to me very carefully, PR people, social media consultants,<br />

divas, and gurus: you are not an extension of your clients’ brands; you<br />

are their brands. You are more their brand than most of the people<br />

who work at the company, because you represent the company in the<br />

public eye. Anybody running a social media account for a brand should<br />

have access to answers and resources within the company, or at least<br />

a game plan, for when common issues arise. Otherwise, you might as<br />

well not have the account at all.


CONTENTS<br />

Warning: Unexpected Honesty... xv<br />

Prologue: How a Lard Salesman, an NFL Agent,<br />

and a YouTube Star Explain Likeonomics xvii<br />

Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool xxvii<br />

Author’s Note: Why I Don’t Write about Synergy<br />

And Paradigm Shifts xli<br />

PART I The Crisis and the Solution 1<br />

Chapter 1 Inside the Modern Believability Crisis:<br />

How Rockefeller’s Dimes, War Propaganda,<br />

and the Marlboro Man Ruined the World 3<br />

The Birth of Modern PR 5<br />

#occupywallstreet 6<br />

The Propaganda of Revolutions 7<br />

When Advertising Ruled the World 9<br />

The Mass Perception Principle 10<br />

Marketing as the Bad Guy 12<br />

Living in the Society of Distrust 14<br />

What Is The Believability Crisis? 15<br />

Solving the Believability Crisis 16<br />

Chapter 2 Navigating the Likeability Gap: What Rwanda,<br />

Golf Courses, and Ocean’s Eleven Can Teach Us<br />

about the Decisions We Make 19<br />

The Movie Man 21<br />

What Business Are You In? 23<br />

The Engagement Problem 24<br />

The Reinvention of Rwanda 26<br />

Humility Wanted 27<br />

The Likeability Gap 29<br />

xi


xii Contents<br />

The Toilet Business 31<br />

Understanding Weak Ties 32<br />

Golf & The Likeability Gap 33<br />

Why Relationships Are Not about Networking 35<br />

Getting Julia Roberts 36<br />

The Age of Equivalence 37<br />

How Originality Died—and How We Can<br />

GetItBack 39<br />

The Differentiation Ideal 40<br />

The Likeability Gap and the World 42<br />

Chapter 3 The ROI of Likeability: Why Spreadsheets Need<br />

to Die, Websites Stink, and Likeable Politicians<br />

Always Win 45<br />

The New Stupid 46<br />

The Sexiness Of Analytics 47<br />

Data Overload, Insight Underload 48<br />

Four Ways Data Becomes Meaningless 49<br />

Rethinking ROI 50<br />

The Flip Side of Data 51<br />

Why Context Matters (and Your ‘‘Sticky’’ Website<br />

Actually Stinks) 52<br />

The Real Reason Likeable Politicians Always Win 53<br />

Why Results Matter More than Data 54<br />

The Five Principles of Likeonomics 55<br />

PART II The Principles 57<br />

Chapter 4 Truth 59<br />

Oprah’s Secret 60<br />

Are You Building on a Sinkhole? 61<br />

The Lie Doctor and the Dalai Lama 61<br />

Empowerment versus the Anti-Truth Policy 63<br />

Embracing Your Inconvenient Truth 64<br />

Selling Cardboard 66<br />

Why Being Truthful Is So Hard 68<br />

The Three Elements of Truth 69<br />

Chapter Summary: Three Things to Remember<br />

about Truth 71


Contents xiii<br />

Chapter 5 Relevance 73<br />

The Relevance Challenge 75<br />

Canada’s Favorite Storyteller 76<br />

Handshakes in Kazakhstan 78<br />

The Renaissance Banker 80<br />

Making the Bank Relevant Again 81<br />

Everyone Who Matters Knows You 81<br />

Why Is Relevance So Hard? 83<br />

The Three Elements of Relevance 84<br />

Chapter Summary: Three Things to Remember<br />

about Relevance 86<br />

Chapter 6 Unselfishness 89<br />

Creating an Ideal World 90<br />

The Ethical Warehouse 93<br />

What about the Selfish Gene? 94<br />

Wikinomics and the Rise of Collaboration 95<br />

Finding the Altruism Gene 96<br />

Do Doctors Need to Be Competent and Kind? 97<br />

Why People Don’t Sue Likeable Doctors 99<br />

How the Unselfish and Compassionate Will Rule<br />

the World 101<br />

How Japanese Citizens Responded to Disaster<br />

with Unselfishness 102<br />

The Customer Service Revolution Will Be Twitterized 105<br />

Why We Are Selfish 106<br />

The Three Elements of Unselfishness 108<br />

Chapter Summary: Three Things to Remember<br />

about Unselfishness 110<br />

Chapter 7 Simplicity 111<br />

Desperately Seeking Simplicity 113<br />

The Plain Language Movement 114<br />

The Myth of Good Complexity 115<br />

Gadget Confusion 116<br />

Flipping the Video Camera Market 118<br />

Winning on Simplicity 119<br />

How Simplicity Inspires Trust 121<br />

How Orange Got People Saving Again 122


xiv Contents<br />

Hypnotizing Chickens 123<br />

How Napkins Can Explain Health Care 124<br />

Why Simplicity Gets So Complicated 126<br />

The Three Elements of Simplicity<br />

Chapter Summary: Three Things to Remember<br />

127<br />

about Simplicity 129<br />

Chapter 8 Timing 131<br />

The Most Creative Lunch in History 133<br />

Timing Is Everything 135<br />

How Sweetening Changed Television History 136<br />

Our Time-Shifted Culture 136<br />

Gilt and Luxury with an Expiration 137<br />

The Rise of Shopper Marketing 138<br />

Google ZMOT 139<br />

Why Timing Is So Tough 141<br />

The Three Elements of Timing<br />

Chapter Summary: Three Things to Remember<br />

142<br />

about Timing 144<br />

Conclusion 145<br />

Living in the Era of Likeonomics 146<br />

Likenomics on Mulberry Street 147<br />

PART III The StoryBook 149<br />

Introduction: How the StoryBook Works 151<br />

Bhutan: The Real Happiest Place on Earth 153<br />

Packers: Why Cheeseheads Rule the NFL 155<br />

Khan Academy: Flipping the Rules of Education 157<br />

Maverick Adventures: Kitesurfing with Richard Branson 159<br />

Anoopy Singla: The Fast Rise of Slow Cooking 161<br />

The Backstory: The Making of Likeonomics 165<br />

Special Thanks 167<br />

Notes: Further Reading and Research 169<br />

About the Author 173<br />

Index 175


INTRODUCTION: LIKEABILITY, ROGUE<br />

ECONOMISTS, AND THE LOVABLE FOOL<br />

If you talk to a man in a language he understands, that goes to his<br />

head. If you talk to him in his language, that goes to his heart.<br />

—Nelson Mandela<br />

The first time I experienced the powerful influence of Nelson Mandela<br />

was from the front seat of a taxi cab riding down the streets of Jo’burg<br />

(as the locals call Johannesburg). Mandela’s picture was on billboards<br />

along the highway to the city even though he was no longer president<br />

of South Africa, and my driver was speaking about his influence and<br />

how he had inspired the nation. That story started nearly 20 years ago.<br />

In 1993, tens of thousands of Afrikaners (white South Africans) were<br />

preparing for war. Three years earlier, a man named Nelson Mandela<br />

had been released after 27 years in prison. He was no hero to this group.<br />

They saw him as the founder of a terrorist organization who threatened<br />

their way of life and belonged in jail. They were ready to fight.<br />

As reporter and biographer John Carlin wrote, that was the moment<br />

where Mandela began ‘‘the most unlikely exercise in political seduction<br />

ever undertaken.’’ 1Heinvited the Afrikaners leaders over for tea and<br />

listened to their concerns. Then, he persuaded them to abandon their<br />

guns and violence. The battle never happened.<br />

A year later, he was sworn in as president of South Africa and vowed<br />

to make reconciling the racial tension between whites and blacks his<br />

number-one priority. Somehow he had to overcome decades of hate<br />

and convince people ready to die for their causes to see one another as<br />

brothers.<br />

In one of his first acts as president, Mandela invited Francois Pienaar,<br />

the captain of the South African Rugby (Springbok) team, to have tea<br />

with him. That afternoon he struck an alliance, asking Pienaar to help<br />

him turn rugby into a force for uniting all South Africans.<br />

xxvii


xxviii Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool<br />

During the Rugby World Cup in 1995, Pienaars led the mostly<br />

white players of the Springbok team in singing an old song of black<br />

resistance, which was now the new national anthem, ‘‘Nkosi Sikelele<br />

Afrika’’ (‘‘God Bless Africa’’). It was a powerful demonstration that the<br />

players believed in having a united South Africa. Inspired, the team<br />

fought the odds and made it to the final against Australia.<br />

On June 24, 1995, minutes before the final match would start,<br />

Mandela went on the field in the middle of the stadium wearing his<br />

Springbok green shirt to wish Pienaar and the team good luck. The<br />

crowd, made up of 95 percent white South Africans, was stunned. For<br />

many years, that green shirt had been seen as a symbol of only white<br />

South Africa. For a black man to wear it was unheard of.<br />

The crowd erupted in cheers of ‘‘Nel-son, Nel-son’’ and everyone<br />

across South Africa celebrated. Mandela would go on to lead the<br />

racial reconciliation both during his presidency, and then after as an<br />

ambassador to the world for South Africa. In 2004, the country was<br />

awarded the world’s largest stage to host the 2010 FIFA World Cup. It<br />

is now seen as a likely future Olympic destination, as well.<br />

This story of South Africa’s triumph was chronicled by Carlin in<br />

his book Playing the Enemy: Nelson Mandela and the Game That Made<br />

aNation. It was so powerful, it inspired the Academy Award-winning<br />

film Invictus by director Clint Eastwood.<br />

Why People Believe in Likeability<br />

(and Why They Don’t)<br />

The fate of South Africa is linked to the story of one man’s personal<br />

charm and likeability. This may seem like an extreme example. After<br />

all, not many people have the gift that Mandela has. Yet, his experience<br />

does explain the very fundamental role that likeability can take in<br />

inspiring belief and changing our world around us. People didn’t follow<br />

Mandela because of the ideas; they followed because of him. Whenhe<br />

invited you over for tea and listened to your concerns, and then spoke,<br />

you couldn’t help trusting his vision.<br />

Likeability itself can be a difficult idea to believe in, because it<br />

feels soft. In doing the research and writing for this book over the past


Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool xxix<br />

two years, I have had hundreds of conversations with people about the<br />

concept of likeability. When I started conducting interviews, I assumed<br />

that almost everyone would be a skeptic.<br />

What I learned rapidly was that most people actually fall into two<br />

different groups. Both can be critical about the idea of likeability and<br />

its role in success, but for different reasons. Here are their paraphrased<br />

arguments:<br />

Reaction #1: ‘‘That’s so obvious.’’<br />

Here’s what ‘‘Obvious Guy’’ says:<br />

Everyone knows that likeability and the power of networking<br />

will get you everything from your new job to the next contract.<br />

I once won a new project just because I play hockey with<br />

the procurement manager for a big firm and they needed a<br />

contractor quickly. We won the job without an RFP. Anyone<br />

in sales knows that no one will buy from you if they don’t<br />

like you.<br />

Reaction #2: ‘‘That’s not true—the product<br />

matters more.’’<br />

Here’s what ‘‘Features Guy’’ says:<br />

Sure, I enjoy being around likeable people—but at the end of<br />

the day people will only buy something or believe an idea if<br />

it really has merit. I’m not going to buy a crap product just<br />

because I like you, and I’m not going to believe an idea just<br />

because I find the person delivering it to be more likeable.<br />

I understand both of these guys. In fact, at various times in the<br />

writing process for this book, I have been both of these guys. In a<br />

sense, it is why I spent a significant part of my research time looking<br />

at all the reasons why likeability wasn’t really that important. I studied<br />

examples of unlikeable leaders and brands that still succeeded on some<br />

level despite being unlikeable. I read books about the impact of luck


xxx Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool<br />

and the importance of making great products that market themselves.<br />

I dug backward through history, looking at whether the importance of<br />

likeability was different during the Great Depression or the golden age<br />

of Sweden.<br />

What I learned is that success has much less to do with what we<br />

create and much more to do with who believes in it.<br />

This is not about creating an awful product and trying to use<br />

likeability to sell it. It is also not about trying to fake likeability to<br />

support some sort of sinister ulterior motive. I will speak about how to<br />

handle both of these situations later in the book.<br />

Instead, my aim is to look at the intersection of likeability and the<br />

global economy and offer a vision of how any one of us can build the<br />

kinds of relationships that lead to all kinds of personal success—from<br />

launching a business to getting a new job.<br />

The Nonboring Economics of Likeonomics<br />

The unlikeliest place to start a discussion about the impact of likeability<br />

on the economy would be in the field of economics itself. One of the<br />

first things I did in my research, in fact, was to look at what leading<br />

economists might have already published about the main idea of this<br />

book. An economist, as writer Laurence J. Peter once wrote, ‘‘is an<br />

expert who will know tomorrow why the things he predicted yesterday<br />

didn’t happen today.’’<br />

Luckily, this is not really an economics book and Likeonomics is<br />

not an economic theory in a strict sense. Rather, it is an attempt to<br />

describe the world that we live in today and what people and business<br />

professionals alike need to do in order to survive and thrive in it. Unlike<br />

many traditional economists, I tend to avoid academic thinking and<br />

language, preferring instead to think about the world in terms of human<br />

interactions rather than numbers in a spreadsheet. It turns out these are<br />

not the opposing factors that they once were, as the world of economics<br />

would learn the day the surprising results of the voting for the winners<br />

of the 2002 Nobel Prize for Economic Sciences were announced.


Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool xxxi<br />

The Psychology of Likeonomics<br />

Dr. Daniel Kahneman was once described by Harvard psychologist<br />

Daniel Gilbert as ‘‘the most distinguished living psychologist in the<br />

world, bar none.’’ Along with partner Amos Tversky, his lifetime of<br />

work in applying psychological principles of how people behave to<br />

economic theory essentially led directly to what we today call the<br />

field of behavioral economics. When they were awarded the Nobel<br />

Prize in 2002, the awarding committee credited Kahneman for ‘‘for<br />

having integrated insights from psychological research into economic<br />

science, especially concerning human judgment and decision-making<br />

under uncertainty.’’<br />

The idea that people are not logical robots, but rather that they<br />

respond to incentives and are led by emotions is still a relatively recent<br />

idea.<br />

For a field once called the ‘‘dismal science’’ by the Victorian<br />

historian Thomas Carlyle in the nineteenth century, one of its strongest<br />

mainstream boosts for the importance of economics would come in<br />

2005 with the publication of Freakonomics, which also inspired the title<br />

for this book.<br />

The authors of Freakonomics like to use the description ‘‘rogue<br />

economist’’ to describe their take on the world. Part economics and<br />

part social psychology, they merged these worlds together successfully<br />

in a groundbreaking book that explains why we behave the way we<br />

do, why seemingly unrelated phenomena from across the world may<br />

be linked, and how our understanding of what motivates our behaviors<br />

may not be as simple and rational as we like to think.<br />

Since Freakonomics, this theme of the irrationality of behavior is one<br />

that has become extremely popular in multiple best-selling books.<br />

Each book reaches a related conclusion—that people act in emotional,<br />

human, and unexpected ways, and respond to incentives.<br />

We are not logical robots.<br />

Just because we respond to emotional appeals and tend to act in<br />

human ways, however, doesn’t necessarily prove that likeability is all<br />

that important. After all, there seem to be plenty of examples of leaders


xxxii Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool<br />

who are successful despite being frequently described as unlikeable. Like<br />

Steve Jobs, for instance.<br />

The Jobs Paradox<br />

The late Steve Jobs was clearly visionary and had a brilliant mind,<br />

but was also often described as egomaniacal and hard to work with.<br />

A Boston Globe review of the biography of Jobs by veteran journalist<br />

Walter Isaacson, released just a few weeks after Jobs’ death begins with<br />

this pronouncement about him: ‘‘Life often reduced Steve Jobs to tears.<br />

But he rarely suffered alone. The cofounder of Apple, Inc., spread<br />

his unhappiness like a virus, abusing his friends, neglecting his family,<br />

insulting and reviling his colleagues. And almost to a person, they loved<br />

Jobs to the end.’’ 2<br />

This what we might call the Jobs Paradox—that some people can<br />

seem to be completely unlikeable, and yet succeed and inspire those<br />

close to them regardless.<br />

Jobs was hardly the only unlikeable leader in Silicon Valley.<br />

Larry Ellison, the founder of Oracle, has developed a reputation for<br />

being an unlikeable character, as well. He has made fun of rivals on<br />

stage at the Oracle annual OpenWorld conference and attacked former<br />

Sun rival and CEO Jonathan Schwartz for ‘‘spending too much time on<br />

his blog.’’ When asked about Bill Gates, he famously said, ‘‘Referring<br />

to Gates as the smartest man in America isn’t right. Wealth isn’t the<br />

same thing as intelligence.’’<br />

When Bloomberg television decided to do a feature on Ellison<br />

for their Game Changers series, co-founder of Oracle Bruce Scott was<br />

interviewed and shared, ‘‘I remember [Ellison] very distinctly telling me<br />

one time: Bruce, we can’t be successful unless we lie to customers. All<br />

the things that you would read in books of somebody being a leader,<br />

he wasn’t.’’<br />

When asked about his personal philosophy, Ellison once said:<br />

‘‘I don’t believe in being nice to my enemies. My enemies are trying to<br />

deprive me of the success that led to my happiness. I want to beat my<br />

enemies, and it’s hard to be nice to them at the same time.’’ 3


Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool xxxiii<br />

There are probably dozens of other examples of this paradox. So<br />

what does it mean? Are the business clichés like ‘‘nice guys finish last’’ or<br />

‘‘nice girls don’t get the corner office’’ actually right? And if likeability<br />

matters so much, how can we explain the success of these two men<br />

who seemed to make arrogance and competition their priorities? The<br />

answer comes down to understanding the difference between likeability<br />

and being nice because of the human need to be liked.<br />

Do We Need to Be Liked?<br />

People who care too much about being liked are often described as<br />

weak or insecure. As a result, few people and even fewer business leaders<br />

are ready to admit that they care about it or even factor likeability into<br />

any of their everyday decisions. So if likeability is such a hard quality<br />

to admit to caring about, why is the need to be liked such a powerful<br />

motivational force? If anyone has the answer, it is Dr. Roger Corvin,<br />

a clinical psychologist practicing in Montrealwho has spent his career<br />

trying to help patients with a variety of mental or emotional issues.<br />

His average afternoon might include seeing a depressed teen, an<br />

executive with anxiety, and a mother with post-traumatic stress disorder<br />

(PTSD). Despite the variety of genders, life situations, ages, and<br />

ethnicities, Dr. Corvin started to realize that there was a common trait<br />

among all the people who came to see him : They all had a need to be<br />

liked by other people.<br />

In his book, The Need to Be Liked, he describes this as a fundamental<br />

human need in psychological terms because:<br />

1. The brain and body are designed to acquire it.<br />

2. Not fulfilling the need has negative effects on the person.<br />

The primary function of this need, he argues, is to ‘‘ensure that<br />

we form relationships with other people.’’ There is a clear evolutionary<br />

reason why this would have mattered for our ancestors: Those who<br />

were able to form relationships and work together were more likely to<br />

survive.<br />

So what about the curious cases of Jobs and Ellison? Were they<br />

simply immune to this need to be liked and therefore able to behave<br />

more harshly?


xxxiv Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool<br />

The answer to the Jobs Paradox lies in Dr. Colvin’s point about the<br />

many qualities of likeability. Likeability is about being able to personally<br />

connect with people on a different level. Jobs, despite his well-known<br />

ego and arrogance, had a talent for telling the truth, which people<br />

loved.<br />

A few months before he passed away, Nike CEO Mark Parker was<br />

asked by an interviewer about the best piece of advice he had ever been<br />

given. He recalled calling Jobs shortly after becoming CEO and asking<br />

him for any advice. ‘‘Well, just one thing,’’ said Jobs. ‘‘Nike makes<br />

some of the best products in the world. Products that you lust after. But<br />

you also make a lot of crap. Just get rid of the crappy stuff and focus on<br />

the good stuff.’’<br />

He wasn’t joking. It was that type of honesty and clarity of vision<br />

that attracted people to Jobs. It made him likeable, in his own way. It<br />

also illustrates an important point of difference.<br />

Being likeable is not the same thing as being nice.<br />

Ellison also seemed to have a different standard for how he would<br />

behave depending on who he was dealing with. In an interview for<br />

Softwar, Ellison noted that ‘‘[B]eing insensitive, rude or mean to someone<br />

close to you, or a perfect stranger for that matter, is self-destructive and<br />

self-degrading behavior. You’ll think less of yourself for doing it.’’<br />

Understanding that likeability doesn’t mean the same thing to<br />

everyone may seem like a confusing contradiction. As we will soon see,<br />

however, likeability is enough to compensate for some very real human<br />

failings. In Jobs’ case, it may be extreme arrogance. In other cases, as<br />

two behavior and decision sciences professors learned, it may be simply<br />

a lack of competence.<br />

The Hidden Appeal of the Likeable Fool<br />

In 2005, Tiziana Casciaro, a Harvard Business School professor and<br />

Miguel Sousa Lobo, a professor of decision sciences at Duke University,<br />

decided to find out just how important likeability was in a business context.<br />

Together, they conducted a series of surveys at four organizations:


Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool xxxv<br />

a Silicon Valley tech company, a division of an IT corporation, a U.S.<br />

university, and the Spanish country office of a global luxury goods<br />

corporation. Combining this with results from surveys filled out by<br />

a large group of MBA students, they ultimately studied collected and<br />

studied data from over 10,000 work relationships.<br />

Everyone they spoke to was plotted against two characteristics based<br />

on how they answered questions and how their peers rated them:<br />

their likeability and their competence. They then asked participants to<br />

imagine they had a job to do at work. Which of their colleagues would<br />

they choose to work with? On one level, the results were completely<br />

predictable.<br />

Everyone wanted to work with the highly likeable and highly<br />

competent individuals (who the study dubbed the ‘‘Lovable Stars’’), and<br />

no one wanted to work with the low competence and low likeability<br />

individuals (the ‘‘Incompetent Jerk’’). The unexpected results came<br />

when looking at the other two categories.<br />

high<br />

Competence<br />

low<br />

low<br />

Competent Jerk<br />

mostly avoided<br />

Incompetent jerk<br />

desperately avoided<br />

Likability<br />

Lovable Star<br />

deperately wanted<br />

Lovable Fool<br />

mildly wanted<br />

The study demonstrated that when faced with a choice between a<br />

more likeable person who workers had a stronger personal relationship<br />

with, or someone who had better job performance, but was less<br />

likeable—most people chose to work with the ‘‘Lovable Fool’’ (low<br />

competence, high likeability) rather than the ‘‘Competent Jerk’’ (high<br />

competence, low likeability).<br />

The conclusion of the study was clear: ‘‘When faced with a choice<br />

between a ‘competent jerk’ and a ‘lovable fool’ as a work partner,<br />

people usually opt for likeability over ability.’’ This is not an isolated<br />

high


xxxvi Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool<br />

finding, either. Consider these results from research conducted around<br />

the world over the past few decades:<br />

In a communications study from 2003, researchers at the University of<br />

Michigan uncovered that ‘‘friendly and positive employees are more<br />

productive.’’<br />

A 1984 study by the University of California showed that doctors<br />

unconsciously spend more time and offer better quality care to patients<br />

they like.<br />

In his book Making Your Case: The Art of Persuading Judges, U.S.<br />

Supreme Court Justice Antonin Scalia wrote of the importance of<br />

being likeable and how it leads to trust. ‘‘Some people,’’ he noted<br />

‘‘are inherently likeable. If you’re not, work on it.’’<br />

A study in 2001 from Columbia University found that the more<br />

popular and likeable workers were seen as trustworthy, motivated,<br />

decisive, and hard-working, and as such were recommended for<br />

fast-track promotions and pay raises.<br />

Across the business world and beyond, likeability has a fundamental<br />

power in most of our interactions with people and organizations.<br />

Likeability makes the difference.<br />

Inside Part I: The Crisis and the Solution<br />

Of course, likeability on some level has always mattered, so why write<br />

this book now—and why does it matter so much to understanding our<br />

world, behavior, and global economy?<br />

Part I of the book will tackle these important questions by looking<br />

at the very real believability crisis that we are in, how we got here, and<br />

why the idea behind Likeonomics offers a vision for where we need to<br />

go next.<br />

In Chapter 1—Inside the Modern Believability Crisis, we look<br />

backward at the rise of propaganda and how trust in business and<br />

organizations has reached an all-time low. You will read how an<br />

unexpected public relations campaign for an oil tycoon in the early 1900s<br />

jumpstarted our ‘‘modern believability crisis,’’ And why marketing is the


Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool xxxvii<br />

source of all manipulation. Moving quickly through the past hundred<br />

years, we will see how this growth in manipulation on every level has<br />

created an unprecedented challenge for each of us (and the organizations<br />

we work with) to inspire or motivate people to do or believe in<br />

anything.<br />

Moving to Chapter 2—Navigating the Likeability Gap, the concept<br />

of the ‘‘likeability gap’’ will help to explain the nature of how we decide<br />

and why we choose to work with and help people and organizations<br />

that we like. Through the story of the rise of Rwanda and the real<br />

reason why so many million-dollar deals start on the golf course, this<br />

chapter will look at why relationships matter so much and how being<br />

more likeable is the key to creating more success.<br />

Finally, in Chapter 3—The ROI of Likeonomics, we will look<br />

at what the real business and personal value is behind the concept<br />

of Likeonomics. This chapter will move from analyzing decades of<br />

research into education reform, to the story of why ROI was originally<br />

invented (it’s not what you think). Ultimately, we will tackle several<br />

flawed assumptions about measurement and look at some new ideas for<br />

how to really measure success and why it is not about creating a better<br />

spreadsheet.<br />

Inside Part II: The Principles<br />

After the focus of Part I on demonstrating all the ways that Likeonomics<br />

explains the world we live in today, Part II will go deeper to offer<br />

a practical and useful look at why people trust some organizations or<br />

people and not others—and how you can be more trusted and more<br />

believable in any situation or role.<br />

In looking at all the research about how people and organizations<br />

become more believable, as well as the impact that social media has<br />

had on how we interact with one another and companies, I wanted to<br />

uncover some key principles for what really matters when it comes to<br />

being more believable. My aim was to find these principles and then<br />

create some sort of acronym to describe them. As readers of my blog<br />

already know, using acronyms is a method I often use to make new<br />

ideas more memorable.


xxxviii Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool<br />

So one day more than a year ago, I gathered all of my research<br />

together and started to define what I felt were the most important<br />

principles. The starting point was research that had addressed a similar<br />

challenge:<br />

1. The Likeability Factor—I looked at Tim Sanders’ award-winning<br />

work in writing The Likeability Factor about how to be more likeable<br />

as a person. His four ‘‘elements of likeability’’ came down to<br />

friendliness, relevance, empathy, and realness. In his mind, these<br />

were in ‘‘green light order,’’ which meant you had to be friendly<br />

before you could be relevant, and so on.<br />

2. The Netherlands Study—Twenty years ago, the Advertising<br />

Research Foundation set their research agenda for 1991 and proposed<br />

that studying the impact of likeability on advertising research<br />

should be a key topic. That year, several research studies on the topic<br />

were conducted and three authors in the Netherlands decided to<br />

launch a 10-year study on the effects of advertising likeability. Their<br />

results, published in 2006, proposed that there were four components<br />

to advertising likeability: entertainment, relevance, clearness,<br />

and pleasantness.<br />

As I sat down one afternoon in February to put some of the research<br />

down on paper, five core principles seemed to leap out from all the<br />

work I had done. In fact, it was so clear that I assumed they must be<br />

wrong or too simple. Since that afternoon in February, I revisited my<br />

initial acronym almost every week for months with the intention of<br />

changing it.<br />

I did more research, consumed more reports, and read more books.<br />

I spoke with colleagues and clients to try and poke holes in the idea.<br />

I even presented the acronym during a speech in Miami to get a public<br />

reaction and have others criticize it. It still worked.<br />

What was even better, the principles I had landed on spelled a<br />

powerful acronym that would fit perfectly into what I wanted to say in<br />

the book:<br />

TRUST = TRUTH + RELEVANCE + UNSELFISHNESS<br />

+ SIMPLICITY + TIMING


Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool xxxix<br />

So in Part II of the book, we will dig into each of these five<br />

principles of Likeonomics to look at why it matters, who does it well,<br />

and most importantly, a practical guidebook on how you can achieve it.<br />

Principle 1: Truth—There is no truth like the real truth, and we<br />

live in a time where people are more able to demand it than ever. This<br />

is not, however, the same thing as honesty. In this chapter, we will learn<br />

from the meteoric rise of the most famous talk show host in history, to<br />

the story of a struggling brand that took an unheard of risk in telling<br />

the truth about why they would always fail to be number one in their<br />

industry.<br />

Principle 2: Relevant—The challenge to be relevant requires that<br />

you center yourself on the world that someone else already cares about.<br />

Using global stories of how to shake hands in Kazakhstan and why<br />

Canada’s favorite storyteller became so beloved, this chapter will define<br />

exactly what makes something or someone powerfully relevant, and<br />

how you can do it for yourself or your business.<br />

Principle 3: Unselfish— If there is one principle that seems dramatically<br />

hard to consistently do, it is behaving in an unselfish way.<br />

Combining the story of how a small yet powerful networking group<br />

is taking their region by storm and what one of the largest global<br />

studies of unselfish corporate behavior has proven about the role of<br />

idealism in branding, this section will prove that being unselfish pays<br />

off in many ways, and is a necessity for success in our new global<br />

economy.<br />

Principle 4: Simple—Of all the principles, this one has near universal<br />

agreement from leading thinkers in the world about its importance.<br />

Simplicity is the force that has powered the Apple brand to success<br />

and also driven politicians to win elections and world-changing social<br />

movements to build a following. In this chapter, we will not only<br />

learn how much simplicity can help to achieve, but also some new and<br />

completely different methods for making everything from messaging to<br />

how you spend your time more simplified.<br />

Principle 5: Timely—Some of the greatest ideas in human history<br />

have succeeded or failed based entirely on timing. More than just<br />

suggesting that good timing matters, we will look at the examples of<br />

how people are always at the heart of timing and understanding when<br />

to push your idea is the crucial X-factor that can help ensure success.


xl Introduction: Likeability, Rogue Economists, and the Lovable Fool<br />

Inside Part III: The StoryBook<br />

(Likeonomics in Action)<br />

If you are the sort of reader who likes to skip the theory and go straight<br />

to the stories and case studies that bring each idea to life, you will<br />

appreciate this section. In many ways, you are my favorite audience to<br />

write for—because I share your impatience.<br />

In addition to the dozens of stories I share throughout this book, this<br />

final section spotlights a collection of examples of the principles behind<br />

Likeonomics at work. It includes everything from the little known story<br />

ofwhat might be the happiest country on Earth, to the website that has<br />

turned the world of education upside down.<br />

Stories are what inspire each of us, but they also have to feel<br />

relevant (remember, that’s one of the principles!). So each story will also<br />

be indexed by geographic region and industry so you can browse them<br />

to identify the ones that feel closest to your own personal situation.<br />

In addition, this StoryBook will be a living part of Likeonomics<br />

online, with new stories getting consistently added to the website. You<br />

can always visit www.likeonomics.com/storybook to read additional<br />

stories, and even add your own story in the online community.<br />

<br />

(Read the secret introduction: www.likeonomics.com/secretintro)


Foreword by Jeff Dachis<br />

SOCIAL<br />

BUSINESS<br />

BY DESIGN<br />

transformative<br />

social media<br />

strategies for<br />

the connected<br />

company<br />

DION HINCHCLIFFE<br />

PETER KIM<br />

DACHIS GROUP


CONTENTS<br />

Foreword vii<br />

by Jeff Dachis<br />

Introduction 1<br />

PART ONE Adapting Organizations to the Twenty-First<br />

Century 5<br />

1 Social Media: Drivers of Global Business<br />

Opportunity 7<br />

2 Social Media: A Way of Life, a Way of Business 17<br />

3 Who’s Winning in Social Business, and Why 25<br />

4 The Global Business Transition to Social<br />

Media 45<br />

5 How Business Will Make the Transition 53<br />

PART TWO The Techniques of Social Business 63<br />

6 Social Media Marketing 65<br />

7 Social Product Development 87<br />

v


vi Contents<br />

8 Crowdsourcing: Community-Powered<br />

Workforces 93<br />

9 Social Customer Relationship Management<br />

and Customer Communities: Social Customer<br />

Care 99<br />

10 Social Business Ecosystems: Engaging with<br />

Business Partners 107<br />

11 Workforce Engagement: Creating a Connected<br />

Company Using Social Business 127<br />

12 Social Business Supporting Capabilities 143<br />

PART THREE Social Business Design and Strategy 157<br />

13 Identifying Priorities and Planning 159<br />

14 Building Blocks: The Elements of Social<br />

Business 169<br />

15 Business Cases, Pilots, Return on Investment,<br />

and Value: Tying Them Together 185<br />

16 Building a Social Business Strategy: The<br />

Outputs 191<br />

17 Getting Started with Social Business 195<br />

18 Maturity: The Social Business Unit 205<br />

Epilogue 211<br />

Appendix: The Ten Tenets of Social Business 215<br />

Notes 217<br />

Acknowledgments 229<br />

About the Authors 231<br />

Index 233


FOREWORD<br />

Everything that can be social will be.<br />

I firmly believe that’s the mantra of twenty-first-century business<br />

and the key concept that we must all internalize to achieve our<br />

best possible futures. Operating our businesses through a social lens<br />

presents a profound new way of thinking. Some of you will know<br />

that this trend is something now called social business. Most companies<br />

are taking steps toward social business, some slowly and some more<br />

rapidly. Yet virtually all organizations today need a way to make the<br />

changes on their own terms, in a way that gives them a safe path<br />

forward that ensures success. Social Business by Design offers you that<br />

guided route forward, step by step.<br />

When I cofounded Razorfish as the first major digital agency<br />

back in the 1990s, it quickly became clear to me that dramatic change<br />

was difficult for large companies; it’s never easy taking the first move<br />

toward a fundamentally new, better way of working, thinking, and<br />

living. Fortunately, the case for why and how to effectively adopt<br />

social business is definitively and compellingly explored in these<br />

pages by my industry colleagues, as well as friends and coworkers,<br />

Dion Hinchcliffe and Peter Kim. I’ve seen both of them grapple with<br />

the enormity of the task that lies ahead of virtually all organizations<br />

vii


viii Foreword<br />

today: to connect business clients with the whole of the developed<br />

world using social media, engage deeply with customers and partners<br />

in potent new—yet unfamiliar—ways, and innovate and cocreate<br />

a more effective way of working that’s not just novel but more<br />

satisfying, richer, and, yes, profitable for all concerned.<br />

Uncertain economic times can have a chilling effect on innovation<br />

and the readiness for the bold moves required to lead an industry in<br />

this century. Many companies also have a hard time making the leap<br />

to new digital business models. For every SAP, IBM, or Amazon, a<br />

hundred companies are struggling in the shadows. But the writing<br />

is on the wall. I can read it clearly as a CEO, as can most of my<br />

peers in organizations large and small around the world: as you read<br />

this, the way we run our organizations is in the midst of changing<br />

dramatically.<br />

The implications for social business transformation are writ large.<br />

Customer engagement is moving from relatively isolated market<br />

transactions to deeply connected and sustained social relationships.<br />

This basic change in how we do business will make an impact on<br />

just about everything we do. It affects where sustainable creativity<br />

and ingenuity are sourced. It defines how productive and rewarding<br />

results are created in the form of break-out new products, services,<br />

and operational constructs. And for the CxO in all of us, it also<br />

means that we now possess major new ways of driving growth,<br />

revenue, and margin. Distributed technologies operating in an open<br />

ecosystem and placed in the hands of constituents can be leveraged<br />

to create and capitalize on emergent outcomes.<br />

It’s clear to me that social media have moved far beyond a means<br />

of staying in touch with old friends and colleagues. They have become<br />

how business gets done. They have also created a highly competitive<br />

weapon in the arsenal of those who want to achieve dramatically<br />

better marketing, sales, customer service, product development, and<br />

worker productivity. The comprehensive vision that Dion and Pete<br />

lay out in this book explains exactly why organizations need to


Foreword ix<br />

commit to the path of social business in order to survive and thrive<br />

in the very different conditions of this new millennium.<br />

In these pages, you’ll see how successful companies go outside<br />

their comfort zones to embrace new consumer methods of social<br />

media and social networking, enabling them to accomplish business<br />

objectives in revolutionary new ways that are much more scalable,<br />

efficient, and robust than in the past. Some of these featured companies<br />

are the most respected names in their industry, and others are<br />

disrupting industries and starting their own rise. Yet these stories will<br />

also be your stories, and it’s how you’ll get there too: by a process of<br />

deliberate, intentional transformation.<br />

For our part, Dachis Group believes strongly in the full-strength<br />

vision of social business as the way that organizations will work now<br />

and in the future. I invite you, after reading Social Business by Design,<br />

to continue your explorations of this topic in our Social Business<br />

Council and track your organization’s progress as it makes the<br />

transformation to the twenty-first century using our Social Business<br />

Index, our strategic online service that helps companies measure<br />

how effective their business is at being social. It can be found<br />

at http://socialbusinessindex.com. These are very exciting times<br />

indeed, for organizations that are prepared to build the road ahead.<br />

Austin, Texas<br />

February 2012<br />

Jeff Dachis


INTRODUCTION<br />

Ask just about anyone today about social media, and they will<br />

probably acknowledge using Facebook, knowing something<br />

about Twitter, and admit that social media are a widespread, perhaps<br />

even global, trend. Push them a bit further, and they will affirm that<br />

social media are genuinely significant somehow, but they might have<br />

a hard time pinning down exactly how or why. If you probe deeper yet<br />

and ask them if or how social media will transform the way businesses<br />

work, most people won’t have a clear answer at all. This is entirely<br />

understandable, given that the digital world has virtually remade the<br />

means and tools of digital communication in just a few years.<br />

Keeping track of changes and catching up to the pace of change<br />

has been hard for even the most dogged marketing manager, product<br />

engineer, customer care lead, information technology manager, or<br />

C-level executive. As a recipe for making operations rather difficult<br />

for businesses to effectively engage their customers, workers, and<br />

the broader market in the new digital landscape, it’s almost perfect.<br />

Fortunately, it no longer has to be this way. As the understanding<br />

of the changes in our pervasively networked, digital world grows, we<br />

believe that organizations can, by design, make their way into the<br />

1


2 SOCIAL BUSINESS BY DESIGN<br />

future by incorporating the powerful new ways of working that social<br />

media represent deeply into the primary functions of their business.<br />

The shift to social media is happening all around us every day. A<br />

broad demographic change in the way that people connect and communicate,<br />

as well as work and live together, began in the mid-2000s.<br />

The change has been labeled with many names: social networking, Enterprise<br />

2.0, crowdsourcing, customer community, social marketing, and any of<br />

the other catchphrases that we explore in this book. Because of social<br />

media’s different way of getting results, the exact nature of changes<br />

that they cause in businesses, organizations, government, and even<br />

our personal lives has sometimes been hard to pin down. However,<br />

they can be much more precisely and elegantly defined than even<br />

a couple of years ago. What’s more, the key operating principles of<br />

social media can be synthesized into simple, easy-to-understand tenets<br />

to apply to work. These tenets are presented here for the first time.<br />

In this book, we show exactly why and how organizations must<br />

change to survive. Among the many reasons are better financial<br />

performance, improved competitive positioning, and long-term sustainability.<br />

But accepting the importance of social media is no longer<br />

an act of faith: we lay out clear evidence in the chapters that follow that<br />

social media are not only transformational to most aspects of enterprises,<br />

but also truly better, higher-performing new ways of doing<br />

business. In Parts One and Two, we present cutting-edge data<br />

matched with eye-opening examples that show how social media,<br />

when applied to the way we work, are becoming something known<br />

as ‘‘social business.’’<br />

There is occasionally concern in some quarters that social media<br />

are technology-driven phenomena and that primarily technologyoriented<br />

companies are best at adopting the new digital ways of<br />

working. The evidence here shows that this worry is overblown:<br />

virtually all organizations can access the benefits of social business,<br />

and although some of the early examples we present here are from<br />

technology companies that blazed trails, many of the best examples<br />

come from those that are as far from the technology industry as can


Introduction 3<br />

be imagined such as consumer packaged goods company Procter &<br />

Gamble and MillerCoors, the well-known beverage conglomerate.<br />

What then do organizations need to understand in order to<br />

begin the process of becoming a social business by design? We<br />

think it’s a clear understanding of the basic ideas, distilled in a<br />

way that’s eminently understandable. Distributed across the first<br />

ten chapters are the clearest declaration yet of what social business<br />

fundamentally consists of, collected and organized here as ten core<br />

tenets of social business. Studying, understanding, and absorbing<br />

these ideas, designed to be approachable by anyone in the business<br />

world, free from tools, technologies, or situation, must be the objective<br />

of anyone who intends to deeply understand the subject and drive<br />

social business transformation in their organization.<br />

GETTING TO SOCIAL BUSINESS<br />

We have been fortunate enough to have seen and helped many<br />

organizations start down the road of social business, and the journey<br />

certainly can be long and arduous. Yet it’s also often highly rewarding.<br />

The biggest obstacle is the encouragement and realization of<br />

real change. The hard-won lesson is that becoming a social business<br />

requires cultural, operational, and technology changes. Of the three,<br />

the first two are by far the most time-consuming and challenging<br />

to realize, although all three require sustained, conscientious effort.<br />

Yet the examples in this book make clear that the same set of<br />

strategic changes needs to be made by all companies, even as organizations<br />

often discover they already have dozens—and sometimes<br />

hundreds—of individual social media efforts, large and small, each<br />

trying to drive the same type of transformation.<br />

Many organizations have begun centralizing their efforts, organizing<br />

at a high level around many of the thorniest and most difficult<br />

aspects, while allowing everyone in the organization to become a<br />

social businessperson. Parts One and Two of this book lay out the<br />

strongest possible case that organizations must begin the process of


4 SOCIAL BUSINESS BY DESIGN<br />

moving to social business; Part Three then explores how to make it<br />

happen functionally and throughout the enterprise. Getting to social<br />

business is a deliberate, conscious process—at least for now. It’s also<br />

the core idea behind this book. More and more businesses want to<br />

get there, but encouraging and enabling is really all they can do. The<br />

rest is up to the universe of participants, and that’s where the story<br />

gets most interesting.<br />

Organizations that want to take the shortest route to becoming<br />

social businesses can arm themselves with the data, examples,<br />

and approaches we present in this book, which are distilled in an<br />

actionable way as never before. We hope that your social business<br />

will become a highly successful organization that you codesign with<br />

the world.


Contents<br />

Preface ix<br />

Acknowledgments xi<br />

About the Authors xv<br />

Introduction 1<br />

1 The Backchannel: Bringing the Social<br />

Conversation to the Forefront 7<br />

2 Social TV Guides: Curating Social Media<br />

for Content Discovery 33<br />

3 TV Check-In Services: Creating Vertical Social<br />

Networks around Television 57<br />

4 The Second Screen: Enhancing TV with<br />

Synched Content Experiences 81<br />

5 Social TV Ratings: Adding a New Dimension<br />

to Television Audience Measurement 109<br />

6 Bridge Content: Driving Engagement<br />

In-Between Episode Airings 133<br />

7 Audience Addressability: Using Online and<br />

Direct Mail Targeting Practices on TV 157<br />

8 TV Everywhere: Watching TV Content<br />

Whenever and Wherever 177<br />

vii


viii<br />

Contents<br />

9 Connected TVs: Blending Online Content<br />

with Television Content 203<br />

10 Conclusion (for Now): Connecting the Dots 227<br />

11 To Be Continued . . .: Filling in the Gaps 241<br />

Notes 245<br />

Index 259


Preface<br />

What Is in a Name?<br />

Television has always been social. It would seem, then, that the<br />

name of our book, Social TV, implies that there is nothing new to<br />

say about the beloved entertainment medium. Yet that could not be<br />

further from the truth. Television nowadays is a very different experience<br />

than it was in 1941, when TV advertisements fi rst began airing<br />

in the United States. 1<br />

According to its strictest defi nition, the phrase “social TV” was<br />

coined to depict the convergence of television and social media.<br />

However, social TV has often been used in recent years as a catchall<br />

expression when referring to the modern era of television. While<br />

we tend to prefer the former defi nition, we painted using broad<br />

brush strokes throughout the book.<br />

Television’s love affair with social media comprises a sizable chunk<br />

of our narrative. We also tackle the effect that mobile and tablet<br />

devices have had on the medium (Chapters 4 and 8) and examine the<br />

growing impact of Internet-connected TVs (Chapter 9). Recognizing<br />

that the blending of media also gives TV audiences a much more<br />

personalized experience, we even included a section dedicated to<br />

addressable advertising (Chapter 7).<br />

We wrote this book as a guide for marketers. Each chapter illustrates<br />

a slice of the television landscape, fraught with examples and<br />

case studies, followed by a deep dive into the advertising implications<br />

that result. Mobile QR codes conclude each chapter. By simply<br />

scanning these with your smartphone, you will access “second<br />

ix


x<br />

Preface<br />

screen” companion content that brings to life many of the examples<br />

we illustrate within the book.<br />

We intend Social TV to appeal not only to brands but also agencies,<br />

television networks, content creators, educators, and even<br />

TV viewers. In order to keep the book manageable in size and<br />

scope, we focus primarily on broadcast television series and events.<br />

While we have included some content on news and sports, each of<br />

those verticals could be a book in and of themselves.<br />

Though we interviewed nearly fi fty companies and featured<br />

many additional ones throughout Social TV, it simply was not possible<br />

to include a description of or story about every player within<br />

the space. New companies with interesting solutions seem to crop<br />

up every week. So instead, we attempted to provide enough of a<br />

representative cross-section to help illustrate the most important<br />

trends that are impacting television today. You will also notice<br />

that—because things are changing at breakneck speed—Chapter 11<br />

can only be accessed online. We purposefully waited to write the<br />

last chapter just as Social TV was released in order to bring you<br />

the most up-to-date information.<br />

That is why one need not go back over seven decades to witness<br />

the profound shift in the media landscape. Television is changing<br />

before our very eyes. It is a perpetual work in progress; a living<br />

medium infl uenced by advances in technology and evolutions<br />

in human culture. Yet as TV continues to change in both form<br />

and function, it will forever remain social at its core. Welcome to<br />

Social TV.<br />

—Mike and Stacey


Introduction<br />

The World of Tomorrow<br />

On Thursday, April 20, 1939, Radio Corporation of America<br />

President David Sarnoff announced the dawn of commercial television<br />

in the United States. Sarnoff’s remarks described the medium<br />

as “a new art, so important in its implications, that it is bound to<br />

affect all society.” 1<br />

His address strategically took place 10 days before the opening<br />

ceremony of the New York World’s Fair. Themed as “The World of<br />

Tomorrow,” the RCA-owned National Broadcasting Company fi ttingly<br />

transmitted US President Franklin D. Roosevelt’s keynote<br />

address over the airwaves, marking the offi cial birth of regularly<br />

scheduled television broadcasts in the United States. 2<br />

With much public allure surrounding this new medium, Popular<br />

Mechanics featured an article by Mr. Sarnoff in its September 1939<br />

issue, simply titled, “The Future of Television.” Underscoring the<br />

importance of content in the pioneering world of TV, Sarnoff wrote,<br />

“Let us consider next what sort of programming material tele vision<br />

may present to its audience.” 3 Throughout the many decades to<br />

come, writers and producers rose to the challenge to create programming<br />

that entertained and touched television audiences by<br />

providing them with a temporary escape from the often stark realities<br />

of the world outside of their living rooms.<br />

Many remember watching Lucy and Ethel try to wrap chocolate<br />

candies off of a speedy conveyor belt on September 15, 1952 in<br />

what is today a classic I Love Lucy moment. 4 Forty-four percent of<br />

households tuned in to The Beverly Hillbillies on January 8, 1964 to<br />

1


2<br />

Introduction<br />

see Granny chase a kangaroo around the Clampetts’ home in “The<br />

Giant Jackrabbit” episode. 5<br />

Audiences were in tears by the dramatic story told in Roots, an<br />

eight-part miniseries that made its debut on January 23, 1977. 6<br />

The Cosby Show’s young Rudy Huxtable endeared us when she lipsynched<br />

Margie Hendricks on October 10, 1984. 7 “Yadda Yadda<br />

Yadda” is forever ingrained in our common lexicon thanks to the<br />

hilarious April 24, 1997 episode of Seinfeld. 8 And millions of viewers<br />

watched a star be born on September 4, 2002, as Kelly Clarkson<br />

was named the very fi rst American Idol. 9<br />

Television has produced countless resonant moments throughout<br />

its history. Even those who have not been moved or affected<br />

by a TV series have most certainly been impacted by watching<br />

events, news, or sports unfold across their screens. As Sarnoff wrote<br />

in 1939, “With the advent of television, the combined emotional<br />

results of both seeing and hearing an event or a performance at the<br />

instant of its occurrence become new forces to be reckoned with.”<br />

But TV shows, events, news, and sports are not the only content<br />

on television.<br />

TV Advertising Can Resonate Too<br />

A television commercial is also content that has the potential to<br />

evoke resonance. The phrase, “I cry at Hallmark commercials” is a<br />

common and familiar one. It is hard to forget the 1979 Coca-Cola<br />

ad featuring a disgruntled Mean Joe Greene limping his way down<br />

a football stadium ramp. After being given a bottle of Coke from a<br />

young boy, the Pittsburgh Steelers defensive player gently tosses his<br />

football jersey to him saying, “Hey kid. Catch.” 10<br />

We were similarly heartened in 2011 by a young “Darth Vader”<br />

trying to exert his telekinetic powers on a series of objects in and<br />

around his house: the exercise bike, the family dog, the washer<br />

and dryer, a baby doll, and even his sandwich. To his extreme disappointment,<br />

“the Force” did not seem to be strong within him. But


Introduction 3<br />

then his dad, arriving home from work, pulls up his Volkswagen<br />

Passat into the driveway. A reinvigorated “Vader” seizes the opportunity<br />

to give his powers a go just one more time. As he channels<br />

all of his concentration and might while extending and pointing<br />

his arms toward the front of the car, the ignition suddenly fi res<br />

(thanks to Dad using the remote starter). Our adorable Darth Vader<br />

is visibly shocked that, from his point of view, the Force came<br />

through for him after all.<br />

The resonance of this particular Volkswagen TV commercial<br />

drove people online to experience it again and to share it with others.<br />

The offi cial VW YouTube upload has generated over 45 million<br />

views 11 and is a great example of how the Web and television are<br />

complementing versus competing with one another.<br />

The Internet Did Not Kill Television<br />

While many people have proclaimed the death of television, the<br />

over-70-year-old medium is as healthy and alive as it has ever<br />

been. In fact, we are watching more television than ever before.<br />

According to research company Nielsen, the average American<br />

watches just over 35 hours of television per week, 12 in spite of the<br />

rise in online and mobile video viewing. The Internet has not killed<br />

TV; it has actually become its best friend. It is a companion for the<br />

growing masses of television viewers who are simultaneously going<br />

online while tuning in to their favorite shows.<br />

The Web, social media, and mobile are rapidly converging with<br />

television and affecting the way in which we experience programming.<br />

David Sarnoff wrote a prophetic statement in 1939:<br />

“Television will fi nally bring to people in their homes, for the fi rst<br />

time in history, a complete means of instantaneous participation in<br />

the sights and sounds of the entire outer world.”<br />

Over seven decades later, we are facing a period of déjà vu. Social<br />

media has created a new and powerful “backchannel” that is fueling<br />

the renaissance of live broadcasts. Mobile and tablet devices allow


4<br />

Introduction<br />

us to watch and experience both on-demand and live television<br />

whenever and wherever we want. And “connected TVs” blend Web<br />

and television content into a unifi ed big screen experience—once<br />

again, at the center of our living rooms.<br />

Although the television industry is undergoing a grandiose state<br />

of fl ux, it is also in the midst of one of its most exciting time periods;<br />

the outcome of which will only make TV more compelling, more<br />

interactive, and more accessible. And while the way in which we<br />

experience television continues to evolve, the medium is here to stay.<br />

The rise of a new medium does not always mean the end of another.<br />

What Does This Mean<br />

for Television Advertising?<br />

Just as television is changing, so is its advertising. The blending<br />

of media channels has created new opportunities for marketers to<br />

reach and engage with their target audiences. And this shifting television<br />

landscape is not just affecting advertising creative, but also<br />

how agencies plan and buy media.<br />

Brands can no longer simply consider the program that is being<br />

broadcast on the television set; to do so is myopic and frankly,<br />

shortsighted. They must instead look at the larger cross-channel<br />

media experience that occurs nowadays with TV audiences in order<br />

to maximize their brand’s impact within an ever-increasing distracted<br />

world.<br />

The core of social TV starts with the backchannel, which is why<br />

we begin the book here. This is comprised of the millions of public<br />

conversations happening online while television programming airs.<br />

Brands who fi nd ways to align themselves with or be a part of the<br />

backchannel unlock an entire audience with whom to engage.<br />

Following Chapter 1, the next chapters are sequenced in the<br />

order in which audiences tend to experience television. Chapter 2<br />

tackles the quickly evolving social TV guide landscape and examines<br />

how individuals discover what to watch in the modern era of


Introduction 5<br />

television. Once one knows what he or she is going to watch, they<br />

may use any myriad of TV check-in apps that are growing in numbers<br />

and features, as illustrated in Chapter 3. Chapter 4 builds from<br />

our backchannel chapter and dives more deeply into the second<br />

screen experiences that television viewers have while watching TV.<br />

We discuss the concept of “synchronized applications” here, which<br />

provide opportunities for synched advertising.<br />

Starting with Chapter 5, we examine what happens after a TV<br />

episode concludes to investigate the correlation between social<br />

media engagement and television ratings. We look not just at the<br />

TV shows themselves but also how to measure “social ratings”<br />

for TV commercials. Chapter 6 addresses the engagement with<br />

television shows that happens in between their episode airings—<br />

something we call “bridge content.” When executed well, this can<br />

be a welcomed and ripe territory for branded entertainment.<br />

Chapter 7 begins to take a turn in the television landscape with<br />

addressable advertising. The ability to target television commercials<br />

to eliminate any wasted impressions is the Holy Grail for brands.<br />

Chapter 8 gets us outside of the living room and illustrates the portability<br />

and accessibility of television that exists thanks in large part<br />

to mobile and tablet devices. Chapter 9 tackles the notion of Web<br />

plus television convergence head-on to bring to light the opportunities<br />

for brands within the connected TV world.<br />

Our book concludes with a case study that ties all of the previous<br />

chapters together. We also illustrate how the blending of media<br />

is only going to continue making it that much more complex<br />

for brands to navigate. Given this, we highlight specifi c advice to<br />

advertisers from several of the industry leaders we interviewed<br />

to round out the chapter and the book.<br />

Cutting to the Chase<br />

The punch line of the book is a simple one—and it all points back<br />

to content. As it relates to television, people want to talk about and


6<br />

Introduction<br />

share the programming (including advertising) that resonates the<br />

most with them. Social media cannot and will not save a bad show<br />

or make poor products and services “look good.” But social media<br />

absolutely has a powerful amplifi cation effect in the presence of resonant<br />

content. And the evidence of this exists right before our very<br />

eyes in the millions of social impressions that comprise television’s<br />

backchannel.<br />

Scan for More<br />

Scan this QR code using your mobile device for videos and visuals<br />

of the examples referenced throughout this section.<br />

Don’t have a smartphone with a QR reader app? No problem.<br />

You can access companion content directly by going to http://www<br />

.socialtvbook.net/tagged/introduction.


THE<br />

ULTIMATE<br />

ONLINE<br />

CUSTOMER<br />

SERVICE<br />

GUIDE<br />

How to Connect With Your Customers to<br />

MARSHA COLLIER<br />

Bestselling Author of Starting an eBay Business for Dummies


Contents<br />

Introduction 1<br />

1 The Art of Customer Service 13<br />

2 Quality Real-World, Small-Business Customer Service 29<br />

3 Using Your Web Site to Connect with Your Customer 47<br />

4 Developing a Blog to Engage Customers 61<br />

5 Connecting with Your Customers Where They Play 71<br />

6 Microblogging for Service, Fun, and Profi t 85<br />

7 Checking Out Where Customers Review<br />

Your Business 109<br />

8 Knowing Your Customers’ Expectations:<br />

How to Connect 119<br />

iii


iv Contents<br />

9 Platforms to Enhance the Experience 145<br />

10 Engaging Your Employees as Brand Ambassadors 169<br />

11 Pioneers of Online Community: How They Did It 187<br />

12 Small-Business Examples: How They Did It Right 205<br />

13 Lessons from Big Business: Leaders in<br />

Customer Service 221<br />

Index 245


Introduction<br />

Though I’ve run a small business for much of my life, I’m a consumer,<br />

as well.<br />

It’s human nature to desire choice. We want to be able to<br />

choose one item over another or one vendor over another, based<br />

on a variety of reasons. When we exchange our hard-earned money<br />

for an item or a service, we ask for something else in return: to be<br />

treated with respect and honesty. We prefer to do business with<br />

people “like us,” because we want to believe that those we trust<br />

to have our best interests at heart. Think about it: Have you ever<br />

asked a sales clerk in a clothing store how a particular outfi t looked<br />

on you? How handsome you looked in that fl ashy sports car?<br />

I’ve been writing about eBay for e-commerce vendors for over<br />

12 years, and in that time I’ve seen thousands of homespun businesses<br />

fail in their attempts to become work-from-home moguls.<br />

Why? Because many felt—due to the fact that they were selling<br />

online—they could omit the personal touch. It made selling so<br />

much easier (or so they thought) to never have to actually deal<br />

with their customers. They thought they could ignore the small<br />

1


2 The Ultimate Online Customer Service Guide<br />

niceties that made customers happy to be doing business with<br />

them. Time—and a lot of unsuccessful companies—have shown<br />

that these assumptions were wrong.<br />

If merchants or service providers put their bottom line before<br />

the customer, they will doom their businesses to ultimate failure.<br />

They may fl ourish for a while, maybe even long enough to<br />

sell their business to another company and walk away with a<br />

healthy profi t. But to create a long-term, stable business, you need<br />

to have long-term, loyal customers. The best companies grow as a<br />

result of positive word of mouth—both in the real world and on<br />

the Internet.<br />

Online customer service is an important part of marketing<br />

your business. Brilliant, spot-on marketing not only generates<br />

revenue for your bottom line; it’s also a way to make your customer’s<br />

life easier. When you give someone quality service, you’re a<br />

step ahead of your competition.<br />

Most customer service experts fi ll the books they write and<br />

their conference presentations with instructions for growing<br />

larger businesses. Though they can charge thousands of dollars<br />

for their advice, it’s often not completely translatable to a smallstaffed<br />

enterprise.<br />

I enjoy working with small businesses; they’re the bread<br />

and butter of our economy. There are a lot more mom-and-pops<br />

out there than there are big businesses. As you’ll learn in The<br />

Ultimate Online Customer Service Guide, mom-and-pop businesses<br />

can employ more than a hundred people, and without losing<br />

their personal attachment to their business. Whether we choose<br />

to work in a large or small business environment differs from<br />

one person to another, of course; some people are more geared<br />

to the detachment inherent in running a big business. However,<br />

there are plenty of us who enjoy being part of the daily excitement<br />

of running our own companies.


Introduction 3<br />

Small businesspeople have the benefi t of putting their hearts<br />

into what they do, every single day. They truly care about whether<br />

their customers enjoy the food, clothing, or the service they pro -<br />

vide. It’s personal to them; it should be personal to their customers.<br />

I’ve been working with small and medium businesses for<br />

most of my career. I’ve aided companies that work out of garages,<br />

spare rooms, and even barns. I’ve helped these individuals fi gure<br />

out where they should spend their money to grow, and spoken<br />

with them on even the deepest, most personal levels. I’ve heard<br />

from students, newlyweds, career changers, and retirees, and I’ve<br />

found that pretty much everyone has the same goal: They want<br />

to make more money. Sadly, however, I’ve also learned that only<br />

a small percentage really wants to work for it.<br />

Those who understand that nothing comes easy, and that the<br />

traditional work ethic pays off, become thriving entrepreneurs.<br />

Such people become the heart and soul of small business; and<br />

it is these small companies that often can reach their customers<br />

online much more adeptly than large corporations.<br />

Just how important is small business to our overall economy?<br />

As defi ned by the Small Business Administration (SBA), “small<br />

businesses” are those with fewer than 500 employees—a risktaking,<br />

“crazy” group of entrepreneurs who create more than<br />

half of the nonfarm, private gross domestic product (GDP) in<br />

the United States—yes, more than half. Need more proof as to<br />

how important small businesses are to the economic health of our<br />

country? These organizations:<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Represent 99.7 percent of all employer fi rms.<br />

Employ just over half of all private-sector employees.<br />

Pay 44 percent of total U.S. private payroll.<br />

Have generated 64 percent of net new jobs over the past 15<br />

years.


4 The Ultimate Online Customer Service Guide<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Hire 40 percent of high-tech workers—like scientists, engineers,<br />

and computer programmers.<br />

Are 52 percent home-based and 2 percent franchises.<br />

Comprised 97.3 percent of all identifi ed exporters, and produced<br />

30.2 percent of the known export value in 2007.<br />

Produce 13 times more patents per employee than large patenting<br />

fi rms—patents that are twice as likely as large-fi rm<br />

patents to be among the 1 percent most cited. 1<br />

An earlier study found that of the 5,369,068 employer fi rms<br />

in the United States, 99.7 percent had fewer than 500 employees,<br />

and 78.8 percent had fewer than 10 employees in 1997. More<br />

recent data also suggests that very small fi rms—those with fewer<br />

than 10 employees—hire part-time employees at a rate almost<br />

twice that of very large fi rms (1,000 or more employees). If small<br />

fi rms did not hire these part-time employees, they might otherwise<br />

be unemployed.<br />

I worked with brick-and-mortar retailers for over a decade,<br />

managing advertising and marketing for several super-regional<br />

malls (shopping centers with more than 800,000 square feet of<br />

leasable area) during their heyday in the 1990s. But just because<br />

they were big didn’t mean that they always took their customers’<br />

needs into consideration.<br />

One Los Angeles center I handled was part of a national<br />

chain. The corporate offi ce expected the mall to run the standard<br />

advertising program (designed for suburban white neighborhoods)<br />

in this center’s highly Hispanic market. My proposed<br />

idea of running a bilingual campaign, which featured models in<br />

1 U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of the Census and International Trade<br />

Administration; SBA Advocacy-funded research by Kathryn Kobe and CHI<br />

Research, Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics, 2007.


Introduction 5<br />

the ads that refl ected members of the community, was seen as<br />

heresy—initially. But since sales were falling, they were ready to<br />

try my “wacky idea,” to respect the predominant customer culture.<br />

In retrospect, it seems shocking that my theory was once<br />

considered ground-breaking.<br />

Perhaps that’s why I felt I had to write this book. Much that I<br />

see and hear nowadays—including the advice of well- intentioned<br />

experts—ignores the human element of business. A good product<br />

is paramount, yes, but if there’s no personal connection in the<br />

way you relate to your customers, you will not succeed. It may<br />

take time to fail, but the fall will come. Marketing with the goal<br />

of making your customer feel included and part of your community<br />

is in your—and your customers’—best interest. It places your<br />

business within their trusted circle. Communication is the best<br />

way to strengthen your customer’s loyalty.<br />

Another of my clients, an e-commerce company, needed me<br />

to help them expedite their product photography by automating<br />

their storage and shipping. After we implemented changes, the<br />

company was running like a Swiss clock. Its profi ts went from<br />

tens of thousands to hundreds of thousands . . . and then I got a<br />

call. The company was about to be thrown off of eBay (its largest<br />

market at the time). Why, I asked incredulously. Its business<br />

model was near-perfect.<br />

Upon arriving at headquarters, I interviewed the people in<br />

the customer service department. I learned that their computers<br />

were clogged with complaint e-mails, and reps were sending<br />

out automated responses without following up with customers.<br />

Eventually, the staff began deleting e-mails en masse due to their<br />

frustration. I told them they had to make customer service a top<br />

priority, that they had to make things right. They had to learn<br />

how to “take it in the shorts” when they were at fault.<br />

Unfortunately, they didn’t take me seriously, and this<br />

company ended up spending thousands of dollars on highly


6 The Ultimate Online Customer Service Guide<br />

billing consultants, to no avail. Customers fi led Federal Trade<br />

Commission (FTC) complaints, and you can probably guess<br />

the outcome. A brilliant business model was ruined due to one<br />

organization’s lack of concern for its customers. Though it had<br />

spent thousands on consultants and fancy marketing tools, without<br />

the primary ingredient—respect for the customer—it was<br />

doomed.<br />

Perhaps it was the advent of technology that has caused us<br />

to stray from the personalization of our businesses. Technology<br />

has enabled more people to run successful businesses for a lot less<br />

money, a lot of them remotely. Sadly, there’s no humanity involved<br />

in the kind of technologies that have been sold to businesses.<br />

Since the beginning of civilization, wealth and businesses<br />

were built on a simple tenet: Someone sold something to someone<br />

else. This is nothing new; it’s been this way since biblical<br />

times. Whether we’re trading, interacting, or selling, we are all<br />

customers and vendors in one form or another. Most would argue<br />

that this “oldest profession” relies on the exchange of favors for<br />

money; but, indeed, the oldest profession is merely a form of<br />

entrepreneurship.<br />

At the turn of the century, my great-grandmother supported<br />

her three sons by standing on the docks at Ellis Island and buying<br />

the long tresses of immigrant women as they came off the<br />

ships. (There was an entire community of settlers who made a<br />

living from one another. Money for an immigrant in a new country<br />

was a huge factor in starting out right, and they all helped<br />

each other.) My great-grandmother would then sell the hair to<br />

wig makers, whose creations festooned the heads of New York’s<br />

elite. Though I suppose it was considered a cottage industry back<br />

then, my great-grandmother would likely be called an entrepreneur<br />

today. Whatever the label, it was a win-win situation for<br />

all involved. She worked on trust and reputation. Those weren’t<br />

easy days for anyone.


Introduction 7<br />

Consider any job or occupation nowadays. Everything<br />

involves selling—taking the risk, developing a business—all for<br />

the sake of profi t in the end.<br />

But what about employees? Yes, there are ranks of workers<br />

who perhaps do not even come in contact with your clients.<br />

However, their effort is refl ected in your company’s bottom line.<br />

Your goal for your business is to turn a profi t, but you can’t do this<br />

without customers, and your employees are your conduit to gaining<br />

more customers.<br />

Customer service, community, and trust aren’t just terms for the<br />

big guys like the phone company, your credit card provider, or your<br />

Internet service provider. It’s something we all come to expect<br />

from everyone with whom we do business, in one form or another.<br />

As a businessperson, you’ve got to make customer service more than<br />

a buzzword or phrase. It cannot simply be lip service; rather, it has<br />

to be the underlying tenet, the foundation for your business.<br />

In my attempt to become a retail marketing “expert” (though<br />

I really don’t like that term), I attended seminar after seminar,<br />

designed to teach merchants how to “manage” their customers—<br />

because customers are the lifeblood of commerce. I sat in big rooms<br />

with groups of small businesspeople like myself. I listened to the<br />

speakers (because I was told they were experts) and absorbed as<br />

much as I could. I admit that I sat there like the rest of the audience,<br />

nodding my head in agreement with the presenters, even<br />

when I really wasn’t sure what they were talking about. In fact, we<br />

looked like a sea of bobble-head dolls. Looking back, I wonder if<br />

anyone else besides me felt that only a small percentage of what<br />

the speakers were saying really applied to my business situation.<br />

When we attend such conferences, we often get wrapped up<br />

in the plethora of acronyms: VRM, CRM, ACES . . . (they do<br />

go on). We learn; we listen to the experts; we nod our heads in<br />

agreement and vow to follow the latest and greatest customer<br />

acquisition and satisfaction methods.


8 The Ultimate Online Customer Service Guide<br />

A note here on the use of acronyms: I will not use acronyms in<br />

this book; instead, I will use the actual words, and defi ne the<br />

more popular ones. Too many of us often fall into the habit<br />

of using this kind of techno-jargon because the terms fl y off<br />

the tongue so easily, making our conversation seem so much<br />

more effi cient. But using acronyms can make communication<br />

less meaningful and more unintelligible for those who do not<br />

use or hear them regularly. It’s too easy to forget, for example,<br />

that the “C” in CRM stands for customer. Our customers are<br />

not just a “C,” and we must never lose sight of that.<br />

We read blogs and books, attend these conferences, and listen<br />

to the experts, all the while trying to make a complicated<br />

science out of a basic human need: the desire to be treated with<br />

respect. We are all clients, customers, patients, consumers, shoppers;<br />

we all exchange money for services and merchandise. As<br />

consumers with choices, we can go anywhere we want to spend<br />

our money. The one thing we all have in common is that we are<br />

human beings. As human beings, we hope to maintain a little<br />

dignity in our everyday lives—including when we make buying<br />

decisions. We hope that manufacturers and providers will have a<br />

little respect for us and our family.<br />

Respect for your customer—and the hard-earned money they<br />

pay for your service or merchandise—is the key to giving superior<br />

customer service.<br />

Our society used to care whether we got value for our dollars.<br />

But lately, we just seem to be looking for the cheapest, quickest,<br />

easiest way to acquire products and services. In this process, we<br />

don’t always respect the seller or supplier, do we? Yet when we get<br />

lousy, disrespectful treatment, it makes us angry and annoyed.


Introduction 9<br />

You might say that, in many instances, human respect—both<br />

toward and from our vendors—has diminished signifi cantly in<br />

recent years. We need to turn this around and begin to provide<br />

a good customer experience for all customers, without charging<br />

ridiculously high prices.<br />

Where do you go to complain when you feel that you’ve been<br />

wronged by a business? What happens when something goes<br />

awry? Who do you turn to? That’s when we pay the high cost for<br />

our low expectations.<br />

We have lots of new tools on the Internet—specifi cally,<br />

within social media—that are meant to help us engage and interact<br />

with our customers. And, again, there are a lot of experts out<br />

there who are making fortunes showing us how to use these tools.<br />

Blogs and Web sites like Facebook and Twitter are the shiny<br />

new things. In fact, many claim to be the panacea that will make<br />

all our customer service woes disappear—and bring millions to<br />

our doors.<br />

I’ve always put my e-mail address in the introduction of all my<br />

books, and tried to make myself accessible to anyone who writes to<br />

me. Considering the number of books I’ve sold over the past few<br />

years—well, you can just imagine how many people have contacted<br />

me. And though it’s taken a lot of my time, I want to hear stories of<br />

businesses that thrive, and I enjoy seeing people overcome their problems<br />

on the way to success—because I really do care when someone<br />

reads my words and acts on them. I want to know what worked—<br />

and what didn’t—in order to better serve my future readers.<br />

I also get e-mails every day from readers of my Google profi<br />

le, blog, or the feedback on my Web site, www.coolebaytools<br />

.com. While there is a disclaimer on my Web site that states that<br />

I can’t always respond to every e-mail I get, I guarantee that I read<br />

them all—and I do. I receive questions that run the gamut from<br />

basic to advanced, and it can be overwhelming at times. I often


10 The Ultimate Online Customer Service Guide<br />

fi nd myself resisting the urge to say, “You can fi nd that information<br />

on page 126 of Title XYZ.” I answer as often as I can, and try<br />

to be helpful—because I know that in order to keep an online<br />

community alive, both my supporters and I must remain active<br />

within it.<br />

Social media can do all that and more. In The Ultimate Online<br />

Customer Service Guide, I will use everyday examples to show you<br />

how businesses are doing it right, as well as discuss those that are<br />

doing it wrong.<br />

You can build a community with your customers. That’s<br />

another term we hear a lot of these days. But community has<br />

always been the backbone of trust. Great-grandma had her community<br />

of immigrants, who supported each other and kept in contact.<br />

In the early days of our country, communities were formed to<br />

help people develop a feeling of worth. In the 1950s, they met at<br />

Floyd’s barber shop and shared their daily news and gossip. In the<br />

1990s, our communities took the form of malls, where everyone<br />

shopped, met for lunch, and attended events.<br />

We have always embraced communities for introducing us to<br />

people with whom we have things in common. Nowadays, these<br />

communities are centered not only around schools and churches,<br />

sports and hobbies, but we can also fi nd them on the Internet.<br />

Community has likewise become part of corporate culture—<br />

and when it’s done right, it becomes the basis of how we do<br />

business. Remember: Your customer is a human being. You are a<br />

human being. We thrive on respect and being part of a community.<br />

I hate to throw out a cliché like, “Do unto others . . .” but<br />

it’s appropriate here.<br />

Years ago, when someone had a lousy experience with a business,<br />

he or she passed on those negative feelings to perhaps 20 of<br />

his or her friends. Today, via the use of social media, a single one


Introduction 11<br />

of your customers can broadcast a message to a million of his or<br />

her “closest acquaintances.”<br />

Whether you have a retail location or a business practice—<br />

whether you even ever physically interact with your customer—<br />

you can ensure that you have happy customers. Your customers<br />

should always walk away from an interaction with you with a<br />

feeling of wonder—the feeling of “wow.”<br />

Joseph Jaffe, a noted thought leader on new marketing and<br />

president of crayon, described as “a strategic consultancy that<br />

helps its clients achieve positive change and impact by joining<br />

the conversation,” has always been a fan of following the customer’s<br />

humanity. I met him several years ago and have continually<br />

enjoyed his vocal, honest perspectives. In his recent “Customer<br />

Service Manifesto” he echoed the philosophy of this book when<br />

he wrote, “Loving thy neighbor has always made good sense.<br />

Having a customer who loves you back in return makes for good<br />

business sense.”<br />

So hang in there with me and read on. I promise, no jargon or<br />

absolutes; just real-world examples and truths—that you already<br />

know. All you have to do is follow your instincts, while you pick<br />

up some additional tips on how to connect with your customers<br />

online.


foreword by David Meerman Scott<br />

———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————<br />

THE NEW RULES OF SOCIAL MEDIA SERIES


Contents<br />

Foreword by David Meerman Scott xiii<br />

Acknowledgments xvii<br />

Introduction xxi<br />

PART ONE: INBOUND MARKETING 1<br />

Chapter 1. Shopping Has Changed ...Has Your<br />

Marketing? 3<br />

Who Moved My Customers? 6<br />

Inbound in Action: Barack<br />

Obama for President 7<br />

Chapter 2. Is Your Web Site a Marketing Hub? 11<br />

Megaphone Versus Hub<br />

It’s Not What You Say—It’s What Others<br />

11<br />

Say About You 12<br />

Does Your Web Site Have a Pulse? 13<br />

Your Mother’s Impressed, But ... 14<br />

Tracking Your Progress 17<br />

Inbound in Action: 37Signals 18<br />

Chapter 3. Are You Worthy? 21<br />

Creating a Remarkable Strategy 22<br />

Tracking Your Progress 24<br />

Inbound in Action: The Grateful Dead 24<br />

vii


viii<br />

Contents<br />

PART TWO: GET FOUND BY PROSPECTS 27<br />

Chapter 4. Create Remarkable Content 29<br />

Building a Content Factory 30<br />

Variety Is the Spice of Life 30<br />

You Gotta Give to Get 31<br />

Moving Beyond the Width of Your Wallet 31<br />

Tracking Your Progress 32<br />

Inbound in Action: Wikipedia 33<br />

Chapter 5. Get Found in the Blogosphere 35<br />

Getting Your Blog Started Right 36<br />

Authoring Effective Articles 37<br />

Help Google Help You 39<br />

Making Your Articles Infectious 40<br />

Give Your Articles a Push 42<br />

Starting Conversations with Comments 43<br />

Why Blogs Sometimes Fail 44<br />

The Gift That Keeps on Giving 44<br />

Consuming Content with RSS 45<br />

Subscribe to Relevant Industry Blogs 46<br />

Contribute to the Conversation 46<br />

Tracking Your Progress 48<br />

Inbound in Action: Whole Foods 50<br />

Chapter 6. Getting Found in Google 55<br />

Paid Versus Free<br />

A (Brief) Introduction to How Google<br />

56<br />

Works 59<br />

Picking the Perfect Keywords 62<br />

On-Page SEO: Doing the Easy Stuff First 65


Contents ix<br />

Off-Page SEO: The Power of Inbound<br />

Links 73<br />

Black Hat SEO: How to Get Your Site<br />

Banned by Google 76<br />

The Dangers of PPC 80<br />

Tracking Your Progress 81<br />

Inbound Marketing at Work:<br />

DIY Shutters 82<br />

Chapter 7. Get Found in Social Media 85<br />

Creating an Effective Online Profile 86<br />

Getting Fans on Facebook 88<br />

Creating Connections on LinkedIn 93<br />

Gathering Followers on Twitter 103<br />

Driving Traffic with Digg 108<br />

Being Discovered with StumbleUpon 113<br />

Getting Found in YouTube 116<br />

Tracking Your Progress 120<br />

Inbound in Action: FreshBooks 120<br />

PART THREE: CONVERTING CUSTOMERS 127<br />

Chapter 8. Convert Visitors into Leads 129<br />

Compelling Calls to Action 130<br />

Mistakes to Avoid 134<br />

Optimizing Through Experimentation 134<br />

Tracking Your Progress 135<br />

Inbound in Action: Google 135<br />

Chapter 9. Convert Prospects into Leads 137<br />

Landing Page Best Practices 138<br />

Creating Functional Forms 142


x<br />

Contents<br />

Going Beyond the Form 145<br />

A Word of Caution 146<br />

Tracking Your Progress 146<br />

Inbound in Action: Zappos 146<br />

Chapter 10. Convert Leads to Customers 149<br />

Grading Your Leads 149<br />

Nurturing Your Leads 153<br />

Broadening Your Reach 155<br />

Tracking Your Progress 156<br />

Inbound in Action: Kiva 157<br />

PART FOUR: MAKE BETTER DECISIONS 161<br />

Chapter 11. Make Better Marketing Decisions 163<br />

Levels and Definitions 164<br />

Campaign Yield 165<br />

Tracking Your Progress 167<br />

Inbound in Action: Constant Contact 167<br />

Chapter 12. Picking and Measuring Your<br />

People 169<br />

Hire Digital Citizens 170<br />

Hire Analytical Chops 171<br />

Hire for Their Web Reach 172<br />

Hire Content Creators 174<br />

Developing Existing Marketers 175<br />

Tracking Your Progress 175<br />

Inbound in Action: Jack Welch<br />

and GE 178


Contents xi<br />

Chapter 13. Picking and Measuring a PR<br />

Agency 181<br />

Picking a PR Agency 182<br />

Tracking Your Progress 184<br />

Inbound in Action: Solis, Weber,<br />

Defren, & Roetzer 185<br />

Chapter 14. Watching Your Competition 189<br />

Tools to Keep Tabs on Competitors 190<br />

Tracking Your Progress 191<br />

Inbound in Action: TechTarget 192<br />

Chapter 15. On Commitment, Patience and<br />

Learning 195<br />

Tracking Your Progress 196<br />

Inbound in Action: Tom Brady 197<br />

Chapter 16. Why Now? 199<br />

Tools and Resources 203<br />

Tips from the Trenches for Startups 209<br />

Index 217


CHAPTER 1<br />

Shopping Has Changed ...Has<br />

Your Marketing?<br />

The fundamental task of marketers is to spread the word<br />

about their products and services in order to get people to<br />

buy them. To accomplish this task, marketers use a combination<br />

of outbound techniques including e-mail blasts, telemarketing,<br />

direct mail, TV, radio, and print advertising, and trade<br />

shows (or expos) in order to reach their potential buyers.<br />

The problem with these traditional marketing techniques is<br />

that they have become less effective at spreading the word<br />

as people get better at blocking out these interruptions.<br />

Ten years ago, buying a large e-mail list of “targeted<br />

names” and sending newsletters and offers to addresses on<br />

this list worked well. Internet users now routinely employ<br />

spam filters, and the National Canned Spam Act limits a marketer’s<br />

ability to send “unsolicited messages” to people with<br />

whom the company does not have a relationship. According<br />

to the research firm MarketingSherpa, the average open<br />

rate for an e-mail blast has gone down from 39 percent in<br />

2004 to 22 percent in 2008.<br />

Ten years ago, hiring your own internal sales force or<br />

contracting with an external telemarketing firm worked<br />

3


4<br />

Inbound Marketing<br />

well. More recently, Caller ID has become a standard feature<br />

on home, work, and cell phones, and increasing numbers of<br />

people are signing up for the national Do Not Call Registry.<br />

A well-trained telesales rep can go a full day without having<br />

a decent conversation with a prospect.<br />

Ten years ago, sending a piece of direct mail to a large list<br />

of people was an effective way to get business—just ask the<br />

credit card companies—because people looked forward to<br />

opening their mail. Mailboxes are full of junk mixed in with<br />

a few bills, so people pay less attention to them.<br />

Ten years ago, spending tens or hundreds of thousands<br />

of dollars on a TV advertisement was a guaranteed way to<br />

reach a large audience. More recently, people use TiVo/DVRs<br />

to skip advertisements, and in addition the plethora of available<br />

TV channels and the rise of great video content online,<br />

make choice the advertiser’s enemy.<br />

Ten years ago, radio ads were heard by people in their<br />

cars, homes, and workplaces. Today, the emergence of XM/<br />

Sirius radio has dramatically lowered advertising’s reach, and


Shopping Has Changed ...Has Your Marketing? 5<br />

the emergence of the iPod and iTunes has dramatically lowered<br />

the amount of radio people listen to at home and at<br />

work.<br />

Ten years ago, a trade show was a surefire way for businesses<br />

to reach a business audience. Today, many trade<br />

shows have either gone out of business or have seen a significant<br />

decline in attendees due to people preferring to not<br />

spend money on flights, hotel costs, etc. Many people visiting<br />

trade shows now are job seekers and other vendors.


6<br />

Inbound Marketing<br />

Ten years ago, the trade publication was subscribed to<br />

and carefully read by most of your marketplace. Today, trade<br />

publications have been losing subscribers and laying off<br />

staff. These highly-qualified people are now starting blogs—<br />

some of which have become more popular than the trade<br />

publication.<br />

The bottom line is that people are sick and tired of being<br />

interrupted with traditional outbound marketing messages<br />

and have become quite adept at blocking marketers out!<br />

Who Moved My Customers?<br />

People shop and learn in a whole new way compared to<br />

just a few years ago, so marketers need to adapt or risk<br />

extinction. People now use the Internet to shop and gather<br />

information, but where on the Internet do they go—and<br />

how do they use the Internet for these activities? We can<br />

break the Internet down into three main areas.<br />

People primarily shop and gather information through<br />

search engines, such as Google. The average information<br />

seeker conducts dozens of searches per day—and, rather<br />

than listen to a sales rep, read a spam message, watch a TV<br />

ad, or fly to a trade show, most people find it easier to sit at<br />

their desks and find the information online through Google.<br />

In order to take advantage of this new reality, marketers<br />

need to change the way they think about marketing—from<br />

the ground up.<br />

Another place people use to gather information is the<br />

blogosphere and its over 100 million blogs (as of this writing).<br />

Virtually every industry and consumer niche you can<br />

think of has a cadre of online pontificators, many of whom<br />

are quite good. Your target audience is no longer reading<br />

the trade publication, and instead is searching Google and


Shopping Has Changed ...Has Your Marketing? 7<br />

subscribing to blogs written by the folks who used to write<br />

for the trade rag.<br />

The third place people learn/shop is in the social<br />

mediasphere—the name for the collection of social “media”<br />

sites such as Twitter, Facebook, StumbleUpon, LinkedIn,<br />

Digg, Reddit, YouTube and others. These sites started as<br />

niche techie sites, but are becoming mainstream.<br />

To be successful and grow your business and revenues,<br />

you must match the way you market your products with<br />

the way your prospects learn about and shop for your products.<br />

And you do that by generating leads through inbound<br />

marketing.<br />

Inbound in Action: Barack Obama<br />

for President<br />

Regardless of your political views, you can apply the marketing<br />

principles Barack Obama used in his 2008 presidential<br />

campaign—a brilliant example of how to effectively use<br />

inbound marketing to beat bigger, better-funded rivals.<br />

In the run up to 2008, Barack Obama was a little-known<br />

first-term senator from Illinois up against a well-known, wellfunded<br />

Hillary Clinton machine. Early in the race, Obama<br />

realized that using the same outbound marketing rules that<br />

Hillary would likely use would put him on the same playing<br />

field—but the field would be slanted her way.<br />

Because he initially had less funding, Obama couldn’t<br />

compete with Hillary and her e-mail blasts, telemarketing,<br />

direct mail campaigns, and TV and radio advertising.<br />

Instead of playing by the old rules, he made different rules<br />

altogether—many of which relied heavily on inbound marketing.<br />

“The aim of our online campaign,” says Chris Hughes,


8<br />

Inbound Marketing<br />

co-founder of Facebook and Obama’s Internet Strategist,<br />

“was to help individuals understand the values of Barack<br />

Obama and of our campaign and then to make it as easy as<br />

possible for them to actively engage with the campaign’s<br />

work. We tried to open as many direct channels of communication<br />

as possible—using e-mail, text messages, online<br />

networks—and then equip them with the tools to spread<br />

the campaign’s message using networking technology such<br />

as My.BarackObama.com and Facebook.”<br />

The strategy worked. Americans were able to connect<br />

with Obama via his blog, Facebook page (5,800,000<br />

supporters and counting), Twitter (450,000 followers and<br />

counting), LinkedIn (13,000 members and counting), and<br />

YouTube (21,000,000 views and counting), among other<br />

social networks and web sites. The rest, as they say, is<br />

history.<br />

Eric Frenchman, John McCain’s online consultant and<br />

Chief Internet Strategist for the online political agency Connell<br />

Donatelli, Inc., commented on the candidates’ use of<br />

social media throughout the presidential campaign. (His<br />

comments were compiled by Jon Clements who writes<br />

the PR Media Blog found at http://pr-media-blog.co.uk.)<br />

Keynoting the Future of Digital Marketing event in London,<br />

June 2009, Frenchman called search marketing “the<br />

great equalizer” and the “one place where you can compete<br />

or even beat your competition with less money.” He<br />

also noted Obama’s ability to use Facebook effectively: creating<br />

“register to vote” widgets helped him amass over<br />

three millions Facebook followers versus McCain’s 610,000.<br />

Frenchman also made a point that to us is a key to<br />

using social media effectively—rather than use Twitter to<br />

engage in conversations with people, McCain used it as<br />

a “one-way communication vehicle.” In other words, he


Shopping Has Changed ...Has Your Marketing? 9<br />

wasn’t listening to his constituents but instead was talking<br />

“at” them.<br />

Whether you agree or disagree with the candidates is<br />

now moot. The moral of the Obama campaign is this:<br />

inbound marketing, if done right, is a very effective way<br />

to reach your prospective customers. How to do inbound<br />

marketing right is what you’ll learn in this book.<br />

To Do<br />

1. Keep reading this book for “how to” advice.<br />

2. Visit www.barackobama.com and look around.<br />

3. Get fired up to take your market by storm.<br />

4.<br />

5.<br />

6.<br />

( We left these blank for you to write in other “to do’s”<br />

that come to mind.)

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!